The New World Order

by A. Ralph Epperson 



The Great Seal of The 
Unites States 

with a pyramid, eagle, Latin phrases, etc. has been 
reproduced on the reverse side of every American 
dollar bill, but few in America know what these sym- 
bols mean. 

The key to understanding the meaning behind all of 
these symbols is found in the translation of the Latin 
phrase "NOVUS ORDO SECLORUM," ("The New 
World Order") found underneath the pyramid on what 
is known as the Reverse Side of the Great Seal. 

Ralph Epperson has spent 27 years in researching the 
history of the two sides of the Great Seal, and has 
discovered that those who designed them committed 
America to what has been called "A Secret Destiny." 
This future "destiny," called THE NEW WORLD 
ORDER, is so unpleasant that those who wanted the 
changes it entails had to conceal that truth in symbols. 

This book, THE NEW WORLD ORDER, is the amply 
documented explanation of what those symbols mean 
and how they connect to this nation's future. Mr. 
Epperson is making his research available to the 
American people so that they may know just what 
these planners wanted for our future. 


And so that they can take corrective action. 



the phrase 

"NOVUS ORDO SECLORUM” 

as found on the bottom of 
the reverse side of the 
Great Seal of the United States 
is Latin for 

THE NEW WORLD ORDER 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 


Dedication vii 

About the Author viii 

About the Material xi 

Introduction xii 

Chapter One Tomorrow's Rulers 1 

Chapter Two The New Age Movement 10 

Chapter Three Lord Maitreya 19 

Chapter Four The Ancient Mysteries 25 

Chapter Five Secret Societies 32 

Chapter Six Concealed Mysteries 35 

Chapter Seven Serpents, Stars and Suns 40 

Chapter Eight The Author's Clarification .... 58 

Chapter Nine Lucifer Worship 60 

Chapter Ten Becoming a God 74 

Chapter Eleven Sons of Light 79 

Chapter Twelve East and West 87 

Chapter Thirteen The Pyramid of Giza 89 

Chapter Fourteen Obelisks 97 

Chapter Fifteen The Illuminati 104 

Chapter Sixteen Karl Marx, Satanist 198 

Chapter Seventeen Adolf Hitler, Satanist 128 

Chapter Eighteen The Great Seal 133 

Chapter Nineteen The Freemasons 148 

Chapter Twenty Those Who Object 162 

Chapter Twenty-One Albert Pike 169 

Chapter Twenty -Two Hiram Abif 173 

Chapter Twenty-Three The Hierarchy 177 

Chapter Twenty-Four Masonic Obligations 181 

Chapter Twenty-Five The 33rd Degree 185 

Chapter Twenty-Six The Humanists 196 

Chapter Twenty-Seven Situation Ethics 216 


v 



Chapter Twenty-Eight The Attack on Religion 225 

Chapter Twenty-Nine The Attack on the Family ... 229 

Chapter Thirty The Right of Association .... 253 

Chapter Thirty-One The Attack on Education .... 262 

Chapter Thirty -Two Russian Laws 272 

Chapter Thirty-Three The Attack on Property 279 

Chapter Thirty-Four The Attack on Nationalism . . 283 

Chapter Thirty -Five Answering the Skeptic 287 

Chapter Thirty-Six Reagan and Bush 289 

Chapter Thirty-Seven "Eleven Short Years" 296 

Chapter Thirty-Eight The Summation 299 

Chapter Thirty-Nine The Solution 301 

Questions Answered 302 

Footnotes 305 

Selected Bibliography 316 

Index 340 


VI 



ABOUT THE AUTHOR 

When I finished writing my book entitled THE UNSEEN 
HAND, and was preparing it for publication, I decided that I 
would add a brief page describing a little about me and the 
reasons that I had written it. I felt that it would assist the 
reader in understanding my material if I included some brief 
comments about my personal background. I have become an 
avid reader since my graduation from college and I have 
noticed that many of the works I read frequently failed to 
provide some of this background information. 

So I feel that I must include similar information in this, 
my second book. 

I started reading in 1963 when a friend of mine noticed 
that even though I was a college graduate, my knowledge of 
history, political science and economics was woefully lacking. I 
started reading at his insistence, and I haven't stopped since. 
Reading in one subject got me interested in another, and the 
process led me ultimately into the esoteric world of secret so- 
cieties and their concealed symbols. (The word esoteric is de- 
fined as a word or understanding that is intended for or under- 
stood by only a chosen few, as an inner group of disciples or in- 
itiates.) 

As I continued my reading, I started noticing that I was 
discovering the evidence of an enormous truth; a truth that 
had escaped almost all of yesterday's historians. There was no 
question that some of these researchers had been moved to 
expose a part of this truth, but I was unable to find the one 
book that would put the entire story all together. My search for 
that elusive volume continued, but I simply couldn't find it. 

About a year ago, I started feeling the need to write that 
volume myself. 

However, feeling extremely inadequate for a task as impor- 
tant as this one, I decided that I would redouble my efforts to 
locate the one volume that would put it all together into one 
easily understood text. I continued my search into the writings 
of others, hoping to find someone who had performed this task 
before me, but I continued to be unsuccessful. 

Since I was unable to find that one book, 1 decided that I 
had to write it myself. 

This is that effort. 

So, please accept this modest work for what it is: an honest 
attempt to put 26 years of research into one volume, by an 
individual who feels completely inadequate for the task! I can 



assure the reader that my self-perceived inadequacy is only 
because of the importance of the information discovered. 
The chore seems to be doubly difficult: not only must my 
research be thorough, but I must also make the information I 
have uncovered believable. However, I do feel that I have 
succeeded as far as my meager talents have allowed me. 

There is no question that the research I conducted was not 
as exhaustive as it could have been. The more that I read, the 
more that I realized I had to read because the evidence to 
support the conclusions of this book appeared to be nearly 
limitless. However, there comes a time when every researcher 
must conclude that the material that has been already located 
is adequate enough to convince even the most ardent skeptic 
and that any additional material uncovered would only 
duplicate that which had already been found. 

In addition, there are several things I would like the reader 
to know. Quite often I have quoted the comments of several 
writers when one or two would probably have made my point. 
However, there is a reason for this. 

My intention is to make certain that the skeptical reader 
could not claim that I had cited only one writer and that he 
or she could not speak for the others in his or her field. I 
wanted the reader to know that there were several authors who 
made the same point with their writings. In other words, I 
have endeavored to truly document my conclusions by exposing 
the reader to as many writers as possible. I believe that the 
reasons I have endeavored to do this will become clear as the 
reader progresses through this book. 

Secondly, the authors that I have quoted were either those 
that I discovered had a part in the events described in this 
book, or were those who had convinced me that they had per- 
sonally researched the original works of the authors they cited. 
In other words, I am attempting to prove my contentions from 
the writings of those who were either directly involved or have 
thoroughly documented their own research. The reader will 
soon discover that the writers I have cited are many of the 
principal writers in the area of this volume. 

The reason that I have done this is simply because I 
believe that the information that I have uncovered is extremely 
important to the future of the world, and that it must be 
presented in a manner that is as believable as is possible. I 
wnnt the reader to believe this information because it comes 
from the experts in their respective areas of expertise. I also 



believe that the reader will begin to understand why I have re- 
sorted to this strategy as they peruse my book. 

And lastly, I would like the reader to understand that I 
have attempted to keep my comments and or opinions to a 
minimum in this book. I believe that the evidence that I will 

present stands on its own and should be adequate to convince 
even the most ardent skeptic. It will need little if any 

explanation from me. 

In summary, then, I am hopeful that the reader will agree 
with me that I have succeeded in exposing a monumental truth 

that has escaped the overwhelming majority of the historians of 

the past. 


x 



ABOUT THE MATERIAL 

I am convinced that the average reader will find it difficult 
to accept the conclusions in this book. However, that does not 
mean that the evidence is incorrect; it merely indicates that 
most people will consider those conclusions to be simply too in- 
credible to be believed. 

But, because of the implications for the future of not only 
the United States but of the world, if I am correct, it is impera- 
tive that this material be considered, by as many as is possible. 
For this reason, I have attempted to keep the contents of this 
book as readable as I could. 

I am hopeful that each reader will be as dutiful as the 
average jury member. Anyone who has served on a jury will 
remember being admonished by the judge to remain open as 
they consider the evidence to be presented throughout the trial. 
The juror is instructed to ignore any previous prejudices and to 
carefully weigh the evidence presented. 

I can ask no more. 

My goal is to have a positive impact on reversing the plans 
of those who are altering our future. Obviously, to accomplish 
that task, I must convince as many as I can that I am correct 
in my assertions. 

I am therefore hopeful that each reader of this material 
will accept my challenge and remember the admonition of the 
judge: be honestly open and dutifully consider the evidence that 
will presented. 


XI 



INTRODUCTION 


Something is wrong in America! 

Today's newspapers are full of stories about the rampant 
rise in divorce rates; the increasing abuse of children by some 
parents; increases in the incidence of rape; pornography being 
read by an increasing number of people; more crimes against 
property; demands for world government; urgings for national 
borders to fall; Christian churches being closed because they 
will not seek licensing by the state; etc. 

But why are these things happening? Why are all of the 
legacies of the past, the family, national borders, the right to 
practice any chosen religion, the right to private property, 
amongst other things, under such attack? Is it possible that 
there are actually people and organizations who really want 
to change the basic order of things? 

Clues to the answers to these questions can be gleaned 
from some comments made by people and organizations that 
are talking about these wide-reaching changes in the nature 
of our lifestyle. 

An Associated Press dispatch on July 26, 1968 reported: 



INTRODUCTION 


"New York Governor Nelson A. Rockefeller says 
as President he would work toward international 
creation of 'a new world order' 1 

On January 30, 1976, a new document called The Dec- 
laration of Interdependence was introduced to the American 
people. It was signed by 32 Senators and 92 Representatives 
in Washington D.C. and read in part: 

"Two centuries ago our forefathers brought forth a 

new nation; now we must join with others to bring 

forth a new world order." 2 

Another individual who has commented is Henry Kissin- 
ger, former Secretary of State. According to the Seattle Post- 
Intelligence of April 18, 1975, Mr. Kissinger said: 

"Our nation is uniquely endowed to play a cre- 
ative and decisive role in the new order which is 

taking form around us." 3 

President George Bush gave the commencement address 
at Texas A & M University on May 12, 1989, and he used 
similar words as well. His speech was on the subject of 
Soviet-American relations and he was quoted as saying, in 
part: 


"Ultimately, our objective is to welcome the Soviet 

Union back into the world order. 

Perhaps the world order of the future will truly 

be a family of nations." 4 

Historian Walter Mills maintained that prior to World 

War I, Colonel Edward Mandell House, the major advisor to 
Woodrow Wilson, the President at the time, had a hidden 
motive for involving America in the war. The historian wrote: 

"The Colonel's sole justification for preparing such 

a batch of blood for his countrymen was his hope of es- 

tablishing a new world order of peace and security." 5 



INTRODUCTION 


Adolf Hitler, a Socialist, and the head of the German gov- 
ernment prior to and during that nation's involvement in 
World War II, is quoted as saying: 

"... National socialism will use its own revolution 

for the establishing of a new world order." 6 

He confided to Herman Rauschning, the President of the 
Danzig Senate: 

"National Socialism is more than a religion; it is 
the will to create superman." 7 

Hitler added this thought: 

"Well, yes! We are barbarians, and barbarians we 
wish to remain. It does us honor. It is we who will 

rejuvenate the world. 

The present world is near its end. Our only task 

is to sack it." 8 

Another book on his background quoted his comments 
that his NAZI (National Socialist) Party had a hidden 

purpose, one that was not perceived by the world at large. 
Mr. Hitler was quoted as saying: 

"He who has seen in National Socialism only a 

political movement has seen nothing." 9 

The Humanist religion issued a manifesto in 1933 stating 
its beliefs about the world in general. It took the following 

position about the need for the wealthy governments to share 
their wealth with the less fortunate nations: 

"It is the moral obligation of the developed 

nations to provide — through an international 
authority - ... economic assistance ... to the developing 

portions of the globe." 10 

The April, 1974 issue of Foreign Affairs, the quarterly 

periodical issued by the Council on Foreign Relations in New 
York, had an article in it by Richard N. Gardner, the former 
Deputy Assistant Secretary of State for International Organi- 


xiv 



INTRODUCTION 


zations in the Lyndon Johnson and John Kennedy admin- 
istrations. He stated: 

"... we are likely to do better by 
'house of world order' from bottom up 

from the top down .... 

an end run around national 
eroding it piece by piece, is likely to get 
order faster than the old-fashioned assault." 11 

Even the Communist Party is voicing similar thoughts. 
The People's Daily World for Thursday, March 9, 1989, 

contained an article written by Angela Davis. Those familiar 
with Miss Davis will remember that she was the Vice 
Presidential candidate for the Communist Party a few years 
ago. She currently is a member of the National Committee of 
the Communist Party of the United States. She is quoted in 
the paper as saying: 

"One underlying effect of anti-communism in this 

respect is to encourage a certain hesitancy to embrace 
solutions which call for deep, structural, socio-economic 

transformation." 12 

Another Communist, Alexei Kovylov, spoke at an evening 
meeting held at Windstar, Colorado in August, 1985, and 

gave the participants in attendance a surprise presentation. 

He spoke about the 12th World Festival of Youth and 

Students held in Moscow a few months prior to his lecture. 
He said: 

"There were three programs. The first was poli- 
tical and dealt with the various issues of peace and 

disarmament. 

The second was dedicated to environmental [is- 
sues] and to the new international economic order." 13 

The alleged need for a change in the basic way things are 
done is consistent with the teachings of the "father of Com- 
munism," Karl Marx. When he co-authored the COMMUNIST 
MANIFESTO with Frederick Engels in 1848, Mr. Marx wrote 
that the Communists: 


building our 
rather than 

sovereignty, 
us to world 


XV 



INTRODUCTION 


"...openly declare that their ends can be attained 
only by the forcible overthrow of all existing social 

conditions." 14 

Nesta Webster, a writer on the subject of conspiratorial 
organizations in the past, wrote this in her book entitled 
SECRET SOCIETIES: 

"... the revolution desired by the leaders [of world 
revolution] is a moral and spiritual revolution, an 

anarchy of ideas by which all standards set up 

throughout nineteen centuries shall be reversed, all 

honoured traditions trampled under foot, and above all 

the Christian ideal finally obliterated." 15 

Some of the Catholic Popes in the past have commented 
on the major changes coming in the future. One such Pope 

was Pope Pius XI, who wrote the following in 1937: 

"Communism has behind it occult forces which for 

a long time have been working for the overthrow of 

the Christian Social Order ...." 16 

One of the Popes who preceded him. Pope Pius IX, wrote 
this in November, 1846 about the changes that he saw in the 
future: 

"That infamous doctrine of so-called communism 

is absolutely contrary to the natural law itself, and, 

if once adopted, would utterly destroy the rights, 

property and possessions of all men, and even society 

itself." 17 

Another individual who wrote about the future was Dr. 

Jose Arquelles, of an organization known as the Planet Art 
Network. Dr. Arguelles wrote: 

"Also implicit in all these events is a call for 

another way of life, another way of doing things, ... a 

redistribution of global wealth ... in short, a New 

World Order." 18 


XVI 



INTRODUCTION 


Just what the future society was that these people are 
talking about was described, in a brief manner, by Marilyn 
Ferguson in her book entitled THE AQUARIAN CON- 

SPIRACY. She wrote: 

"The new world is the old ~ transformed." 19 

Another clue about what is in store for the future world 
was offered by Dr. James H. Billington, who received his 
doctorate as a Rhodes Scholar at Oxford University, and has 
taught at Harvard and Princeton Universities. He wrote this 
in his book entitled FIRE IN THE MINDS OF MEN: 

"This book seeks to trace the origins of a faith - 
perhaps THE faith of our time. 

What is new is the belief that a perfect secular 

[meaning worldly] order will emerge from the forcible 

overthrow of traditional authority." 20 

That these future changes would involve force and slavery 
was confirmed by B. F. Skinner, chairman of the Psychology 
Department at Harvard University, in his book entitled 

BEYOND FREEDOM AND DIGNITY. Dr. Skinner has been 
called "... the most influential of living American psy- 
chologists" by Time magazine. So the world should listen to 

the professor when he speaks. The magazine told the reader 
what the message of Professor Skinner's book was: 

"We can no longer afford freedom, and so it must 

be replaced with control over man, his conduct and his 

culture." 21 

Another student of these changes is Alvin Toffler, who 

wrote this in his book entitled THE THIRD WAVE: 

"A new civilization is emerging in our lives 

This new civilization brings with it new family styles; 

changed ways of working, loving and living; a new 

economy; new political conflicts; and beyond all this an 
altered consciousness as well. 

The dawn of this new civilization is the single 

most explosive fact of our lifetimes ." 22 


xvii 



INTRODUCTION 


Another scientist involved in commenting upon the future 
changes was Dr. Carl Sagan. He has observed: 

"It's clear that sometime relatively soon in terms of 

the lifetime of the human species people will identify 

with the entire planet and the species ...." 23 

The reason why these changes are necessary was ex- 

plained by Manly P. Hall, perhaps the world's leading 
authority on esoteric words and language. He wrote in his 
book entitled LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY: 

"The time has not yet arrived when the average 
man is strong enough or wise enough to rule himself." 24 

And he explained who he considered worthy enough to 
rule those on the world considered by the experts to be in- 
capable of governing themselves. He wrote: 

"Never will peace reign upon the earth until we are 

ruled by the fit." 25 

Mr. Hall even indicated that these changes would occur 
soon. He wrote this comment in his book previously cited: 

"One hundred years ago [meaning in 1884] it was 
predicted that within a few centuries men would revert 
to the gods of Plato and Aristotle .... 

We may all look forward with eager anticipation to 
that nobler day when the gods of philosophy once more 

shall rule the world ...." 26 

Aldous Huxley, in his book called BRAVE NEW WORLD 
REVISITED, quotes a character called the Grand Inquisitor 
in one of Feodor Mikhailovich Dostoevski's parables as saying: 

"In the end they [the people] will lay their freedom 
at our [the controller's] feet and say to us 'make us your 
slaves, but feed us.'" 27 

The Tucson Citizen newspaper of November 3, 1988 

printed a photograph of a some people involved in a "march 
for literacy," and it clearly demonstrated that at least some 


xvm 



INTRODUCTION 


people in America are now asking their government to make 
them their slaves. The picture showed a demonstrator 
carrying a picket sign that read: 

"Uncle Sam, we want you to support us." 28 

Mr. Huxley gave us a date when we could expect these 
changes to occur. He wrote the following in his book written 
in 1958: 

"... the twenty-first century ... will be the era of 

World Controllers ...." 29 

And then he told us why these "controllers" would not 

fail: 


"The older dictators fell because they could never 
supply their subjects with enough bread, enough 
circuses enough miracles and mysteries. 

Under a scientific dictatorship education will 


really work 

with 

the 

result 

that most 

men 

and 

women will 

grow up 

to 

love their servitude 

and 

will 

never dream of revolution. 






There 

seems to 

be 

no 

good reason 

why 

a 

thoroughly 

scientific 

n 

dictatorship 

should 

ever 

be 


overthrown." 

Someone who might have given the world the date for the 
commencement of these predicted changes was Zbigniew 

Brzezinski, President Jimmy Carter's National Security 

Advisor during his four year administration. He wrote the 

following in his book entitled BETWEEN TWO AGES: 

"Either 1976 or 1989" — the two hundredth 

anniversary of the Constitution — could serve as a 
suitable target date for culminating a national 
dialogue on the relevance of existing arrangements, 

the workings of the representative process, and the 

desirability of imitating the various European 
regionalization reforms and of streamlining the 
administrative structure." 31 


xtx 



INTRODUCTION 


So, the people of the world can now determine what those 
changes are that those in the positions of implementing 
changes have in store for them. In summary, then, these 
changes are: 

The old world is coming to an end. It will be 

replaced with a new way of doing things. 

The new world will be called the "New World 

Order." 

This new structuring will re-distribute property 
from the "have" nations and will give it to the "have- 
not” nations. 

The New World Order will include changes in: 
the family: 

homosexual marriages will be legalized; 
parents will not be allowed to raise their 
children (the state will;) all women will be 
employed by the state and not allowed to 
be "homemakers"; divorce will become ex- 
ceedingly easy and monogynous marriage 
will be slowly phased out; 
the workplace: 

the government will become the owner of 
all of the factors of production; the private 
ownership of property will be outlawed; 
religion: 

religion will be outlawed and believers 
will be either eliminated or imprisoned; 
there will be a new religion: the worship 
of man and his mind; all will believe in 
the new religion; 

The United States will play a major role in bringing it to 
the world. 

World wars have been fought to further its aims. 

Adolf Hitler, the NAZI Socialist, supported the goal of the 
planners. 

The majority of the people will not readily accept "the 
new world order" but will be deceived into accepting it by two 
strategies: 


xx 



INTRODUCTION 


1. Those in favor of the changes will have become seated 

in the very thrones of power, generally without the 

public realizing that fact; 

2. The "old world order" will be destroyed piece by piece, 

by a series of planned "nibbles" at the established 

format. 

The Communist Party is actively supporting the changes 
to the "new world order." 

The basic tenets of Christianity, which were the base for 
the "old world order," will have to be eliminated. 

If the slower, methodical techniques of change do not 
function, violence will be introduced and controlled by the 
planners. 

The people of the world will give up their freedom to the 
"controllers" because there will be a planned famine, or some 
other serious occurrence, such as a depression or war. 

The change to the "New World Order" is coming shortly, 
perhaps beginning after 1989. However, if that is not the 
year, it will be introduced one step at a time, so that the 
entire structure will be in place by the year 1999. 


xxi 



The 

Great Seal 
of the 

United States 



Obverse 

Side 





Reverse 

Side 




Chapter 1 

Tomorrow's Rulers 


Something is indeed wrong in America! 

And many sense that changes in this nation's lifestyle are 
occurring. 

The newspapers are saturated with articles reporting the 
activities of those advocating increased governmental spend- 
ing for a variety of unconstitutional purposes; organizations 
supporting a globalism concept urge the world to adopt a one 
world government; psychologists preaching the destruction of 
the family unit and recommending that the society rear the 
nation's children; governments closing private schools; and 
nations forming regional governments under which national 
borders are scheduled to disappear. 

Since these changes appear to be part of the new 

philosophy known as "the new world order," anyone desiring 
to know the future has to become familiar with this new 

phrase and what it portends for the world of tomorrow. 

As an indication that major changes are coming in to- 
morrow's world, one of the current trends mentioned is the 


1 



CHAPTER 1 TOMORROW'S RULERS 


call for a "one-world government." One of those supporting 
this leap forward is Norman Cousins, President of the World 
Federalist Society. He is on record as saying: 

"World government is coming. In fact, it is 

inevitable. No arguments for it or against it can 

change that fact." 32 

The goal of a one world government is not a new 
thought. One of the earliest formal organizations that sup- 
ported the concept of that goal was the Illuminati, founded on 
May 1st, 1776, by Adam Weishaupt, a teacher of Canon Law 
at the University of Ingolstadt in Bavaria, now part of Ger- 
many. Professor Weishaupt was quoted as saying: 

"It is necessary to establish a universal regime 

and empire over the whole world ...." 33 

A more modern organization that supports the coming 

changes is the Masonic Order called, simply, the Freemasons 

or the Masons. This world wide fraternity has members in 

America, as will be discussed, and they, too, support a call 

for a one world government. One who has written about this 
secret organization is Paul Fisher, and he says this about 

them in his book entitled BEHIND THE LODGE DOOR: 

"Masonry will eventually rule the world." 34 

Albert Pike, the Sovereign Grand Commander of the 

Scottish Rite of Freemasonry here in the United States from 

1850 to 1891 wrote a book entitled MORALS AND DOGMA. 
Mr. Pike has been praised by his fellow Masons as a member 
almost without parallel in the history of the Masonic Order. 

Carl Claudy, himself a Masonic writer of great esteem, wrote 
this about him: 

"Albert Pike: one of the greatest geniuses Free- 
masonry has ever known. He was a mystic, a symbol- 

ist, a teacher of the hidden truths of Freemasonry." 3 


2 



CHAPTER 1 TOMORROW'S RULERS 


So, the outsider can know that whenever Mr. Pike 

speaks, he speaks with authority and knowledge. He is 
perhaps the greatest Masonic writer of all time. 

His book is given to each Scottish Rite Southern Jurisdic- 
tion Freemason who is asked to read it. (There seems to be a 
difference of opinion as to whether or not this book is still 
required reading for each Scottish Rite Mason. This writer 
was told that it was given to each Scottish Rite Mason in 
Tucson. Other Masons say that that is not true.) In it, he 
informs the new Mason about the moral teachings of the Ma- 
sonic Lodge. He instructs the Masonic reader that the Order 
will eventually be asked to rule the entire globe. He wrote: 


"... the 

World will soon come 

to 

us 

for its 

Sovereigns 

[apparently referring 

to 

its 

governmental 

leaders] and 

Pontiffs [apparently 

meaning 

its 

religious 

leaders.] 






We shall 

constitute the equilibrium 

of 

the 

universe. 

and be rulers over the Masters of the World. 

m lb 




He wrote 

this supportive statement in 

a 

book 

entitled 


LEGENDA: 


"And thus the warfare against the powers of evil 

that crushed the Order of the Temple goes steadily on, 
and Freedom marches ever onward toward the conquest 

of the world." 37 


The Order of the Temple Mr. Pike was writing about was 
the Knights Templar, which was, according to him, 

"devoted to the cause of opposition to the tiara [the 
Pope's triple crown] and the crowns of Kings ...." 38 

Mr. Pike said that the Catholic Chinch was a "power of 
evil ..." because it had "crushed" the Templars, even though 
he admitted that they were "devoted" to opposition to the 
Church and its leader, the Pope. 

But the major point of that quote is that these forces of 
opposition, presumably meaning the Masons, are marching 
"onward toward the conquest of the world." 


3 



CHAPTER 1 TOMORROW'S RULERS 


Mr. Pike repeated his devotion to the conquest of the 
world, with this comment at the end of his book entitled 
MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"Such, my Brother, is the TRUE WORD of a Mas- 
ter Mason; such the true ROYAL SECRET, which 

makes possible, and shall at length make real, the 

HOLY EMPIRE of true Masonic Brotherhood." 39 

But, the major worldwide movement that champions a 

one world government, under a religious leader, is a new 

phenomena occurring worldwide called. The New Age Move- 
ment. Texe Marrs, a researcher into this new religion, has 
written two books on the subject. Both of these books are 
excellent primers for those who wish to know more about the 
beliefs of this religion. The two books are entitled DARK 

SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, and MYSTERY MARK OF 
THE NEW AGE. He has written: 

"The New Age Movement has undeniably taken 
on the definite form of a religion, complete with an 
agreed-upon body of doctrine, printed scripture, a 

pattern of worship and ritual, a functioning group of 

ministers and lay leaders." 40 

Another writer who has written two books on the New 

Age religion is Constance Cumbey. Her two books are called 
THE HIDDEN DANGERS OF THE RAINBOW, and A 
PLANNED DECEPTION. She has written this: 

"The New Age Movement is a religion complete 
with its own Bibles, prayers and mantras, Vatican 
City/Jerusalem equivalents, priests and gurus, born- 
again experiences (they call it ’rebirthing,’) spiritual 
laws and commandments, psychics and prophets and 

nearly every other indicia of a religion." 41 

The new religion has a series of leaders. One is a woman 
named Alice Bailey, a prolific writer on the subject of the 
New Age. She was the founder of an organization called the 
Arcane School, one of the major Lucis Trust divisions. The 
Lucis Trust was a major publisher of books supporting the 
religion. In her book entitled THE EXTERN ALIZATION OF 


4 



CHAPTER 1 TOMORROW'S RULERS 


THE HIERARCHY, she told her readers who the organiza- 

tions were that were going to bring the New Age religion to 
the world. She identified them as being: 

"The three main channels through which the 

preparation for the New Age is going on might be 

regarded as the Church, the Masonic Fraternity and 

the educational field." 42 

(The main thrust of this book will to be to examine only 
one of the three organizations mentioned by this author, that 
being the Masonic Fraternity. There are numerous works by 
other writers exposing the involvement of the Church and the 
educational field in the New Age Movement, so this writer 

will not attempt to duplicate those efforts. However, only a 
few are aware of the involvement of the Masons, and that is 
why I have chosen to concentrate on that organization.) 

Another major writer on the New Age Movement is 
Benjamin Creme, and he admitted in his book entitled THE 
REAPPEARANCE OF THE CHRIST AND THE MASTORS 
OF WISDOM that: 

"The new religion will manifest, for instance, 

through organizations like Masonry. In Freemasonry 
is imbedded the core of the secret of the occult 
Mysteries." 43 

So Masonry conceals a great mystery inside its temples, 
one that is connected somehow to the New Age Movement. 

The Masons admit in some of their writings that they too 
are anticipating a new age, a series of major changes. Henry 

Clausen, the past Sovereign Grand Commander (the equiva- 
lent of their President) of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry, 
has been quoted as saying: 

"We look towards a transforming into a New Age 

using, however, the insight and wisdom of the ancient 

* it 44 

mystics. 

The Masons claim that the things that they believe in are 
as old as the ancient civilizations. They also claim that these 

"mystics," the ancient philosophers, had the wisdom of all 

ages, and that somehow this knowledge has become lost 


5 



CHAPTER 1 TOMORROW'S RULERS 


through, the centuries. Humanity today does not possess this 

knowledge, but it has become the task of the Masons, and 
other "truth" seekers, to rediscover these principles for the 
benefit of all of mankind. Those possessing this knowledge 
will correct the world's current problems. Some of the Masons 
also claim to have identified the cause of these problems. 

One of the most prolific writers on the subject of this 

"lost" truth is Manly P. Hall, a 33rd degree Mason. 

(For those unfamiliar with the Masonic degrees, all 

Masons in America start through what is called the Blue 
Lodge, consisting of three degrees. The initiate into this lodge 
goes through three separate and different initiation cere- 
monies, one for each degree. After completing these ceremo- 
nies, he may stay where he is, or choose to affiliate himself 
with either the York Rite or the Scottish Rite. The latter is 
divided into two separate jurisdictions, the Southern and the 

Northern. These are based primarily on state borders, and 

whether one joins one or the other depends on where the ini- 
tiate lives. The two Scottish rites have an additional 29 

degrees, making for a total of 32. There is one more degree, 
called the 33rd degree, which is honorary, and only a few are 
invited into that degree. 

The York Rite has a total of nine degrees. However, since 
little has been revealed about this order, the author will 
concentrate on only the Scottish Rite, and in particular, the 

Southern Jurisdiction.) 

Mr. Hall has written a book entitled LECTURES ON AN- 
CIENT PHILOSOPHY in which he talks a great deal about 
the Masonic fraternity. This is his comment about the coming 
changes: 

"A new day is dawning for Freemasonry. From 

the insufficiency of theology and the hopelessness of 

materialism, men are turning to seek the God of phi- 
losophy." 45 

Notice that Mr. Hall has said that current "theology," ob- 

viously current "religion," has proven insufficient. Also, he 
feels that "materialism," meaning the right to private proper- 
ty, is also a failure. But more importantly, he points out that 

this new "God" of the Freemasons is somehow different from 
the God of the Jews and Christians. As will be illustrated 


6 



CHAPTER 1 TOMORROW'S RULERS 


later, some of the Masons believe that the God of the Bible is 
a God of evil. 

Helena Petrovna Blavatsky, perhaps the founder of the 
current New Age movement, has also determined that the 

Masons are somehow supportive of her religious views. She 
wrote this in her book entitled THE SECRET DOCTRINE: 

"... at the end of the eighteenth and the beginning 
of the nineteenth centuries many Freemasons trav- 
elled to Tibet where they were initiated into the 

esoteric [defined as intended for or understood by only 
a chosen few, as an inner group of disciples or ini- 
tiates] order of the Masters of wisdom ." 46 

It should be expected that she would support the Masonic 

fraternity. In 1875, she founded an organization called the 
Theosophical Society, basically dedicated to teaching the 

world about her new secret religion. One of the earliest 
members of that organization was Albert Pike, later to be- 

come the Sovereign Grand Commander of the Scottish Rite of 
Freemasonry. 47 

Albert Pike, who later became a 33rd degree Mason, the 

highest degree attainable, also saw that there were some sig- 

nificant changes coming, and that he was supportive of those 
changes. He wrote the following in his book entitled MORALS 
AND DOGMA: 

"... we can look on all the evils of the world, and 
see that it is only the hour before sunrise, and that 
the light is coming." 48 

If Mr. Hall is right, the "evils" that his fellow Mason Al- 

bert Pike saw are connected to current religion, and that 
which is coming is somehow different from those religious 
views. 

Mr. Hall, who as mentioned previously is another 33rd 
degree Mason, also wrote that a new day was coming, and 
that it was not too far into the future: 

"A new light is breaking in the east; [the signifi- 
cance of the location, "the east," will be pointed out 
later] a more glorious day is at hand. The rule of the 


7 



CHAPTER 1 TOMORROW'S RULERS 


philosophic elect ~ the dream of the ages — will yet 
be realized and is not too far distant." 49 

So, Mr. Hall is also expecting that these changes are 
about to occur in the not too distant future. 

Someone who attempted to zero in on when these chang- 
es were expected to occur was Alice Bailey, previously men- 
tioned. She wrote about when she thought the New Age 

would arrive: 

"Eventually, there will appear the Church Uni- 
versal, and its definite outlines will appear towards 

the close of this century." 50 

Since she wrote early in the 20th century, we can see 
that she was predicting the eventual arrival of the New Age, 
sometime around the 1990's. This estimate of that date is not 
too far wrong, as will be demonstrated later in this book. 

Whatever is coming in the future, some New Agers have 
told us that they expect that it will last for a long time. One 
such writer is Ruth Montgomery, who wrote that she saw 
that the new religion would rule the earth for a thousand 
years. She wrote the following in her book entitled HERALD 
FOR THE NEW AGE: 

"The New Age, the millennium [a millennium is a 
period of one thousand years], will see an end to that 
strife, at least for a thousand years." 51 

Just what is the New Age religion that will last for at 
least one thousand years on the earth? 

One who attempted to answer that question was Con- 
stance Cumbey in her book entitled THE HIDDEN 
DANGERS OF THE RAINBOW. She wrote that these were 
the basic tenets of the new religion: 


1. "The Plan" 

for 

the future includes 

the 

instal- 

lation of a 

New 

World "Messiah," 

the 

imple- 

mentation of 

a 

new world government 

and 

new world 

religion 

under Maitreya 

(an 

indi- 

vidual who 

book). 

will 

be examined later 

in 

this 



CHAPTER 1 TOMORROW’S RULERS 


2. A universal credit card system will be imple- 

mented. 

3. A world food authority will control all of the 
world's food supply. 

4. A universal tax. 

5. A universal draft. 

6. They intend on utterly rooting out people who 
believe the Bible and worship God and to 
completely stamp out Christianity. 52 

As was discussed prior to this summary, certain people 
have indicated that they see the Catholic Church as an 

enemy. Here Mrs. Cumbey says that they see not only 
Catholicism as the enemy, they also see all of Christianity as 
an enemy. 

Whatever the New Agers believe in, it appears to be 

growing in popularity. Bantam Books, one of this nation's 
leading publishing houses, has reported that the sales of their 

New Age titles has increased tenfold in the past decade. Time 
magazine reports that the number of New Age bookstores has 
doubled in the past five years, to a total of about 2,500. 53 
According to an article in Forbes magazine, 

"publishers estimate that total sales of New Age 

titles today are at least $100 million at retail." 34 

So, whatever they believe in, many believe in it. 

But perhaps the most insightful comment about the na- 
ture of what the New Age religion believed in, and who they 
worshipped as their god, was written by Mrs. Cumbey in her 
book entitled THE HIDDEN DANGERS OF THE RAINBOW. 
She wrote that they had: 

"... the intent of bringing about a New World Or- 
der — an order that writes God out of the picture and 
deifies Lucifer." 55 

So, if Mrs. Cumbey and the other writers on the subject 
are right, the New Age Movement needs to be studied in 
some depth. 


9 



Chapter 2 

The New Age Movement 


The New Age Religion appears to be the exact opposite of 
the Old Age Religion, meaning the religion of the Jews and 
the Christians. These are the two religions that set the 

United States on its course because these religions taught 
that mankind had some basic human rights. They held that 

the family was the basic unit in all of the world; they 
believed in the right to private property; they believed in the 
inalienable (defined as being incapable of being surrendered) 

right to life; they held that each person had the right to 

worship their god; and they held that all had the right to 

freedom of association. As shall be documented in this study, 
these positions, which were deemed to be "self-evident" by 
those who wrote the American Declaration of Independence 
and the Constitution, became the cornerstones of the 

American civilization. (The term "self-evident" means that 

these human rights were not worthy of debate because they 

stood on their own simply because they were true. They 
couldn't be debated.) 


10 



CHAPTER 2 THE NEW AGE MOVEMENT 


Yet, today, these cornerstones of American life are no 
longer "self-evident." They are being publicly discussed: people 
and organizations are now debating whether an individual 
has the basic human rights to life, liberty and property. 

Friedrich Wilhelm Nietzsche, a German philosopher, and 
one of the teachers of many of the world's leading communist 


revolutionaries, put the 
statement: 

argument 

quite 

succinctly, in this 

"I condemn Christianity. I 

raise 

against the Chris- 

tian Church the most 

terrible 

of 

all accusations that 

any accuser uttered, 

conceivable corruption." 36 

It is 

to 

me the highest 


Texe Marrs, an author who has written in opposition to 
the New Age, wrote this about their hatred of the Christians: 

"The New Age believer is told, "You could be a god 
in the next instant if only those horrible Christians 

weren't around with their poisonous attitudes." 57 

That thought was illustrated by another of the important 
New Agers, David Spangler, who wrote this in his book en- 
titled REFLECTIONS ON THE CHRIST: 


"We can 

take 

all the scriptures 

and all 

the teach- 

ings and all 

the 

tablets and all the 

laws. 

and all 

the 

marshmallows 

and 

have a jolly 

good 

bonfire 

and 

marshmallow 
worth." 58 

roast. 

because that 

is all 

they 

are 


So the New Age, like the Masons, feel that Christianity 
is the enemy, a force to be countered, not by open debate, but 
by contempt and ridicule, and as shall be illustrated later, by 
even murder. 

Other parties wish to join the debate. In 1911, the So- 
cialist Party of Great Britain published a pamphlet entitled 
SOCIALISM AND RELIGION, in which they placed their po- 
sition about religion into the arena: 

"It is therefore a profound truth that Socialism is 
the natural enemy of religion. A Christian Socialist is 


11 



CHAPTER 2 THE NEW AGE MOVEMENT 


in fact an anti-Socialist. Christianity ... is the 
antithesis of Socialism." 59 

So the Socialist, the New Ager, and the Mason have de- 
clared war on the Christians. And, as in every war, the 

enemy must be defeated, even by bloodshed if necessary. This 
war is no different. Bloodshed is anticipated by all parties in 
the battle. 

LaVedi Lafferty and Bud Hollo well, two New Agers, 
started the discussion about how their religion sanctions the 

use of violence against the Christian community. They wrote 
the following in their book entitled THE ETERNAL DANCE: 

"This is a time of opportunity for those who will 
take it [apparently the New Agers.] For others, [ap- 
parently the Christians] if the earth is unsuitable for 

them, [if they will not accept the New Age religion] 

they will go on to other worlds." 60 

Another New Age spokesman, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, 
the "guru" sought out by the rock 'n roll group known as the 
Beatles, has been quoted as saying: 

"There has not been and there will not be a place 

for the unfit [apparently the Christians.] The fit will 

lead, and if the unfit are not coming along, [if they 
will not accept the New Age religion] there is no 
place for them. 

In the Age of Enlightenment there is no place for 
ignorant people. Nonexistence of the unfit has been 

the law of nature." 61 

Another example of New Age thinking on this vital issue 
came from a pamphlet available in a bookstore selling New 
Age material. It was published by something called the 
Guardian Action Publications of New Mexico, and it was en- 

titled Cosmic Countdown. It alleged that it had received 
these thoughts from something called "Higher Intelligence," 
and it directed its attention to the hunger/disease problem in 

the third world. The pamphlet stated: 

"The world should be forewarned to be on the 
lookout for diseases which have been suppressed for 


12 



CHAPTER 2 THE NEW AGE MOVEMENT 


years, suddenly rearing their ugly heads and deci- 
mating populations already on the verge of starva- 

tion in the Third World Nations. 

Although these peoples will eventually be replaced 

by the new root race about to make its appearance 

in a newly cleansed world; nevertheless, for the mo- 

ment, this is a tragedy." 62 

The words reveal an incredible scenario; those people in 
the Third World nations are going to be entirely replaced by 

a "new root race." That eventuality will not be a tragedy; the 

tragedy is that these people are dying now due to starvation 
and disease. 

The concept that a new race of people will inhabit the 

world in the New Age millennium has been expressed by 

other believers in the religion. Ruth Montgomery, previously 
mentioned, has written about that change: 

"Those who survive the shift will be a different 

type of people from those in physical form today, 

freed from strife and hatred, longing to be of service 
to the whole of mankind. 

the souls who helped to bring on the chaos of 
the present century [apparently the Christians and 
the Jews] will have passed into spirit to rethink 

their attitudes." 63 

To show that the New Agers are talking about the 
physical death of the "enemy," one must only search the 
writings of other New Agers. Another believer to write on the 
subject of the destruction of those who will not accept the 
new religion was Ruth Montgomery. She has been quoted as 
saying in a transcribed interview carried by a magazine 
called Magical Blend: 

"Millions will survive and millions won't. Those 
who won't will go into the spirit state, because there 
is truly no death." 64 

Estimates of the number to perish have been made by 
some New Agers. One who has made such an estimate is 
John Randolph Price, who was quoted by Texe Marrs in his 
book about the New Age. He said that: 


13 



CHAPTER 2 THE NEW AGE MOVEMENT 


"John Randolph Price was told by his spirit guide 

that up to two and one-half billion might perish in 

the coming chaos." 65 

That estimate is about half of the current world pop- 
ulation. 

Another estimate of the number required to die because 
they will not accept the new religion was offered by the so- 

called "Tibetan master," Djwhal Khul, who has said in one of 
his channelling experiences, that one third of all humanity 

must die by the year 2000. 66 That would be about 2 billion 
people. 

Channelling is one of the strange activities occurring 

inside the New Age religion. Some of the believers claim that 
they have the ability to call forth the deceased spirit of 

someone who lived many years before. Quite often these 

spirits claim to be "ascended masters," those who have gone 
on to discover the eternal truths of all of creation. One such 
believer who claimed to be in touch with a "master" was Alice 
Bailey, previously mentioned. Her spirit called himself Djwhal 
Khul, and she claimed he spoke through her, saying: 

"Death is not a disaster to be feared; the work of 
the Destroyer is not really cruel or undesirable 
Therefore there is much destruction permitted by the 

custodians of the Plan and much evil turned into 

good." 67 

Just what "The Plan" constituted was told to the world 
by Benjamin Creme, another New Age leader. He placed an 
advertisement in about 20 newspapers all over the world on 
April 25, 1982, that defined the term. The ad read, in part: 

"What is The Plan? It includes the installation of 

a new world government and new world religion 

under Maitreya." 68 

But perhaps the most startling example of the teachings 
of this new religion came from the pen of Barbara Marx 
Hubbard, one of their most articulate writers. She wrote in 
her book entitled HAPPY BIRTHDAY PLANET EARTH: 


14 



CHAPTER 2 THE NEW AGE MOVEMENT 


"The choice is: do you wish to become a natural 

Christ, a universal human, or do you wish to die?" 69 

"People will either change or die. That is the 

choice." 0 

So the people of the world will be given a choice: they 
will choose to accept the new religion, or they will choose to 

die! 

The battle lines are drawn! 

Choices will have to be made. 

Some of the leading Socialists of the past have shown 
that they too have chosen up sides. One such individual was 
Adolf Hitler, the head of the German government during 
World War II, who held no conviction that the murder of over 
50 million people during that war was wrong. He considered 

himself to be an agent of this unseen god in reducing the 
population of people that he held to be undesirable. He wrote: 

"I have the right to exterminate millions of in- 
dividuals of inferior races, which multiply like ver- 


And he did what he considered acceptable inside his 
religion. Those who did not believe in his new religion had no 
choice, and they perished. (The evidence that Adolf Hitler 
was a New Ager will be presented later in another chapter.) 

Another of the leading spokesmen for the Socialist posi- 
tion was George Bernard Shaw, a well-known writer during 
his day. He wrote a book entitled THE INTELLIGENT WOM- 
AN'S GUIDE TO SOCIALISM, in which he stated: 

"I also made it quite clear that Socialism means 

equality of income or nothing, and under Socialism 

you would not be allowed to be poor. 

You would be forcibly fed, clothed, lodged, taught 
and employed whether you like it or not. If it were 
discovered that you had not the character and in- 
dustry enough to be worth all this trouble, you might 

be executed in a kindly manner, but whilst you were 

permitted to live, you would have to live well." 72 


15 



CHAPTER 2 THE NEW AGE MOVEMENT 


The Masonic writer, Albert Pike, placed the Masonic 
order into the discussion, when he wrote this in his book 
MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"It is not true to say that 'one man, however 
little, must not be sacrificed to another, however 

great, to a majority or to all men.' 

That is not only a fallacy, but a most dangerous 

one. 


Often one man 

and 

many men 

must 

be 

sacrificed. 

in the ordinary sense 
the many. 

of the term. 

to 

the 

interest of 

the interest 

and 

even the life 

of 

one 

man must 

often be sacrificed 
country." 73 

to 

the interest 

and 

welfare of his 


The religious view is that the "sacrifice" of one life for 

the interest of the "many" is murder, and those who believe 
in the God of the Bible are told not to commit this act. The 
commandment against this practice is contained in Exodus 
20:13 of the Old Testament, and in Matthew 5:21 in the New, 
and is simply expressed in the words: "Thou shalt not kill." 
The principle is easy to understand: no person has the right 
to take the life of another. This understanding is nearly 
worldwide (there are, of course, cultures that have deter- 

mined that human sacrifice, cannibalism and murder are ac- 
ceptable forms of behavior, but these are rare in the history 
of man.) But, here we are being exposed to a whole new re- 

ligious view, one growing daily in size and stature, that 
openly advocates the wholesale slaughter of entire races of 
people. 

Adam Weishaupt, the founder of the Illuminati, has also 
endorsed this new conviction that murder was not improper 
by including it in the initiation ceremony into the Order. He 

has his initiator tell the initiate: 

"Behold our secret .... If in order to destroy all 

Christianity, all religion, we have pretended to have 

the sole true religion, remember that the end justi- 
fies the means, and that the wise ought to take all 

the means to do good which the wicked take to do 

evil." 74 


16 



CHAPTER 2 THE NEW AGE MOVEMENT 


The initiate was told that he may use whatever means, 
murder included, to achieve the goals of the association that 
he was joining. And that the major goal of the Illuminati was 
the destruction of all religion, including Christianity. That 
meant that if Christians physically stood in the way, they 
could be removed by simply murdering them. 

Weishaupt even went so far as to say that anyone not 
willing to take the life of another was unfit to join the 
Illuminati. He wrote the following in a letter to a fellow 
member in 1778: 


"No man is fit for our Order who is not ... ready 
to go to every length ...." 75 


Weishaupt 

wrote that 

again, this time using 

different 

words: 





"This can 

be 

done 

in no other way but by 

secret 

associations. 

which 

will 

by degrees, and in 

silence. 

possess themselves 

of 

the government of the 

States, 


and make use of those means for this purpose which 

the wicked use for attaining base ends." 76 

Weishaupt was aware of the enormous power of govern- 
ment and he desired its power for his members. He com- 
mitted his organization to its infiltration. Then, he committed 
it to unspeakable purposes: anything that would further the 

goal of the Illuminati. 

He even went on to grant permission to his members to 
distort the truth by lying if it would further their goals. He 
wrote: 

"There must not a single purpose ever come in 

sight ... that may betray our aims against religion 

and the state. 

One must speak sometimes one way and some- 
times another, but so as never to contradict our- 
selves, and so that, with respect to our true way of 

thinking, we may be impenetrable." 77 

Perhaps a perfect example of an oath that these initiates 
take somewhere along the road to the pinnacle inside the 
secret society was given in a book written by George Orwell 


17 



CHAPTER 2 THE NEW AGE MOVEMENT 


entitled 1984. Mr. Orwell has an initiate into a secret society 
called The Brotherhood in his story asked these questions: 


"Are you prepared to give your life? 
Are you prepared to commit murder? 


Are 

you 

prepared 

to commit 

acts 

of 

sabotage 

which 

may 

cause the 

death of 

hundreds 

of 

innocent 

people? 

Are 

you 

prepared 

to betray 

your 

country to 

foreign powers? 
Are you 

prepared to 

cheat, to 

forge. 

to 

blackmail. 


to corrupt the minds of children, to distribute habit- 

forming drugs, to encourage prostitution, to dissem- 
inate venereal diseases — to do anything which is 

likely to cause demoralization and weaken the power 

of the [people?] 

Are you prepared to commit suicide, if and when 
we order you to do so?" 78 

This is an example of the philosophy that "the ends 

justify the means." The initiate should do as he was required, 
as long as the act benefited the Brotherhood. There is no 

morality under such an oath. 

So murder of the unfit, those unwilling to adopt the new 
religion, will be acceptable. And those who do the annihilat- 

ing are to feel no remorse. In the view of the New Age re- 
ligion, the murderers have served mankind well. 

But, this callous disregard for the right to life of every 

human on the face of the earth has been predicted before. In 
the New Testament, John was moved to write in John 6:12: 

"Yea, the time cometh, that whosoever killeth you 

will think that he doeth God service." 

The New World Order will sail in on a sea of blood. 


18 



Chapter 3 
Lord Maitreya 


The New Age religion will have a worldwide leader, an 
individual that they call Lord Maitreya. This individual has 
not made his public appearance yet, but the New Agers claim 
that he is on the earth at the present time. They claim that 
he came to live with the Asian community in East London, 
England, in July, 1977, by "descending" from his ancient 
retreat in the Himalaya Mountains along the border of India 
and Tibet. They further believe that "his imminent emergence 
into full public view is assured." 

They also claim that this individual is the one that the 
Christians call Christ, the Jews call the Messiah, the 

Buddhists call the Fifth Buddha, the Hindus call Krishna, 
and the Muslims call the Imam Mahdi. In other words, all of 
the major religions of the world are awaiting the arrival of 
this one individual. It is their claim that this one individual 
living now in London is the one expected by all of these 
religions. And he is on the earth now, patiently waiting for 
the appointed time to reveal his existence to the peoples of 


19 



CHAPTER 3 LORD MAITREYA 


the world. He will apparently assume the leadership of all of 
these religions, and when he does, he will create a one-world 
religion. 

The New Agers have written that in the esoteric tradition 
(previously defined as being intended for or understood by 
only a chosen few as an inner group of disciples or initiates) 

the word "Christ" is not the name of an individual, but the 
name of an office, or function, within the Spiritual Hierarchy 
of Masters. The masters are a group of perfected men who 
have guided human evolution from behind the scenes for cen- 
turies. And they believe that this Lord Maitreya is that 

Christ. 

Manly P. Hall has written of this individual, by identifying 
him as: 

"... the way, the truth, and the life which, coming 

to every life, redeems all who accept it." 79 

Texe Marrs has quoted this individual as saying: 

"My Army is ready for battle. My masters of Wis- 

dom and Myself at the head. That battle will be fought 
for the continuance of man on this earth. Rest assured 

that my Army shall triumph." 80 

It appears that the battle to be fought between the follow- 
ers of Lord Maitreya and the rest of humanity is still in the 

future. But at least one of the participants has an army 

already prepared. 

One who claims to have seen the birth in a "vision" of 
someone who seems to fulfill the requirements of this Mait- 

reya was astrologer Jeanne Dixon. Her major claim to being 
a "prophet" is her prediction, reportedly made before the 
event, of the assassination of President John Kennedy in 
1963. However, her credentials were dealt a serious blow in 
1968 when she also "prophesied" that the Soviet Union would 
be the first to put a man on the moon. Another of her 

"prophecies" was that the Republican Party would be vic- 
torious in 1968 (and it was with the election of Richard 

Nixon, a Republican,) but she also predicted that "within the 

following decade (1970-1979) the two-party system as we have 
known it will vanish from the American scene. 81 


20 



CHAPTER 3 LORD MAITREYA 


She further predicted that Richard M. Nixon had "ex- 
cellent vibrations for the good of America" and would "serve 

[the] country well." 82 

Those who question her inability to correctly predict that 
America, not the Soviet Union, would become the first to 
place a man on the moon; and that the two-party system has 
not vanished from the scene; and that President Nixon ap- 
parently did not have "good vibrations" for this nation and 
would later be removed from office by the event commonly 

referred to as "Watergate," can only presume that she must 
have been given "inside" information about the assassination 
of the President Kennedy. And that would account for her 
knowing, at least in that event, the true future. 

Secondly, one can only wonder why this "non-prophet" 
should be listened to about anything after her appalling 
record on "prophecies," but there is reason to believe that she 
might have been asked to write an account of this "vision" of 
an important birth by the New Age religion because they 
wanted the official imprimatur of someone commonly referred 

to as a "prophet." In other words, her "prophecy" might have 
been written to legitimize his claim to be a man-god so that 
when this individual made his public appearance himself, the 
public would marvel at the fact that his birth had fulfilled a 
prophecy." 

But, in any event, Ruth Montgomery wrote a book about 
her, entitled THE GIFT OF PROPHECY, in which she wrote 
about the very revealing and intriguing vision that Jeanne 
Dixon allegedly had: 

"The vision which [Jeanne] considers the most sig- 
nificant and soul-stirring of her life occurred on Feb- 
ruary 5, 1962. 

She saw the brightest sun she had ever seen. [The 
reader is asked to remember this reference to "the 

sun."] 

Stepping out of the brightness were a Pharaoh and 
Queen Nefertiti. [Remember here that these two in- 
dividuals were Egyptians. This will become significant 
later on in this study.] The couple ... thrust forth [a] 
baby, as if offering it to the entire world." 8 

Jeanne looked at the baby and then said, according to the 
author: 


21 



CHAPTER 3 LORD MAITREYA 


"I knew 'Here is the beginning of wisdom.'" 84 

So what Ruth Montgomery wrote can be summarized as 
follows: 

A sun deity gives the world a child, from Egypt, who pos- 
sesses enormous "wisdom." And this event allegedly took 
place on February 5, 1962. The interpretation of these sym- 
bols will be discussed later and their alleged significance will 
be developed. 

Jeanne then says: 

"A child, born somewhere in the Middle East short- 
ly after 7 a.m. (E.S.T.) on February 5, 1962, will revo- 

lutionize the world. Before the close of the century he 
will bring together all mankind in one all-embracing 

faith. 

Mankind will begin to feel the great force of this 
man in the early 1980's, and during the subsequent ten 
years the world as we know it will be reshaped into 

one without wars and suffering. His power will grow 
greatly until 1999 [this year is extremely significant as 
will also be developed] at which time the peoples of this 
earth will probably discover the full meaning of the 

vision." 85 

So, according to this "vision," a child, born on February 5, 
1962, will grow up to bring a one-world religion onto the face 
of the earth, and his efforts will be successful in 1999. 

The New York Times newspaper ran three consecutive 
articles on the conjunction of five planets, the sun, the moon 
and an "invisible body that astrologers call Khetu," starting 
on February 4, 1962. The first article stated that the various 
bodies moved into "rough alignment in the constellation Cap- 
ricorn at 7:05 A.M., New York time," and that they would 
"remain in that alignment until 7:17 A.M., New York time, 
Monday." 86 

However, the article went on to say that most of the 
people in India became alarmed, because most astrologers 
were making "predictions of disasters." There were a few 
astrologers who were predicting good for the world as a result 
of this alignment, but "few Indians appearfed] to be paying 
them much heed." 


22 



CHAPTER 3 LORD MAITREYA 


Astronomers did not consider the event to be rare, how- 
ever, and the article went on to report that "the same con- 
figuration [had] occurred several times in the past," the last 

time being in April, 1821, and then it occurred twice. The 

article reported that Dr. Kenneth L. Franklin of the Museum 

of Natural History-Hayden Planetarium in New York had 
commented that that year does not seem to be a year of any 

remembered disasters. He was then quoted as saying: "And 

that year isn't famous for anything, as far as I know." 87 

Dr. Franklin also commented on the body the astrologers 

call Khetu. He "speculated that it may be some sort of astro- 
logical addition used to make everything come out right." He 

then added that he believed Khetu "to be the invisible planet 
that is frequently taken into account in astrological reck- 
onings, but that he had no idea how it was possible to keep 

track of something that no one could see." 

The Times carried another article the next day, Monday, 

February 5, 1962, and it repeated the concern of the Hindu 

astrologers. In fact, that headline read "Hindu Astrologers 

Still Say It's Doomsday." And the sub-headline read "Peaceful 
Beginning of Planetary Event Is Viewed Gravely." 

The third article in the series ran on Tuesday, February 6, 

1962, and carried the headline "'Doomsday' in India Unevent- 
ful." The article reported that the Indian astrologers had 
"predicted a variety of disasters, earthquakes, tidal waves, 
devastating fires, and warfare, to name a few," but that none 

of these events had occurred. Furthermore, the article re- 
ported that Hindu priests had claimed that the reason noth- 

ing had happened was because their prayers to their god had 
been answered. 

But, none of these three articles mentioned the birth of 
anyone on these three days. Furthermore, none but a few as- 
trologers had believed that something good was going to hap- 
pen, and that only a few in India had listened to them. 

Only Jeanne Dixon, another "astrologer," had seen a vision 

of something beneficial, in this case the birth of a baby "full 
of wisdom," at about the midpoint of the three day affair. 

One can only wonder if, once again, she missed the mark, 
and was involved in another error. 

In any event, these people claim that the Lord Maitreya 
will appear shortly to the entire world and start everyone off 
on a road to a world religion. Helena Petrovna Blavatsky in 
her book entitled THE SECRET DOCTRINE, called him "the 


23 



CHAPTER 3 LORD MAITREYA 


dragon of wisdom." So it appears that the one call that 
Jeanne Dixon made that appears to match other comments is 
her statement that the baby she saw in her "vision" was "full 
of wisdom." If the baby she claimed to have seen in her vi- 
sion was "Lord Maitreya," then she was right, because others 
have claimed that Lord Maitreya is "full of wisdom." 

However, there is still reason to believe that she was 
given "inside" information by some New Agers who wanted to 
have this "Lord's" birth "prophesied' so that when he did 
surface, the New Agers could claim that his birth had been 
"a fulfilled prophecy." 

So the world awaits the visible appearance of Lord 
Maitreya. 


24 



Chapter 4 

The Ancient Mysteries 


"The One Who Knows The Secret Does Not Speak. 
The One Who Speaks Does Not Know The Secret." 

Alice Bailey, one of the key members of the New Age 
religion, wrote: 

"There is no question therefore that the work to be 
done in familiarizing the general public with the nature 
of the Mysteries is of paramount importance at this 
time. These Mysteries will be restored to outer ex- 
pression through the medium of the Church and the 

Masonic Fraternity." 88 

The question of just what the Ancient Mysteries were was 
answered, in part, by Albert G. Mackey, another 33rd degree 
Mason, in his two volume work entitled ENCYCLOPAEDIA 
OF FREEMASONRY. He wrote this under the subject of the 
Ancient Mysteries: 


25 



CHAPTER 4 THE ANCIENT MYSTERIES 


"Each of the pagan gods ... had, besides the public 
and open, a secret worship paid to him to which none 
were admitted but those who had been selected by 

preparatory ceremonies called Initiation. 

This secret worship was termed the Mysteries." 89 

The student of the Masonic Order can know that when 
Mr. Mackey writes, his writings can be relied upon. He is 
considered to be one of the premier Masonic authors of all 

time. These are the comments from the biographical 

information presented on Mr. Mackey in the front of his 

ENCYCLOPAEDIA: 

"... his writings are universally esteemed for their 

sincerity, honest records and common sense. [He was] a 

leader in research ... who valued accuracy." 9(1 

Carl Claudy, another Mason who writes on the subject of 

the Lodge, also has words of praise for Mr. Mackey: 

"[He was] one of the greatest students and most 

widely followed authorities the Masonic world has ever 

known." 91 

And in his book entitled INTRODUCTION TO FREEMA- 
SONRY, he praised Mr. Mackey with these words: 

"Albert Gallatin Mackey: one of the greatest stu- 

dents and most widely followed authorities the Masonic 
world has known. [He is] the great Master of Freema- 
sonry." 92 

So Mr. Mackey can be believed when he tells his readers 
that the worship of pagan gods had a secret, non-visible 
worship besides the public one. The reader can believe him 
when he identifies the name of this secret worship. He told 
his readers: 

"This secret worship was termed the Mysteries." 

Another who has written about the subject of the Ancient 
Mysteries was Manly P. Hall, another 33rd degree Mason. He 


26 



CHAPTER 4 THE ANCIENT MYSTERIES 


has written in his book entitled WHAT THE ANCIENT 
WISDOM EXPECTS OF ITS DISCIPLES: 

"In the remote past the gods walked with men and 
they chose from among the sons of men the wisest 
and the truest. 

With these specially ordained and illumined sons 


they left 

the 

keys of 

their great wisdom. 

which 

was the 

knowledge 

later.] 

of 

good 

and evil. [This 

will 

be 

examined 

these 

illumined 

ones, founded 

what 

we 

know as 


the Ancient Mysteries." 93 


He wrote additional comments about these mysteries in 
another of the books he has written, called THE SECRET 
TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES: 

"The arcana [defined as being a secret or hidden 
knowledge] of the Ancient Mysteries were never re- 
vealed to the profane [defined as those not initiated 

into the inner mysteries] except through the media of 
symbols. Symbolism fulfilled the dual office of con- 
cealing the sacred truths from the uninitiated and re- 

vealing to those qualified to understand the symbols." 94 

Mr. Hall dedicated the latter book to: 

"the proposition that concealed within the emblem- 


atic figures, allegories 

and 

rituals of 

the ancients is 

a 

secret 

doctrine 

concerning 

the inner 

mysteries 

of 

life. 

which 

doctrine 

has 

been 

preserved 

in toto 

[in 

the 

whole] 

among 

a small 

. . .. c\z 

band 

of initiated minds 

since 

the 


QC 

beginning of the world." 

He went on to mention that the Mysteries: 

"were secret societies, binding their initiates to in- 
violable secrecy, and avenging with death the betrayal 
of their sacred trusts." 96 

Mr. Hall told the reader that no one is to know the iden- 
tity of those who have received the secrets. He wrote: 


27 



CHAPTER 4 THE ANCIENT MYSTERIES 


"The true Adept and Initiate shall reveal his 

identity to no man, unless that one is worthy to receive 


He further explained where some of these initiates lived, 
when he wrote: 

"... no reasonable doubt can exist that the initiates 
of Greece, Egypt, and other ancient countries possessed 

the correct solutions to those great cultural, intellectual, 
moral, and social problems which in an unsolved state 

confront the humanity of the twentieth century." 98 

He further amplified that thought when he added: 

"Neo-Platonism [defined by Mr. Hall as a school 

founded by Plotinus around 240 A.D., concerning itself 

with the problems of metaphysics, the study of 
knowledge] recognized the existence of a secret and all- 
important doctrine which from the time of the earliest 

civilizations had been concealed within the rituals, 

symbols and allegories of religions and philosophies." " 

So, in summary, it is possible to understand what these 

Ancient Mysteries were. There appear to be at least four 

truths gleaned from the information provided in the com- 

ments made above. Those truths appear to be: 

1. The Ancient Mysteries had two forms of 
worshipping the same god. 

2. The knowledge of the true god was reserved 

for those who had been entrusted with the 
secrets. 

3. Those who understood those secrets were 
sworn to the strictest secrecy. 

4. Those who had knowledge of the secrets 

claimed to possess all of the answers to all of 

the problems of mankind. 

There was an additional secret for the secret bearers: they 
had to be initiated in a private initiation ceremony. Albert 
Pike wrote a little about it: 


28 



CHAPTER 4 THE ANCIENT MYSTERIES 


"Initiation was considered to be a mystical death; 

and the perfect Epopt was then said to be regenerated, 
newborn, restored to a renovated existence of life, light 
and purity."- 100 

In fact, this "new born" experience is similar to the exper- 
ience the "born again" Christians go through. The Christians 
call their experience a second birth, just as the Masons do. In 
fact, Albert Pike calls a similar ceremony a "born again" ex- 
perience. He wrote: 

"In the Indian Mysteries, the Third degree, the 

Initiate is said to be 'born again."' 101 

The ceremony in the ancient mysteries has been described 
by the Masonic writer Manly P. Hall: 

"In the ancient system of initiation, the truth 

seeker must pass through a second birth, and those 

who attained this exalted state were known thereafter 

as 'the twice born.' 

This new birth ... must be personally earned 

through a complete regeneration of character and 

conduct." 102 

This "new birth" ceremony involves a symbolic death, 

according to the Mason Kenneth Mackenzie. He wrote: 

"In the ancient mysteries, the aspirant could not 

participate in the highest secrets until he had been 

placed in the Coffin. 

In this he was symbolically said to die, and his 

resurrection was to the light." 103 

Modern day Masons participate in an almost similar 
ceremony to the one described by these Masonic writers. In 
the Third Degree, called the Master Mason degree, inside the 
Blue Lodge, the candidate is actually knocked off of his feet 
by several of the Masons in attendance. He is wrapped up in 
a blanket and moved to the western end of the Temple. 

There, after further ceremony, he is "raised up" by a secret 
grip called "The Master's grip, or the lion's paw." 104 


29 



CHAPTER 4 THE ANCIENT MYSTERIES 


Those who learned the mysteries also learned that they 
had a secret project, one that was described by Albert Pike in 
his book entitled MORALS AND DOGMA. Mr. Pike wrote: 

"Behold our object, the end, the result, of the great 
speculations ... of antiquity; the ultimate annihilation of 
evil, and restoration of Man to his first estate, by a 
Redeemer, a Masayah, a Christos, the incarnate Word, 

Reason, or Power of Deity." 105 

Mr. Hall told his readers that those who had been 

initiated into the mysteries were the secret power behind the 
governments of the past. He wrote this about these ancient 
initiates in his book entitled WHAT THE ANCIENT WIS- 

DOM EXPECTS OF ITS DISCIPLES: 

"[they] ... are the invisible powers behind the 

thrones of earth, and men are but marionettes, dancing 
while the invisible ones pull the strings. We see the 
dancer, but the master mind that does the work 

remains concealed by the cloak of silence." 106 

Other writers have confirmed the thoughts of Mr. Hall. A 

Masonic scholar named George Steinmetz also acknowledged 
that these mysteries exist, and that some of the members 
inside the Masonic lodges are custodians of the secrets. He 
has written this in his book entitled FREEMASONRY, ITS 

HIDDEN MEANING: 

"Ancient secret doctrine, which is concealed in Ma- 
sonic allegory and symbolism .... It was but to preserve 

these truths for future generations that Masonry was 

perpetuated." 107 

Another who has officially connected the Ancient Mysteries 

to the Masonic Order was Manly P. Hall, who wrote this: 

"Much of the ritualism of Freemasonry is based on 

the trials to which candidates were subjected by the 

ancient hierophants [defined as the high priests of the 

mysteries] before the keys of wisdom were enthroned to 
them." 108 


30 



CHAPTER 4 THE ANCIENT MYSTERIES 


The Ancient Mysteries had a beginning, according to Mr. 
Mackey. He wrote about where they started: 

"The first of which ... are those of Isis and Osiris 

in Egypt. The most important of these mysteries were 
the Osiric in Egypt." 109 

Another writer, Edmond Ronayne, an ex-Mason, confirmed 
that the Masons were involved in the worship of Osiris, when 
he wrote this in his book entitled THE MASTERS CARPET: 

Masonry's "... ceremonies, symbols, and the cele- 
brated legend of Hiram in the Master Mason's degree, 

were directly borrowed from the 'Ancient Mysteries,' or 

the secret worship of Baal, Osiris or Tammuz." 110 

Albert Pike then detailed where the mysteries went after 

their beginnings in Egypt. He wrote this in MORALS AND 
DOGMA: 

"From Egypt, the Mysteries went to Phoenicia, and 
were celebrated at Tyre. Osiris changed his name, and 
became Adoni or Dionusos, still the representative of 
the sun. In Greece and Sicily, Osiris took the name of 
Bacchus ...." 111 

So the Ancient Mysteries conceal an important mystery 
kept secret from the average person. The mystics claim that 
this mystery has been concealed from the world for centuries. 
Even though they had taken the mystery to other con- 

tinents, those who believed in this religion were yet to take it 
to America. 

That was yet to come. 


31 



Chapter 5 
Secret Societies 


"An invisible hand is guiding the populace." 

Lafayette 

Arthur Edward Waite, a prolific writer on secret societies, 
has written this: 

"Beneath the broad tide of human history there 
flow the stealthy undercurrents of the secret societies, 
which frequently determine in the depths the changes 
that take place upon the surface." 112 

Another who wrote about the power just underneath the 
surface was President Woodrow Wilson, who made this 
startling statement: 

"... there is a power so organized, so subtle, so 
complete, so pervasive, that they had better not speak 


32 



CHAPTER 5 SECRET SOCIETIES 


above their breath when they speak in condemnation of 


So these two writers has warned America that secret 

societies had been arranging the major events of the past. 

And President Wilson warned those who were quick to con- 
demn these organizations that they had better be cautious. 

Albert Pike also connected the secret societies with a 
secret belief in his book entitled MORALS AND DOGMA. He 
wrote that all secret orders and associations: 

"... had two doctrines, one concealed and reserved 
for the Masters, ... the other public ...." 114 

One such secret society with two doctrines was the Illumi- 

nati, and Professor Weishaupt, its founder, boasted of his 
organization's secrecy. He realized that this secrecy would 

enable them to decide the fate of nations and because their 
deliberations were secret, no outsider could interfere. He 

wrote: 

"The great strength of our Order lies in its conceal- 
ment; let it never appear in its own name, but always 

covered by another name, and another occupation." 115 

Weishaupt later wrote about that secrecy in a letter to a 

fellow member of the Illuminati: 

"Nothing can bring this about [the new world 

order] but hidden societies. Hidden schools of wisdom 

are the means which will one day free men from their 

bonds [the "bonds" of religion, as will be detailed later.] 

Princes and nations shall vanish from the earth." 116 

So the secret societies were created to bring the world to 
the new society known as the New World Order. The 

members of these organizations obviously feel that their goals 
are so noble that they may perform whatever tasks are 

required of them to bring that goal to fruition. This means 
that murder, plunder, and lying all become acceptable as long 

as these methods assist its members in obtaining their goal. 

But the Masons want the world to know that they are not 
one of the societies involved in changing the world's 


33 



CHAPTER 5 SECRET SOCIETIES 


civilization. They are quick to rush to their own defense. 

Albert G. Mackey attempted to clear the air about those who 
had been charging them with some of these activities. He 

wrote in the ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY: 

"There is no charge made more frequently against 

Freemasonry than that of its tendency to revolution, 

and conspiracy, and to political organizations which 

may affect the peace of society or interfere with the 

rights of governments. 

It has been the unjust accusation of every enemy 
of the Institution in all times past, that its object and 

aim is the possession of power and control in the affairs 

of state. 

It is in vain that history records no instance of 
this unlawful connection between Freemasonry and 
politics; it is in vain that the libeler is directed to the 

Ancient Constitutions of the Order, which expressly 
forbid such connections." 117 

So the public is to believe that just because their Consti- 
tution forbids such activity, the Masons do not engage in it. 

But the evidence that connects the Masonic Lodges to such 
activity continues to accumulate, Mr. Mackey's denials not- 
withstanding. 


34 



Chapter 6 

Concealed Mysteries 


"In all time, truth has been hidden under symbols." 118 

"... symbols ... are nevertheless ingenious veils that 

cover the truth." 119 

Thus wrote Albert Pike, the Sovereign Grand Commander 
of the Southern Jurisdiction of the Scottish Rite of Free- 
masonry. 

There certainly seems to be a power in knowing some- 
thing that you can't tell your family, friends, children or busi- 
ness acquaintances. Adam Weishaupt said it best with this 
selection from his writings: 

"Of all the means I know to lead men, the most 
effectual is a concealed mystery." 120 


35 



CHAPTER 6 CONCEALED MYSTERIES 


The power of hidden symbols was alluded to by another 
writer, this time Foster Bailey in his book entitled THE 
SPIRIT OF FREEMASONRY: 

"A symbol veils or hides a secret, and is that 
which veils certain mysterious forces. These energies 
when released can have a potent effect." 121 

There are many who can attest to that simple truth: 
organizations with concealed or secret initiation ceremonies 
abound in America. College fraternities and sororities teach 

the college student to accept secret initiation ceremonies and 
hidden knowledge at a young age. The Masons, intended for 
adult males, have similar organizations for their young sons 
and daughters, and other secret organizations for their wives. 
All of these organizations tend to prepare their male 

members for further service in the master secret organization: 
the Masons. 

However, the Masons are quick to point out that they 
conceal their truths from the general public. Manly P. Hall 
wrote this : 

"It is for the Adepts [an adept is defined by the 

dictionary as one who is an expert. But, there is an 
"esoteric" definition that shall be discussed later] one 
to understand the meaning of the Symbols." 122 

He further instructed his readers that understanding the 
symbols could make one wise: 

"... an understanding of these symbols is the 

beginning of wisdom" 123 

Max Toth, a writer about the Great Pyramid of Giza in 

Egypt also wrote about the purpose of symbols: 

"The knowledge of the ancient mysteries was nev- 
er revealed to the layman except through the media of 

symbols. 

Symbolism fulfilled both the need to conceal 
sacred truths from the uninitiated and to offer a 

language for those qualified to understand it." 124 


36 



CHAPTER 6 CONCEALED MYSTERIES 


Whatever these secrets are, one writer on the subject feels 
it is time to make them public. Alice Bailey, one of the key 
writers supporting the New Age movement, wrote this: 

"The hour for the ancient mysteries has arrived... 

These Ancient Mysteries were ... hidden in 
numbers, in ritual, in words, and in symbology; these 

veil the secret ...." 125 

Another writer who writes on the Order, Carl H. Claudy, 
told anyone who read the Masonic literature that they had 
best understand the language, or they would miss the true 
meaning of the words. He wrote: 

"He who hears but the words of Freemasonry 

misses their meaning entirely. 126 

Rex Hutchens, a 32nd degree Mason who has written a 

hook for the Masons, one so important that it was used to 

replace one written by Henry Clausen, a former Sovereign 
Commander, also informed his readers that his writings also 
concealed a secret: 

"The word reveal means to 're-veil,' that is, to 

give one explanation and yet continue to maintain the 

mystery of the symbol by not explaining it in a full 
and complete manner." 127 

So, the language code must be broken if one is to learn 
the truth about the Masonic Order. The reason that this is so 
is because the Masons have admitted that they have con- 

cealed the true meaning of some of their language. 

However, it is possible to know the true meanings of at 

least some of the hidden language. And the reader can be 
certain that the discovered interpretations are correct because 

the Masons themselves have revealed the hidden meanings of 
some of their symbols in some of their own literature. 
The secret societies that have concealed their purposes in 
hidden meanings, concealed writings, and private initiation 
cermonies, are admittedly powerful. One who recognized that 
power was Benjamin Disraeli, the Prime Minister of England 


37 



CHAPTER 6 CONCEALED MYSTERIES 


in the late 1880's, who said this in the House of Commons on 
July 14, 1856: 

"There is in Italy a power which we seldom men- 
tion in this House .... I mean the secret societies .... It 

is useless to deny, because it is impossible to conceal, 
that a great part of Europe — the whole of Italy and 
France and a great portion of Germany, to say nothing 

of other countries ~ is covered with a network of these 
secret societies .... 

what are their objects? They do not want 

constitutional government; ... they want to change the 

tenure of the land, to drive out the present owners of 
the soil and to put an end to ecclesiastical [meaning 
religious] establishments." 128 

The Masons know about concealing secrets from the rest 
of the world. Carl Claudy, a Masonic writer, told his readers 

that secrets are inside secrets which are inside other secrets. 

He wrote: 

"Cut through the outer shell and find a meaning; 

cut through that meaning and find another; under it if 

you dig deep enough you may find a third, a fourth - 
who shall say how many teachings?" 129 

And even the Communists use concealment. 

Nikolai Lenin, the Marxist Communist who communized 
the Russian nation in the years following the Russian Rev- 

olution of 1917, wrote this: 

"We have to use any ruse, dodge, trick, cunning, 

unlawful method, concealment, and veiling of the 
truth." 130 

The use of secrecy to conceal thoughts from certain of the 

members of an organization or from the public is the device 

of those who have something to hide. 

That something is so horrible, so terrible, that knowledge 
of that secret must be kept from those who would have the 
most to lose by knowledge of that secret. 

In the case of the secret societies, it is a belief in Lucifer, 
also known as Satan, the devil. 


38 



CHAPTER 6 CONCEALED MYSTERIES 


In the case of Communism, it is the truth that the people 
living in a Communist nation know that the system does not 
work. But those in a non-Communist nation targeted for a 
Communist government are not to learn that simple truth. 
They are to be told that the system is the culmination of 
man's upward search for a perfect society. And they must be 
deluded into believing that there is no cost in the change 
from their, current form of government to the Communist 
form. But history has recorded the brutality of the Com- 
munists and the fact that millions of people have had to die 
as the Communists installed that form of government. 

The evidence to support that contention will be discussed 
later in this study. 

Secrecy is certainly not a part of the Chrisian religion. It 
is possible to know that nothing that Jesus said has been 
hidden from the Christians. He told the high priest in John 
18 : 20 : 

"... and in secret have I said nothing." 

The intentional concealing of an organization's beliefs and 

purposes by the use of hidden language and concealed sym- 
bols is reserved primarily to the secret societies, and the 
nationwide Masonic Lodges are indeed a secret society. 
The Masons know that they must conceal their horrible 
secret from the people. 

That secret is simply the fact that certain of their 

members worship Lucifer. And that they keep that secret 
from the overwhelming majority of their own members. And 
certainly the public is not to know this fact. 

And the evidence to support that conclusion is ample. 

But only to the one who cares enough to look for it. 


39 



Chapter 7 

Serpents, Stars and Suns 


So the student of history has to discover the hidden 
meanings behind the symbols in the Masonic literature and 
in the secret initiation ceremonies to understand the Masonic 
Order. 

One of the first symbols that needs to be examined is the 
symbol of the serpent, also called a snake or dragon. 

Manly P. Hall wrote that the use of this symbol is as old 
as early man when he wrote this in his book entitled THE 
SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES: 

"Among nearly all these ancient peoples the 

serpent was accepted as a symbol of wisdom ...." 131 

Here Mr. Hall states that the serpent was a symbol of 
"wisdom." It will be remembered that Lord Maitreya, the 

future New Age leader, also claimed to possess "wisdom." 

Mr. Hall continued: 


40 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 

"Serpent worship in some form has permeated 
nearly all parts of the earth." 

"The serpent is the symbol and prototype of the 

Universal Savior, who redeems the world by giving 
creation the knowledge of itself and the realization of 
good and evil." 132 

And then Mr. Hall links the serpent with the Ancient 
Mysteries previously discussed. He continues with the com- 
ment that the serpent was worshipped by the priests of that 
religion: 

"The priests of the Mysteries were symbolized as 

a serpent, sometimes called Hydra." 33 

He then pointed out that the Ancient Mysteries have been 

passed on to various other cultures, and that they have been 
brought forward to the present day: 

"The Serpent Kings [notice that Mr. Hall cap- 
italized the two words, as one would do for a deity or 

for royalty] reigned over the earth. 

It was these Serpent Kings who founded the Mys- 
tery Schools which later appeared as the Egyptian and 
Brahmin Mysteries .... The serpent was their symbol 

They were the true Sons of Light, and from them 
have descended a long line of adepts and initiates duly 
tried and proven according to the law." 134 

Another writer, Wilfred Gregson, informed his readers 
why Mr. Hall capitalized the two words "Serpent Kings" when 
he wrote: 

"One symbol of great prominence throughout all 

ancient civilizations is the snake of serpent, where it 

has symbolized 'Divine Wisdom.'" 135 

So. Mr. Hall had reason to capitalize the words, because 
he had discovered that the serpent represented divinity. 

Notice also that Mr. Gregson, even though he chose not to 
capitalize the word "serpent," confirmed that Mr. Hall's use of 
the capital letter was correct when he stated that there was 
a connection between "Divine Wisdom" and the serpent. 


41 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 


Mr. Hall made the same connection in these comments: 

"The serpent is true to the principles of wisdom, 

for it tempts man to the knowledge of himself." 136 

A serpent is "often used by the ancients to sym- 
bolize wisdom." 137 


The symbol of the serpent has another concealed truth, 
according to Kenneth Mackenzie. He identified that truth in 
this quote when he described a Brazen Serpent: 

"It was a type of Mediator, and a promise of re- 
demption." 

The word Brazen is defined as "bold, or impudent." And 
Impudent is defined as "shamelessly bold or disrespectful." 

It will be remembered that Lucifer was an anoited cherub 
in heaven, who fell because he sought godly power. The story 
is covered in Isaiah 14: 12-14 of the Old Testament: 


"How are thou fallen from heaven, O Lucifer, son of 
the morning! How art thou cut down to the ground .... 

For thou hast said in thine heart, I will ascend into 

heaven, I will exalt my throne above the stars of God: 
... I will be like the most High." 

Therefore, it can be safely said that Lucifer would be con- 
sidered to be "shamelessly bold" and "disrespectful." 

It appears that the Brazen Serpent could be Lucifer! 

Another author, John Anthony West, wrote a book enti- 

tled SERPENT IN THE SKY, in which he also connected the 
serpent with "wisdom." He wrote: 


"... the serpent represents intellect, the faculty by 
which man discriminates. There is a higher and a low- 
er intellect. 

Thus, symbolically, there is a serpent that crawls, 

and the higher intellect, that which allows man to 

know God - the heavenly serpent, the serpent in the 

sky." 138 


42 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 

The somewhat veiled worship of this serpent in the sky 
inside the Masonic lodges was alluded to by another Masonic 
writer, Kenneth Mackenzie, in his book entitled THE ROYAL 
MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA. He wrote this: 

"Among the charges preferred against the Order of 
Knights Templar, for which Jacques de Molay suffered 
martyrdom, was that of worshipping an idol or image 
called Baphomet. 

It has been suggested that Baphomet is none 

other than the Ancient of Days, or Creator. 

More cannot be said here without improperly re- 
vealing what we [meaning we Masons] are bound to 
hele, conceal and never reveal." 

So, according to this Mason, the snake or serpent is some- 
how a symbol of the subject of the Masonic worship, and ap- 
parently this fact is the secret that the Masons cannot reveal 

to the rest of the world. 

A Christian minister. Reverend Alexander Hislop, wrote a 
book that included some discussion on the subject of serpent 
worship. In that book, entitled TWO BABYLONS, he ex- 
plained that serpent worship was not something that is re- 
cent in time. It was an ancient practice. 

"Along with the sun [this symbol will be discussed 

later,] as the great fire-god, and, in due time, iden- 
tified with him, was the serpent worshipped. In the 

mythology of the primitive world, the serpent is uni- 

versally the symbol of the sun. 

as the sun was the great enlightener of the 

physical world, so the serpent was held to have been 
the great enlightener of the spiritual, by giving man- 

kind the 'knowledge of good and evil." 1 

He then discussed a coin minted in Tyre, the center of the 
ancient Phoenician culture. (This coin was also the subject of 
an article in the September, 1986 issue of The Good News 
magazine.) It depicted a serpent entwined around a tree 
stump. To the left of the stump stood an empty cornucopia, 
and to the right a flourishing palm tree. The snake on the 
coin is the symbol of the powerful god whom the Romans 


43 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 


called Aesculapius. The name means "the man-instructing 

snake, or the "snake that instructs man." 
The article then reported: 

"In mythology, Aesculapius was believed to be the 

child of the Sun, and thus the 'enlightener' of mankind. 

As the legend goes, Aesculapius was ultimately struck 

down by a thunderbolt thrown by an angry Zeus, king 
of the gods, and cast into the underworld." 141 

The tree stump represented the fallen "god" and his 
ruined kingdom. In the mythologies of many ancient civili- 
zations, the image of a fallen tree was used to symbolize the 

cutting off of a great god or hero, someone cut off in the 

midst of their power. The snake on the coin was shown twist- 
ing itself around the dead stump, exerting its power in an 

attempt to restore his fallen kingdom. 

The cornucopia is an ancient symbol of plenty, but it was 

empty on the coin. This has been interpreted as meaning that 

the abundance had been cut off because the great "god" has 

been cut off. However, the implication is that the horn of 

plenty will return when the fallen "god" is restored to his 

"rightful" position. 

The palm tree shown on the coin is a well known symbol 

of victory. So it appears that the coin was minted to depict 

the anticipated return of the fallen snake-god to the world. 

The Bible talks about a fallen serpent in the book of Rev- 
elation, chapter 12, verse 9. However, in this case, the snake 

is connected to another symbol of the serpent: "a great drag- 
on." 


"And the great dragon was cast out, that old ser- 
pent, called the Devil, and Satan ...." 

Is the serpent worshipped in the Ancient Mysteries and a 
symbol in the Masonic ceremonies a symbol of Satan, the 
devil? As has already been discussed, there is indeed evidence 
that this is the case. 

Another symbol that needs to be analyzed is the star. 

On the page opposite page 124 in Mackey's ENCYCLO- 
PAEDIA is a drawing illustrating the "symbols of Freema- 
sonry." Included in the twenty or so Masonic symbols is a 
drawing of a shooting star. 


44 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 

It can be fairly claimed that a blazing or shooting star 
would be one that was on the move inside the universe. One 
of the directions it could move would be towards the earth. If 
itwas moving towards the earth, it could be called a "falling 
star. 

Lucifer is a "fallen angel," according to Isaiah, an Old 
Testament prophet, who wrote this in Isaiah 14:12: 

"How art thou fallen from heaven, O Lucifer ...." 

Notice that Isaiah also said that Lucifer fell from heaven. 
And other parts of the Bible report that he fell to the earth. 
So, it is conceivable that the symbol of the "falling" or 

"blazing" star could be a symbol of Lucifer. 

A variety of authors have used their writings to discuss 
the star as a symbol. Professor Adam Weishaupt, the founder 
of the Illuminati, was one who explained what he considered 
the star to be a symbol of: 

"... the Flaming Star is the Torch of Reason." 142 

Mr. Mackey wrote that the star: 

"was a symbol of God." 

He then connected the blazing star to another symbol 
when he wrote: 

"The Blazing Star ... refers us to the sun ...." 143 

And then he connected it with the secret initiation cere- 
monies inside the Masonic lodge: 

"In the Fourth Degree of the same Rite [the Scot- 
tish Rite of Freemasonry] the [Blazing Star] is again 
said to be a symbol of the light of Divine Providence 
pointing out the way of truth." 144 

And Mr. Hutchens, the Masonic writer who has authored 
the recent book on Masonry, further interpreted the symbol of 
the star: 


45 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 


"The star as a type of the myriad suns that light 

other countless systems of worlds is an emblem of that 

Masonic Light in search of which every Mason 
travels — the correct knowledge of the Deity, and of 

His laws that control the universe." 143 

Closely allied with the symbol of the star is the symbol of 
the sun. Albert Pike identified it with the worship of the past 
in this collection of quotes from his writings: 

"The worship of the sun became the basis of all 

the religions of antiquity." 146 

"... thousands of years ago, men worshipped the 
Sun .... Originally they looked beyond the orb to the 

invisible God .... They personified him as Brahma, 

Amun, Osiris, Bel, Adonis, Malkarth, Mithras, and 

Apollo. Krishna is the Hindu Sun-God." 147 

"... the Gauls worshipped the Sun under the name 

of Belin or Belinis." 148 

"The sun is the ancient symbol of the life-giving 

and generative power of the Deity. The Sun was His 
manifestation and visible image." 149 

"The Sun is the hieroglyphic al sign of Truth, be- 

cause it is the source of Light." 15(1 

So, Mr. Pike identified the sun as a symbol of a deity 
that should be worshipped. He chose to capitalize the first 
letter in the word, the "s," as one would in recognizing the 
name of a deity. 

Albert Mackey repeated Mr. Pike's contentions with com- 
ments like these about "sun worship:" 


"... [it was] the oldest and by far the most prev- 
alent of all the ancient religions. Eusebius says that 

the Phoenicians and the Egyptians were the first who 

ascribed divinity to the sun." 

"Hardly any of the symbols of Masonry are more 
important in their signification or more extensive in 

their application than the sun as the source of mate- 
rial light, it minds the Mason of that intellectual light 

of which he is in constant search. 


46 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 

The sun is then presented to us in Masonry first 

as a symbol of light, but then more emphatically as a 
symbol of sovereign authority." 151 

So, the sun was a symbol of something that only the be- 

lievers in the religion known as the Ancient Mysteries un- 
derstood. These believers, called adepts, certainly knew that 
the people would not accept their mystery religion, so they 
had to conceal it from them. So the task became one of cre- 
ating a religion around a belief that they knew the people 
would accept, because it would make some sense, at least as 

far as the adepts would explain it. But their basic purpose 

was to create a popular religion as a cover for their secret 
worship. 

The secret religion would be built around a belief in the 

sun. 

The sun would be a perfect thing to build a religion 
around because of its basic nature. It is very visible, and has 

a very important role in man's life. It rises in the morning (it 
appears to be born) and then sets during the evening, (it ap- 
pears to die) and then appears to be "born again" the next 
morning. It also appears to wander in the sky, setting further 
north (or south) each night. It then returns back to any given 
position twice a year. 

So the sun appears to have a major birth or death twice 
each day and twice each year. 

It would be very easy for the adepts to explain to the peo- 
ple that only something bigger than mankind, a god, had the 
ability to die and come back to life. So, the adepts would 
teach the people that they had to pray to the god or it would 
choose not to return. They encouraged a worship of the sun 
so that it would return to mankind again, either once a day, 
or once every six months. 

Albert Pike confirmed this view with this explanation of 
why early man worshipped the sun: 

"To them [meaning early man] ... the journeyings 
of the Sun, were voluntary and not mechanical ...." 152 

So early man considered the sun to be something that 
moved voluntarily. In other words, the sun did not have to 
return each morning. Man must have quickly determined that 
since the sun did not have to return, man should start asking 


47 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 

it to return. Man certainly must have figured out just how 

important the sun was to his life and well-being and he cer- 
tainly must have determined that if the sun chose not to re- 
turn, all of mankind would perish. So it was an easy jump 

from a belief that the necessary sun was an entity that chose 
to move across the daytime sky, to a belief that it would re- 

turn only if man prayed to it to return. 

But there is something even more interesting to be con- 

sidered that Pike didn't explain with that comment. 

Obviously, to make the new religion work, the believers 
would have to be able to predict the movements of the sun. It 
wouldn't be too long before some of the common people would 
start noticing that the sun was neither an actual being nor a 

god to be worshipped, but something that moved according to 
precise laws. If the common people figured that out, they 
would not need the adepts who had computed the sun's peri- 
odic cycles. So, to keep their power intact, they would teach 
the people that if they did not accommodate their wishes, 
they would make certain that the sun did not return. They 
could even predict, as their measurements became more so- 
phisticated, the exact time and date when the moon would go 
between the sun and the earth, causing the sun to "disap- 
pear." They could then fool the people into believing that they 

were the cause of the disappearance. They could then explain 

to the people that if they did not continue to pay them sort 
sort of tribute, they would not intercede in their behalf, and 
the sun would not reappear. 

To keep the minds of the common people away from figur- 
ing out that the whole religion was a scam, the adepts would 

conduct beautiful and ornate ceremonies around the worship 
of the sun. And they would expect the people to pay them for 
the elaborate rituals. And to make their rituals valid, the 
adepts would always claim that the sun obeyed their prayers, 
thereby convincing the people of their need to keep the 
adepts around. The people would continue to pay tribute to 
these adepts as long as they appeared to be successful. 

Now, if the adepts knew that the sun was a symbol of 

something that the people would not support, such as a belief 
that Lucifer, the devil, was the god that they worshipped, 
they would have to continue with their charade, so that the 
people would not decide to stop worshipping. Because if the 
people figured it out, they would no longer support their 


48 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 


activities. They would have to keep their beliefs from the 
people, and conceal their secret worship in hidden symbols. 

So sun worship as a religion prospered. 

Mr. Hutchens discussed that position in his book: 


"In the Tabernacle the brethren, 
mourn Osiris, who is representative 

light, of life, of good and beauty, 

the way the earth may again be 

presence. 


clothed in black, 
of the sun, of 

They reflect upon 
gladdened by his 


Mr. Pike connected the sun to Osiris, mentioned by Mr. 
Hutchens as worthy of being mourned: 

"The three lights at the Altar [inside the Masonic 
Temple] represent Osiris, Isis and Horns. Osiris was 

represented by the Sun." 154 

Mr. Mackey went a little further and informed his readers 
that: 

"Osirus was the sun ...." 153 

In his book entitled INTRODUCTION TO FREEMA- 
SONRY, Carl H. Claudy, the author, himself a Mason, 

connected the sun worship with the ceremonies inside the 

Masonic Lodge: 


"The lodge ... sets him [meaning the initiate] upon 

the path that leads to Light but it is for him to 
travel the winding path to the symbolic East." 156 


The physical sun rises in the east, and the Masons ex- 
plain that their search for light begins in the east. And notice 
that Mr. Claudy capitalizes the word "East," apparently in 
reverence to the spot where they believe that this god resides. 
The Masons tell the world that they circumambulate (de- 
fined as walking around) the Temple floor during their initia- 
tion ceremonies. Mr. Claudy explains why this rite is per- 
formed: 


"When the candidate first circles the lodge room 
about the altar, he walks step by step with a thou- 


49 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 


sand shades of men who have thus worshipped the 
Most High by humble imitation. 

Thus thought of circumambulation is no longer a 

mere parade but a ceremony of significance, linking all 
who take part in it with the spiritual aspirations of a 
dim and distant past." 157 

He further instructs his readers as to why this ceremony 

is part of their ceremony: 

"Early man circled altars on which burned the fire 

which was his God, from east to west by way of the 
south [notice that the north is not included in the cer- 
emony. The significance of that omission will be dis- 
cussed later.] Circumambulation became a part of all 

religious observances." 

In another part of his book, entitled INTRODUCTION TO 
FREEMASONRY, Mr. Claudy reported that this style of 
walking was traceable to the ancient religions of the past. He 
wrote: 

"Circumambulation ... was in the ceremonies of an- 

cient Egypt." 158 

So, this practice of the modern Masons is based upon the 

ancient religious practices of the Ancients. 

So the Masons are telling us that early man walked 
around in a circle because he was worshipping the sun. Then 
they tell us that they are doing it for the same reason. 

There are reasons that the north as a location to be vis- 
ited in their walk around the temple floor is not included in 
their initiation rites, and six of the great Masonic writers 
have told us why this is so. 

Captain William Morgan offered his readers this explana- 
tion with this comment from his book: 

"... we, therefore. Masonic ally, term the north a 

place of darkness." 159 

Mr. Mackey confirmed that statement in his book: 


50 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 


"The north is Masonically called a place of dark- 


And Mr. Pike confirmed the comments made by the other 
two Masons with this declaration: 

"To all Masons, the North has immediately been 
the place of darkness, and of the great lights of the 
Lodge, none is in the North." 161 

And Kenneth Mackenzie added his confirming thoughts: 

"The North was always esteemed a place of dark- 


Mr. Hutchens became the fifth Masonic writer to confirm 
this detail: 

"As in other degrees, the closing ritual provides a 

summary of the lessons taught in the degree. We hear 
in the West the eagles gather and the doom of tyran- 
ny is near. In the South, truth struggles against error 

and oppression. In the North, fanaticism and intoler- 
ance wane. In the East, the people begin to know 

their rights and to be conscious of their dignity and 

that the sun's rays will soon smite the summits of the 
mountains." 163 

Mr. Hutchens informed his readers that the North was 
where "fanaticism and intolerance" resided. What he meant 
by this and what the symbol of the North represents will be 
explored in later paragraphs of this study. 

And the sixth Masonic writer who confirmed that the 
North was a place of darkness was Carl Claudy, who wrote 
this in his book entitled INTRODUCTION TO FREE- 
MASONRY: 

"... the place of darkness, the North." 164 

And the reason the Masons do not include the North in 
their rites is found in the Bible in Isaiah 14:13: 


51 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 


"I [meaning Lucifer] will exalt my throne above 

the stars of God: I will sit also upon the mount of the 
congregation in the sides of the north." 

The God of the Bible sits in the North, and Lucifer hopes 
one day to acquire the throne of God for his throne. But, un- 
til then, the "North is a place of darkness." 

But, while the north is an excluded territory, the east is 
the "place of light," and is to be revered. Mr. Hutchens tells 
his readers why that is so: 


"... the East — the source of light 


edge." 


Albert Mackey quotes Etienne Francois 
Masonic writer in his ENCYCLOPAEDIA: 


and thus knowl- 


Bazot, a French 


"The veneration which the Masons have for the 

East ... bears a relation to the primitive religion whose 

first degeneration was sun-worship." 166 

Rex Hutchens then tells his readers that the Masons de- 
ploy lights around the Lodge room during the initiation cer- 
emony for the 25th degree, called the Knight of the Sun. He 

writes: 

"The ceiling should be decorated to represent the 
heavens with the moon, the principal planets and the 
constellations Taurus and Orion. A single powerful 

light, a great globe of glass, representing the sun, is in 

the South. 

In a physical sense the greater light comes from 

the sun and the transparencies provide lesser light 

symbolically, the sun or great light is the Truth and 

the lesser lights are man's symbolic representation of 

Truth." 167 

Mr. Mackey further discusses this Rite of Circumambula- 
tion, as he calls it, in his ENCYCLOPAEDIA. He says that 
the rite: 

"... exists in Freemasonry. 


52 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 

the people always walked three times round the 

altar while singing a sacred hymn. In making this pro- 

cession, great care was taken to move in imitation of 
the course of the sun." 168 

He then assisted the reader with understanding this prac- 

tice in the Masonic temples: 

"This Rite of Circumambulation undoubtedly refers 

to the doctrine of sun-worship ...." 169 

However, in another of the books that he wrote, Mr. Mac- 
key directly states that the rite is connected to sun worship. 
This is what he wrote in a book entitled MANUAL OF THE 
LODGE: 

"The circumambulation among the pagan nations 
referred to the great doctrines of Sabaism or sun wor- 


Sabaism is defined by Mr. Mackey in his ENCYCLO- 
PAEDIA as: 

"SABAISM: The worship of the sun, moon and 

stars, 'the host of heaven.' It was practiced in Persia, 

Chaldea, India and other Oriental countries, at an ear- 

ly period of the world's history." 171 

He then added this rather cryptic comment: 

"... and although the dogma of sun-worship does 
not of course exist in Freemasonry, we find an allusion 
to it in the Rite of Circumambulation which it pre- 
serves ...." 172 

One can understand what Mr. Mackey meant by that 

comment: the Masons do not worship the sun, they worship 
the Sun! 

So he was telling the truth, but concealing it in a sym- 

bolic language. 

Mr. Hutchens then volunteered the information that in 
the 12th of the 32 degrees the Rite of Circumambulation is 
preserved. He writes: 


53 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 


"In all the Scottish Rite Degrees thus far, the 
candidate has made twenty-one prescribed circuits 

around the altar; this degree adds seven for a total of 

twenty-eight. 

This practice, called circumambulation, is derived 
from the ancients and existed among the Romans, 

Semites, Hindus, and others. 

It is thought to have been a rite of purification. 

The sun was believed to travel around the earth; the 

initiates imitated the movement of the sun when they 
made circuits around the altar." 173 

Furthermore, in the ninth degree, other symbols of the 

sun are involved in the ceremony. Mr. Hutchens tells his 

readers: 

"After the obligation is 

yellow wax are lit. 

Yellow is representative 
and knowledge." 174 

In the tenth degree, further symbols representing the sun 
are utilized, according to this author: 

"There are three sets of five lights: the wax is yel- 
low, meaning knowledge and also, as the color of the 

sun, represents the Deity." 5 

Other clues that the sun and the serpent are both known 
symbols of the Masonic Lodge are given by the titles of two 
of the 32 degrees inside the Masonic Lodge. 

The 25th degree initiate is called a Knight of the Brazen 
Serpent, and the 28th degree initiate is called a Knight of the 
Sun. 

There is another symbol of the sun inside the Masonic 

Lodge. The Worshipful Master, the equivalent of the Presi- 

dent of the Lodge, sits in the east side of the temple. We are 
told why that is: 

"The Worshipful Master represents the sun at its 

rising, the Senior Warden [another officer of the 

Lodge] represents the sun at its setting, and the lun- 


taken, the nine candles of 
of the sun, hence light 


54 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 

ior Warden [still another officer of the Lodge] repre- 
sents the sun at meridian [the half-way point.]" 176 

Other individuals and organizations besides the Masonic 
Lodges are also involved, in varying degrees, with sun wor- 
ship, or with an acknowledgement that the sun plays a cen- 
tral role in their understanding of the nature of the world. 

Elizabeth Clare Prophet has been described as being a 
leader in the New Age Movement, and she has written this 
in a newsletter she publishes called THE COMING REVO- 
LUTION: 

"the healing of the nations begins with the healing 
of ourselves. We must draw forth from the Great Cen- 
tral Sun — that eternal Light with which we were 

anointed from the beginning." 177 

Adolf Hitler, the head of the German government prior to 
and during World War II, and who was directly responsible 
for the murder of over 50 million people, was also a sun- 
worshipper. Very early in his life, he joined a secret organi- 
zation called the Thule Society. And forty years after the war, 
some historians are finally delving into its strange beliefs. 

Two of these writers, Michel Bertrand and Jean Angelini, 
have produced a book entitled THE OCCULT AND THE 
THIRD REICH, and one of their conclusions is: 

"In the Nazi cosmology the sun played a prime 

role ... as a sacred symbol of the Aryans, in contrast 
to the feminine and magical symbolism of the moon, 

revered by the Semitic peoples." 

The Nazi Party was the name of the National Socialist 
German Workers' Party, the party that Mr. Hitler joined. It 
became the controlling party of the German government prior 
to and during the war. 

the Fuhrer [German for leader, in this case 

meaning Mr. Hitler] saw in the Jewish people, with 

their black hair and swarthy complexion, the dark side 

of the human species, while the blond and blue-eyed 

Aryans constituted the light side of humanity. Hitler 
undertook to extirpate [meaning to eliminate] from the 


55 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 

material world its impure elements ... to lead it back 
to glory." 178 

But sun worship, as the Masons point out, is not new. 

The Bible talks about it as well. 

Ezekiel was an Old Testament prophet writing sometime 
during the period of 571 to 592 B.C. He tells about how he 

was taken by God to see a practice occurring near the Tem- 
ple. This is what he wrote in Ezekiel 8:15-16: 

"And He [the Lord God] brought me into the inner 
court of the Lord's house, and behold, at the door of 
the temple of the Lord, between the porch and the al- 
tar, were about five and twenty men, with their backs 
toward the temple of the Lord, and they worshipped 

the sun toward the east." 

And Ezekiel points out that the Lord God considered this 
practice "an abomination." 

There is another reference to sun worship in the Old Tes- 
tament, this time in Deuteronomy 17: 2-4, 7. That reference 

reads as follows: 

"If there be found among you, ... man or woman ... 

that ... hath gone and served other gods, and wor- 
shipped them, either the sun, or moon, or any of the 
host of heaven ... 

and it be true ... that such an abomination is 
wrought in Israel ... so thou shalt put the evil away 
from among you." 

So the God of the Bible has made it clear that sun wor- 

ship is something that He does not want His creatures prac- 
ticing. The Bible even went so far as to say, in both 

instances, that He considered the practice to be an "abomina- 

tion" or an "evil." 

But to show just how far this practice has invaded the 
Christian community, the following "prayer" was offered up at 
a recent funeral in a local Christian church: 

"Now you will feel no rain, for your Mother, the 
earth, will fold her arms around you. 


56 



CHAPTER 7 SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 

Now you will feel no cold, for your Father, the 
Sun, will always warm you." 

Sun worship continues. 

Because some Christian churches pray to the Sun god in 
their church services. 

And don't understand who they are praying to. 

Simply stated, the Sun god that they were praying to is 
Lucifer! 


57 
Chapter 8 

The Author's 
Clarification 


The student of esoteric language and concealed symbols 
must study the being referred to as Lucifer, Satan or the dev- 
il in the Bible. 

But before that study commences, the author has to take 
an unusual step and attempt to clarify his position on the 

subject. 

I have endeavored to write this book as an historian, 
carefully basing my conclusions on my own research into the 
writings of the people involved. I have literally read hundreds 
of works on the subject of this book, and have attempted to 
record those comments as accurately as was possible. 

Although I am a Christian, I have tried not to let my reli- 
gious views color my thinking on the subject of this book. As 

I said, I have tried to write this book not as a religious writ- 
er, but as an historian who has discovered that history has 

been a series of planned events led by a conspiracy based 


58 



CHAPTER 8 AUTHOR’S CLARIFICATION 


upon a worship of Lucifer. I believe that it is possible to 

show that this is a fact of history, not as a religious writer, 
but as an historian. And that is what I have attempted to do 
in this book. 

I have, on occasion, quoted the Bible, and will do so in 

the remaining material whenever the context seems to war- 
rant it. At the very least, for the skeptic, the Bible is a 

magnificent record of the history of a particular group of 
people during particular periods of the past. I have used the 
Bible as I have used any other book, as a book of history. 

But it has always been to make a counterpoint in a specific 

instance where the historical facts seem to indicate that the 
use of the Bible warranted it. 

In this instance, it becomes important to start with a 

reading of a particular section of the Bible, and then show 
how others, not known for their belief in the God of the 

Bible, have also chosen to believe that section as well. 

It is hoped that the reader can understand the signifi- 
cance of what I have just written. It will make the reading of 

the remaining material a little easier to understand. 


59 



Chapter 9 
Lucifer Worship 


The Bible discusses a being called Lucifer in both the Old 
and New Testaments. Other names for this creature are Sa- 

tan, and the devil. 

One of the first explanations of just who this being known 
as Lucifer is, is found in the Old Testament in a book written 
by the prophet Isaiah, who wrote around 740 B.C. He wrote 

that Lucifer was created "full of wisdom," and was "perfect." 
He was created the "anointed cherub that covereth the throne 
of God," and that he actually was "upon the holy mountain of 
God." He later "corrupted [his] wisdom by reason of [his] 
brightness." The Bible then records that God "cast [him] to 
the ground." 

Isaiah wrote this in Isaiah 14:12: 

"How art thou fallen from heaven, O Lucifer, son 

of the morning! How art thou cut down to the ground 

which didst weaken the nations!" 


60 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


Notice that the fall of Lucifer weakened the "nations of 
the world." This will be examined in other chapters of this 
study. 

"For thou hast said in thine heart, I will ascend 
into heaven. I will exalt my throne above the stars of 
God: I will sit also upon the mount of the congregation 

in the sides of the north. 

I will ascend above the heights of the clouds; I 

will be like the most High." 

Luke, a writer in the New Testament, records in Luke 
10:18, that Jesus said that he beheld "Satan [Lucifer's new 
name] as lightning fall from heaven." Peter records in II 
Peter 2:4 that God has "spared not the angels [who were in- 
volved in Lucifer's revolt against God] that sinned, but cast 
them down" as well. 

Paul, another New Testament writer, wrote this about Lu- 
cifer in II Corinthians 11:14, in about 57 A.D.: 

"And no marvel, for Satan is transformed into an 
angel of light". 

And in II Thessalonians 2:9, Paul wrote that Satan was 
capable of working "lying wonders." 

In around 90 A.D., John, the author of the book known as 
Revelation, wrote in Revelation 12:9, that Satan was a "drag- 
on." 


Lucifer shows up in the original site of human habitation 
on earth, called the Garden of Eden. The creator God placed 
Adam, the first man (and later Eve, the first woman) in this 
garden, but told them that there were certain rules that they 
had to abide by. These are spelled out in Genesis 2:16-17: 

"And the Lord God commanded the man, saying. 

Of every tree of the garden thou mayest freely eat: 

but of the tree of the knowledge of good and evil, thou 
shalt not eat of it; for in the day that thou eatest 

thereof thou shall surely die. 

Later, Lucifer spoke through a serpent to Eve, but in 

reality, to both men and women: 


61 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


"Yea, hath God said: Ye shall not eat of every 

tree of the garden? And the woman said unto the ser- 

pent: We may eat of the fruit of the trees of the gar- 
den: But of the fruit of the tree which is in the midst 
of the garden [the tree of the knowledge of good and 
evil] God hath said. Ye shall not eat of it, lest ye die. 

And the serpent said unto the woman. Ye shall 

not surely die. For God doth know that in the day ye 
eat thereof, then your eyes shall be opened, and ye 

shall be as gods, knowing good and evil." 

So, from the above information, it is possible to glean a 
little knowledge about the nature of Lucifer: 


1. He was cast down from heaven, because he 
desired to ascend directly into the seat of 
heavenly power, the throne of God. 


2. He is referred 

to 

as 

the "son of 

the morning." 

This appears 

to 

be 

a 

reference to 

Lucifer be- 

ing similar 

to 

the 

sun, which 

also arises 

every morning. 

3. His desire 

is 

to 

sit 

on the north 

side of the 


mountain of God. 

4. Lucifer can deceive the world, because he has 

been transformed into an "angel of light." 

5. Lucifer can work "lying wonders." 

Now, with those basic understandings of Lucifer in place, 
it will be possible to examine the views of others about this 
fallen entity. 

However, not all agree with a picture of Lucifer being 
evil. Albert Pike wrote: 

"... there is no rebellious demon of Evil, or Princi- 
ple of Darkness and in eternal controversy with God. 179 

In fact, Mr. Pike believes that Lucifer was not a force of 
evil, but could be a force for good. He wrote this in MORALS 
AND DOGMA: 

"For the Initiates [those initiated into the true se- 
crets of Masonry] this is not a person, but a force, 

created for good, but which may serve for evil." 180 


62 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


To further amplify that belief of Mr. Pike's, it becomes 
important to quote a letter that he wrote on luly 14, 1889 to 

the 23 Supreme Councils of the world. Judging from the con- 
tents of this letter, it appears that Mr. Pike was attempting 
to tell the leaders of the various Supreme Councils all over 
the world that they were to know that Lucifer was the secret 
god of the Masons. 

This letter clearly indicates that he believed the position 
that Lucifer was a god who had come to earth for the good of 
mankind. He wrote: 

"That which we must say to the crowd is [pre- 
sumably Mr. Pike meant that the "crowd" was all of 
the non-Masons, or the public at largel We worship a 

God, but it is the God that one adores without super- 
stition." 

It appears that one of the purposes of this letter was to 
advise all of the top ranking Masons that they were to con- 
coct a story that the Masons worshipped the "traditional" 
God, so that none could ever accuse them of worshipping a 
cherub, a non-god, by the name of Lucifer. In other words, 
they were to deny that Lucifer was their god whenever an 
outsider was smart enough to break through all of the secrets 

and figure it out. 

So the secret inside the Masonic Order is that Lucifer is 

their secret god. 

Any non-Mason today who attempts to explain to any of 
their Masonic friends or relatives that this is the secret 
inside the Lodge will be met with an instanteous denial. 

Every Mason, whether they know the secret of the Lodge or 
not, will obviously deny the accusation. 

Mr. Pike continued: 

"You may repeat it to the 32nd, 31st and 30th 

degrees — The Masonic religion should be, by all of us 

initiates of the high degrees, maintained in the purity 

of the Luciferian doctrine." 

Here Mr. Pike seems to indicate that it is the 30th, 31st 

and 32nd degrees that are to be taught the "Luciferian doc- 
trine." The direct evidence that the honorary 33rd degree is 


63 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


formally taught that Lucifer is the Great Architect of the 
Universe will be presented later. But, here Pike seems to say 
that that lesson is to be taught at an earlier degree. 

"If Lucifer were not God, would Adonay [the God 
of the Christians and the Jews] and his priests calum- 
niate [defined as spreading false and harmful state- 

ments about or to slander] him?" 

Pike makes two incredible statements about Lucifer: 

1. He is considered to be a god! and 

2. The priests, and the rabbis, have it all back- 

wards, and are all slandering his name. 

As has been illustrated, the Bible states that Lucifer is 
nothing more than a fallen cherub. He is not a god. Yet Mr. 
Pike clearly states that Lucifer is a god! 

And secondly, those who claim that he is the "wicked one" 
are "slandering" him. Those individuals have it all wrong! 

Mr. Pike continued: 

the true and pure philosophic religion is the 
belief in Lucifer, the equal of Adonay;" 

Adonay, also spelled Adonai, is the Hebrew word for God. 
To show that Pike was referring to the God of the Bible, he 
wrote this in his book entitled MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"... Adonai, the rival of Bal and Osiris." n 

As has been illustrated, Osiris is the sun-god, and the sun 
has been shown to be a symbol of Lucifer. Adonai is the "ri- 
val" of Lucifer, both in the Bible, and in the writings of 
Albert Pike. 

"but Lucifer, God of Light and God of Good, is 

struggling for humanity against Adonay, the God of 

Darkness and Evil." 182 

Here once again Mr. Pike writes that Lucifer and Adonay 
are rivals, and that the religious world has it all backwards: 


64 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


Lucifer is the "good god," and Adonay is the God of "evil and 
darkness." 

(The author would like to interrupt the narrative to make 
an observation. 

That authenticity of that letter by Albert Pike that was 
just quoted has been questioned by a variety of writers. 

It has been reported that Mr. Pike made these comments 
in a "encyclical" hand carried to the a meeting of 23 Supreme 
Councils of the world on luly 14, 1889 in Paris, France. 

This author is willing to concede that the only evidence 
for the contents of this "encyclical" consists of it being quoted 
in a book written by Frenchman named A.C. de la Rive enti- 
tled LA FEMME ET L'ENFANT DANS LA RANC-MACON- 
NERIE UNrVERSELLE. That title translated from French to 
English means THE WOMAN AND CHILD IN UNIVERSAL 
FRENCH MASONRY. A copy of that page that contains that 
quote, and the cover of the book has been supplied to this 
author by a concerned researcher who had someone locate the 
book in France for him and make copies of the pertinent 
pages. 

The author has read another book that contains the 
English translation of that "encyclical." That book is entitled 
OCCULT THEOCRASY and was written in 1933 by Edith 
Starr Miller. She cites the book by Mr. de la Rive as her 
source. 

She obviously believed that the letter was true and con- 
tained the actual thoughts of Mr. Albert Pike. 

In other words, the only source for the letter is a French- 
man who quotes it in his book and not Mr. Albert Pike him- 
self. It must be assumed that Mr. Pike, if he were alive today 
and was asked whether the letter was his, would deny that 
he ever wrote such an "encyclical," whether or not he had 
written it. But, the reader is admonished to remember that if 
he did indeed worship Lucifer, and wrote the "encyclical," he 
would certainly have to deny it. So that answer would tell 
the researcher nothing. 

It is the contention of this writer, and others who are at- 
tempting to decipher the secret symbols of the Masonic Or- 
der, that a small percentage of the Masons know that all of 
the symbols inside the Lodge refer to Lucifer. And it must be 

remembered that these Masons must of necessity do all that 
they can to deny that fact. 


65 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


And certainly anyone today who believes that the contents 
of the letter are a fraud would do all that they could to dis- 
credit anyone who said that the thoughts were the actual 
thoughts of Pike. 

However, this writer is of the opinion that Mr. Pike did 
indeed worship Lucifer, and is not basing that conclusion on 
just this one letter. Notice that Mr. Pike has written else- 
where that he considered Lucifer to be the secret god of the 
Masonic Lodge. 

So, it is not essential to this writer's position that this 
"encyclical" be proven to be valid. It is the author's contention 
that there is ample evidence from other sources, including 
from Masons other than Mr. Pike, that the secret god inside 
the Masonic lodges is Lucifer. 

That evidence is available to anyone who cares to locate 
it.) 

But there is another Mason who knows that Lucifer is the 
"good god" of a particular segment of the Masons. Pike's fel- 
low 33rd degree Mason, Manly P. Hall, also felt that this 
"god" was a "god of good." He wrote in his book entitled THE 
SECRET TEACHINGS OP ALL AGES: 

"Sun worship played an important part in nearly 
all the early pagan Mysteries. 

The Solar Diety ... was slain by wicked ruffians, 

who personified the evil principle of the universe. By 

means of certain rituals and ceremonies, symbolic of 
purification and regeneration, this wonderful GOD OP 
GOOD was brought back to life and became the sav- 

iour of His people." 1S3 (emphasis by author.) 

This "god" who came back to life is not the Jesus of the 
Bible, because Mr. Hall refers to him as "The Solar Diety." 
He is referring to the death and resurrection of Osiris, cov- 
ered in detail in the Masonic rituals. 

Manly P. Hall has further identified Lucifer as the god of 
some of his fellow Masons. He has written this in his book 
entitled THE LOST KEYS OP PREEMASONRY: 

"When the Mason learns the key to the warrior 

on the block is the proper application of the dynamo of 
the living power, he has learned the mystery of his 
Craft. 


66 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


The seething energies of Lucifer are in his hands 
and before he may step onward and upward, he must 
prove his ability to properly apply energy." 184 

Mikhail Bakunin, the Russian anarchist, also addressed 

this question of evil and good gods. He wrote: 


"The Evil One is the satanic revolt against divine 
authority, revolt in which we see the fecund [defined 

as meaning fertile] germ of all human emancipations, 

the revolution. 


Socialists recognize each 

other 

by 

the 

words 'In 

the name of the one to whom a 

great 

wrong 

has been 

done.' 





Satan [is] the eternal 

rebel, 

the 

first 

freethinker 

and the emancipator of worlds. 





He makes men ashamed 

of 

his 

bestial 

ignorance 


and obedience; he emancipates him, stamps upon his 

brow the seal of liberty and humanity, in urging him 
to disobey and eat of the fruit of knowledge." 185 

That thought that Lucifer was a "good" spirit, to whom a 

great wrong" was done, is the basic thought that holds the 
New Age together, according to Texe Marrs, the author of two 
major books on the subject. He has written: 

"Many New Agers commend Lucifer because by 

tempting Eve he enabled man to evolve toward en- 

lightened knowledge and godhood." 186 

Mr. Marrs discusses the thoughts of a leader in a mys- 
tical organization called the Stelle Group, named Eklal Kue- 
shana. He writes that this New Age leader says that: 

"Lucifer is the head of a secret Brotherhood of 

Spirits .... the Brotherhood is named after Lucifer 

because the great Angel Lucifer has been responsible 
for the abolishment of Eden in order that men could 
begin on the road to spiritual advancement." 187 

So, there is a basic disagreement about the nature of 

Lucifer, also known as Satan or the devil. The Bible depicts 


67 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


him as a force for evil, and Mr. Pike, and others, pictures 

him as a force for good. 

But the connection between Lucifer and the Ancient Mys- 
teries needs to be further amplified. 

The Mysteries had a purpose: to create a super man, one 
capable of understanding the true nature of the universe, and 
to worship the "true" god. 

W.L. Wilmshurst, a Mason, wrote these thoughts in his 

book entitled THE MEANING OF MASONRY: 

"This — the evolution of man into superman 

was always the purpose of the ancient Mysteries, and 

the real purpose of modern Masonry is, not the social 

and charitable purposes to which so much attention is 

paid, but the evolution of those who aspire to perfect 

their own nature and transform it into more god-like 

quality." 188 

He amplified this thought a little later in his book: 

"Man who has sprung from the earth [meaning 

that he was not created by a creator God] and de- 
veloped through the lower kingdoms of nature to his 

present rational state, has yet to complete his evolu- 
tion by becoming a god-like being and unifying his 

consciousness with the Omniscient ~ to promote which 

is and always has been the sole aim and purpose of 

Initiation." 189 

"No higher level of attainment is possible than 

that in which the human merges in the Divine con- 

sciousness and knows as God knows." 19(1 

So, just as Satan tempted mankind with the ability to 

know good and evil themselves just like God, without His 
assistance, now the Masons are teaching that they too could 
become a god through an initiation into the Ancient Mys- 
teries. 

John Anthony West, in his book SERPENT IN THE SKY, 
wrote this in support of Mr. Wilmshurst's statement: 

"Egypt started with the concept of divine attri- 

butes within man. The gods are not brought down to 
earth; rather man is raised to the gods." 191 


68 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


Others besides the above mentioned Masons, like Louis 

Keuerbach, have joined the discussion with similar thoughts. 

He was a nineteenth century philosopher, and a hero of the 
Communists like Karl Marx. In fact, Frederick Engels, the co- 
worker with Karl Marx during the time Marx wrote THE 
COMMUNIST MANIFESTO, wrote this about his friend: 

"All the Communists of 1845 were followers of 

Feuerbach ...." 192 

The reason that the Communists supported the ideas of 
Keuerbach is apparent when the student reads his writings. 

He wrote: 

"Man alone is our God, our father, our judge, our 

redeemer, our true home, our law and our rule, the 

Alpha and Omega of our life and of our political, mor- 
al, public and domestic activity. There is no salvation, 

save through the medium of man." 193 

John Denver, the well known popular singer, has adopted 
this same philosophy about his divinity. He has been quoted 
us saying this after his new conversion: 

"It's the single, most important experience of my 

life — I can do anything. One of these days. I'll be so 

complete I won't be human; I'll be a god." 194 

Mr. Hall, the Mason, stated a similar thought when he 

wrote this in his book entitled LECTURES ON ANCIENT 

PHILOSOPHY: 

"We may study the star intellectually, but we 

have never attained consciousness until we are the 


But this idea that man could become a god is not new. 
The Bible anticipated it, and Isaiah wrote about it back in 
741 B.C. This is what he wrote in Isaiah 43:10: 

"Thus saith the Lord .... 

understand that I am He: before me there was 

no God formed, neither shall there be after me." 


69 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


And once again, in Isaiah 45:5: 

"I am the Lord, and there is none else, there is 
no God beside me 

The Bible teaches that there is but one God, and that 
mankind has no possibility of sharing His godhead. 

One who apparently has not believed those statements in 

the Bible is Shirley MacLaine, who has become a spokesman 
for the position that man can become a god. She has written 
several books on the subject of her support of the New Age 

(Newsweek magazine described her as "the New Age evan- 
gelist.") She wrote the following statement in her book 

entitled DANCING IN THE LIGHT: 

"... we are part of God ..." 196 

and this elsewhere in the same book: 

"... if one says audibly I am God, the sound vi- 

brations literally align the energies of the body to a 
higher atunement." 197 

If each man is a god, mankind is capable of making de- 
cisions for their own welfare. Each man has complete control 

of his decision-making, according to Miss MacLaine. In fact, 
man's control has extended into areas few have ever claimed 
for mankind. These are the thoughts of Miss MacLaine: 

"I think we choose to be together .... We choose 

our parents, and I think the parents choose the chil- 
dren they want to have before they ever come into an 

incarnation." I9S 

She went on further to record another strange thought, 

when she wrote this: 

"... there was no such thing as reality, only 

perception." 199 

One can only wonder where Miss MacLaine got these bi- 
zarre thoughts from. Several clues that can assist the student 


70 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


in understanding her have been given by either her own rev- 
elations or from some articles that have appeared about her 
in the media. 

In her book entitled OUT ON A LIMB, she wrote about 
her meetings with her married lover in her apartment. She 
commented that he looked at her shelf of books on, amongst 
other subjects: "Marxist theory," including a "biography of 
[Karl] Marx." 200 

PARADE magazine of December 18, 1988 had an article on 
Miss MacLaine in which it revealed that her den had "lots of 
framed pictures: Shirley with [Communist] Fidel Castro, and 

with [Communist] Nikita Khrushchev [amongst others.]" 201 
The magazine reported how Shirley and her lover: 

"talked about Democratic-Socialist principles and 
how it was possible to have them both at the same 

time if the rich would only share their wealth more." 202 

Elsewhere in her book, she wrote about how much of a 
hypocrite she was when she added this contradictory 

statement: 

"... wanted to talk to him [her lover] about how I 

had made a lot of money and that it made me feel elite 

in a world that was broke to know I could buy just 
about anything I wished for." 203 

However, nowhere in her book did she say that she had 

freely donated any of her own wealth to the relief of the poor. 
Apparently she believes that the Communist ideas about 

wealth sharing are acceptable only as long as she does not 
have to share her wealth like she wants the other rich to do. 
Miss MacLaine has since gone on a nationwide tour pro- 

moting her new found religious views to the public. News- 
week magazine reported in 1987 that she had made a great 
deal of money explaining her new thoughts to others: 

"Since MacLaine began her tour in January [1987,] 

more than 10,000 people in 15 cities have paid the 

$300 admission fee." 204 


71 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


10,000 times $300 equals 3 million dollars. 

Obviously, Shirley's tours have proven to be both popular 
and lucrative. The Newsweek article on her seminar men- 
tioned a little of what she teaches in them. The following are 

a few of her comments: 

’"The earth is moving off its axis,' she says, and 
only the 'collective consciousness' of mankind can 

right it. 

For the spiritually inclined, 'a window of light' 

will appear on those days [August 16 and 17, 1987] 

that MacLaine says will 'allow us to rise to a higher 
plane of cosmic understanding.'" 205 

"Evangelist" MacLaine became "Doctor" MacLaine when 
she reported some of her new cures for two of the world's 

most serious medical problems: AIDS and cancer of the 

abdomen. According to the Newsweek article, she told her 

audience: 

"They [those who paid to hear her in the 15 

cities on the tour] all got to hear MacLaine's 

pronouncements on such subjects as AIDS (she 
thinks sufferers are sick because they have been 

’bereft of love necessary to sustain the balance’ of 

health); and cancer (for cancer of the abdomen, she 

advises ’putting patients in a yellow room because 

yellow is the color 'frequency' of that part of the 

body.')" 206 

And to think her "patients" only have to pay $300 for 
such wisdom! 

But "Doctor" MacLaine is not as dumb as one might 

think. The Newsweek magazine article reported: . 

"... everyone who attended had to sign waivers 

absolving the seminar's organizers from responsibility 

for psychological injury." 207 

So someone in charge of arranging her seminars is aware 
that her ideas might cause psychological damage to those 
attending, and they have moved to protect her from malprac- 

tice lawsuits. 


72 



CHAPTER 9 LUCIFER WORSHIP 


Not only was this "New Age evangelist" making money 
on her personal lecture tours, she was also making money on 
her best selling books. 

As of luly, 1987, her book entitled OUT ON A LIMB, 
had sold 3 million copies, and her other major seller, 
DANCING IN THE LIGHT had sold 2.2 million. Time 
magazine reported that her "five books on self-exploration and 
self-promotion have run to more than 8 million copies." 208 

It appears as if selling the New Age religion can be very 
profitable! 

But, in summary, perhaps the most cogent comment 

about the battle between the New Age and the Christians 

was made by Nesta Webster in her book entitled SECRET 
SOCIETIES: 

"The war now begins between the two contending 
principles: the Christian conception of man reaching 

up to God, and the secret society [Miss Webster 

wrote too early for her to know about the New Age 
Movement] conception of man as God, needing no 

revelation from on high and no guidance but the law 

of his own nature. 

And since that nature is in itself divine, all that 

springs from it is praiseworthy, and those acts 

usually regarded as sins are not to be condemned." 


The battle lines are drawn between those who believe in 
a creator God, and those who believe that man can become 
god. 


These are the two 
between them has begun. 


opposing positions. 


And the battle 


73 



Chapter 10 
Becoming a God 


What does the New Age religion offer to its believers? As 
was covered in the last chapter, it is simply the promise of 
personally becoming a god! 

But there is another bait. It is unlimited knowledge of the 
entire universe ! 

Fred Gittings wrote this in his book entitled SECRET 
SYMBOLISM IN OCCULT ART: 

"... it is claimed that, after Lucifer fell from 
Heaven, he brought with him the power of thinking as 
a gift for mankind." 10 

Manly P. Hall added these comments about this belief 
system: 

"In the secret teachings it is written that mind is 
the Savior-God." 211 


74 



CHAPTER 10 BECOMING A GOD 


"... where reason reigns supreme, inconsistency 
cannot exist. Wisdom ... lifts man to the condition of 

Godhead." 212 

"Even in man's present state of imperfection it is 

dawning upon his realization that he can never be tru- 
ly happy until he is perfect, and that of all of the fac- 
ulties contributing to his self-perfection none is equal 

in importance to the rational intellect. 

only the illumined mind can, and must, lead 

the soul into the perfect light of unity." 213 

"Philosophy is indeed a mystical ladder up which 

men climb from ignorance to reason." 214 

"... the philosopher soon becomes fabulously 
wealthy in that most priceless of all possessions: rea- 

son." 2f5 


But the Masons are not the only ones preaching the need 
for man's reason to solve all of man's problems. 

The Humanist Religion (this will be examined more care- 
fully in a later chapter) that is currently becoming America's 
major religious view of mankind, also has a plank in its 

platform about the total dependence on man's reason. Their 
fourth plank in their 1933 HUMANIST MANIFESTO reads: 

"Fourth: Reason and intelligence are the most effective 

instruments that humankind possesses." 216 

And the members of the Illuminati share the similar 
views of both the Masons and the Humanists. Professor Weis- 
haupt wrote these two statements: 

"This is the great object held out by this Associa- 
tion: and the means of attaining it is Illumination, en- 

lightening the understanding by the sun of reason." 217 

"When at last Reason becomes the religion of 
men, then will the problem be solved." 218 

Perhaps the position that reason is man's last hope for a 
perfect world can be summed up with these comments from 
members of the Masonic Lodge. 

Harold J. Bolen wrote this in the New Age Magazine, the 


official magazine of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry: 


75 



CHAPTER 10 BECOMING A GOD 


"Freemasonry believes it is more holy to live by 

reason than to live by faith, for reason is a bridge of 

understanding while faith is only a bridge of hope. 

Reason challenges our minds, while faith might 

give comfort without achievement." 219 

Mr. Hall then added this confirming statement: 

"The secret doctrine that flows through Free- 
masonic symbols has its source in three ancient and 

exalted orders, one of which is the Dionysial artificers 

[Dionysus was identified by the Romans with Bacchus, 
the "god" that Albert Pike and Albert Mackey have 
identified with the sun-god Osiris.] 

The Dionysians also first likened man to a rough 

ashlar which, trued into a finished block through the 

instrument of reason, could be fitted into the structure 

of that living and eternal Temple built without the 

sound of hammer, the voice of workmen, or any tool of 
contention." 220 


Albert Pike added additional comments to the record, the 
first of which claimed that Masonry had its own Ten Com- 
mandments. The first of those commandments was: 


" 1 . 

dom." 


221 


God is the Eternal, Omnipotent, Immutable Wis- 


Wisdom is defined as the power of judging rightly based 
upon knowledge and man gets wisdom through the use of his 
reason. In fact, Mr. Pike went so far as to deify man's mind. 
He wrote: 


"Reason is The Absolute, it is in IT we must be- 
lieve.... 222 

"Masonry propagates no creed except its own 
most simple and Sublime One; that universal religion, 

taught by Nature and by Reason." 223 

"The structure itself will be overthrown, when, in 
the vivid language of a living writer, 'Human reason 

leaps into the throne of God and waves her torch over 
the ruins of the Universe.'" 224 


76 



CHAPTER 10 BECOMING A GOD 


Masonry has deified reason, the ability of man to make 
his own decisions in all of his affairs without concern of the 

moral absolutes imparted by the God of the Bible. No one 

would be impudent enough to suggest that man not use his 
mind at all. What these New Agers, Masons, Humanists, and 

members of the Illuminati are saying is that they wish to use 
the mind exclusively. That means, for those who believe that 

there is no God, man can have "the knowledge of good and 

evil," and make up his own moral code as he goes along. For 

those who believe in a God, He is to have no say in the 

future determination of what is right or wrong. Therefore 
man should have the right to decide for himself in all moral, 
religious, political and economic decisions, whether or not 
there is a God. 

But the truth of life is that the existing God gave man 

moral laws to follow, primarily in the Old Testament. These 

are called "moral absolutes," and spell out just what is right 
and wrong. According to these individuals and organizations, 

man has the right to ignore these teachings, and to decide for 
himself what is right and wrong. 

This new "morality" is not new. It is as old as man him- 
self. The Bible teaches that man decided to eat the "fruit of 

the tree of the knowledge of good and evil," and that is what 
these organizations have done. 

Where these decisions of men's "reason" leads mankind 
will he discussed later in this material. 

But it is possible to know what the God of the Bible 

thinks about these decisions. 

Proverbs 1:7 of the Old Testament Bible teaches: 

"The fear of the Lord is the beginning of knowl- 
edge: but fools despise wisdom and instruction." 

The Bible says that there is a true wisdom, and that it 
springs from the mind of God. The Humanists, New Agers, 

Communists and the Masons say that wisdom springs solely 
from the mind of man, and that man's mind teaches that he 
can become a god himself, having the ability to decide for 
himself in all things. 

And Proverbs 3:5 directs man to: 

"Trust in the Lord with all thine heart; and lean 
not unto thine own understanding." 


77 



CHAPTER 10 BECOMING A GOD 


But some men "reason" that they are too wise for 
And mankind has had to pay for their impudence. 


that. 


78 



Chapter 1 1 
Sons of Light 


If early man first worshipped the sun and then the star 
as a symbol of that sun, it would be the next logical step to 
worship the light that comes from that sun. And this is the 
progression that is taught by history. 

Albert Mackey wrote: 

"... light always constituted a principal object of 

adoration, as the primordial source of knowledge ,.." 22 

John White, called "another New Age theologian" by Texe 

Marrs in his book entitled DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW 

AGE, wrote that man is not only to seek light but to become 

light: 

"First you go toward the light. 

Next you're in the light. 


79 



CHAPTER 11 SONS OF LIGHT 
Then you are the light." 226 

Adam Weishaupt, the founder of the Illuminati, (which 
means The Illuminated Ones) wrote this in 1778: 

"Let there be light, and there shall be light." 227 

And on August 17, 1984, the Lucis Trust sent this letter 
to an inquiring citizen who wanted an explanation of the 
origin of the name Lucis Trust. This is the explanation he 
received: 

"Lucis is the genitive case of the Latin word Lux. 
We would translate it 'of light.' 

The Trust has always been Lucis right from its 


incorporation 

in 

1923. 

The 

publishing 

company. 

how- 

ever was 

called 

at 

first 

the Lucifer 

Publishing 

Com- 

pany as authored 

by 

H. 

P. [Helena 

Petrovna] 

Blavat- 

sky earlier. 







Lucifer 

as here 

used 

means ’bringer of light or 


the morning star' and has no connection whatsoever 
with Satan as conventional wisdom would have it." 228 

But there is someone else who is making the claim to 
being the "morning star." That claim is made in the book of 
Revelation, chapter 22, verse 16 of the New Testament of the 
Bible: 

"I Jesus ... am the root and offspring of David, 

and the bright and morning star." 

So the Lucis Trust claims that Lucifer is "the morning 
star," and Jesus Christ makes the same claim. Only one can 
correctly be what they both claim to be. 

But the Lucis Trust attempted to make an important dis- 
tinction between Lucifer and Satan, one that should be made 
again at this juncture. 

Lucifer was the name of the being that was in heaven 
with the God of the Bible, until he rebelled. He was punished 
and sent to earth, where it appears that his name was 
changed to Satan. These New Agers, some of the Masons, 
and members of the Illuminati worship the being that was in 
heaven before he fell, not the being known as Satan. 


80 



CHAPTER 11 SONS OF LIGHT 


Albert Pike added this explanation of their belief in the 
being that emanates light to mankind. He wrote this in 
MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"And the Mason is familiar with these doctrines 

that the Supreme Being is a centre of Light whose 
rays or emanations pervade the Universe; for that is 

the Light for which all Masonic journeys are a search, 
and of which the sun and moon in our Lodges are 
only emblems." 229 

Notice that Mr. Pike says that this light-bringer is a god; 

in fact he capitalizes the "s" and the "b" in "Supreme Being." 
He further deifies "Light" by capitalizing the letter "1." 

And then he added these thoughts about the nature of 
this "Light:" 

"Behold, it said, the light, which emanates from 

an. immense centre of Light, that spreads everywhere 

its benevolent rays; so do the spirits of Light emanate 

from the Divine Light." 230 

"Masonry is a march and struggle toward the 

Light." 231 

To show the reader that these are not just the thoughts 

of one Mason, but are the thoughts of all of Freemasonry, it 
becomes important to quote other Masonic writers. 

Kenneth Mackenzie in his book entitled THE ROYAL 
MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA, written in 1877, said this after 
the entry: SONS OF LIGHT: 

"Masons by their tenure are necessarily Sons of 

Light, and are so accepted even by their opponents, 

who are Sons of Darkness." 232 

This is an important revelation. Those who are opposed 
to the Masons and what they stand for are told that they are 
"Sons of Darkness." If "Light" is a deity, and it must be be- 
cause Mr. Mackenzie capitalizes the word, then "Darkness" is 
also a god. At least this Mason recognizes that there are two 
gods in the universe: one of Darkness and one of Light. The 
evidence that other Masons are aware of this distinction will 
be offered later in this study. 


81 



CHAPTER 11 SONS OF LIGHT 


Another source of revelations on the subject of the Ma- 
sonic religion is a book entitled FREEMASONS REPOS- 

ITORY, which is a collection of articles written by Masons. 
The particular one used in the following reference was pub- 

lished in 1882-1883. Here the writer was moved to comment: 

'"Let there be light' is a phrase of small import as 
some have heard it when kneeling at Masonic Altars. 

Its breadth of meaning has not been understood. 

These are the true Craftsmen who are followers 

of the light in every deed; they are pledged to oppose 

whatever is of darkness, ignorance and sin; they have 

entered upon that illumined way which leadeth to 
God and to heaven, and they may rightly be called 
'Sons of Light.'" 

"Thus has light been regarded in all the philo- 
sophies and religions of the world. In this respect 

Masonry but maintains the symbolism which has 
found general acceptance." 233 

"Light is the sign of a presence and power deserv- 
ing of devout recognition. God may be said to reveal 

himself in the light. He dwelleth in light inacces- 

sible — yet he reveals himself to give knowledge to 
the minds of men, while by the illumination of his 

presence and his truth he imparts to the human 
world a condition of true spiritual life ...." 

"The creation of the earth ... was, at the first, 

'without form and void.' It was a shapeless and 

desolate mass of matter. In that condition of primeval 
chaos, there was an entire absence of light. 

Then it was the Spirit of God manifested itself as 

the great quickening principle of a new order, commu- 

nicating light and life to the hitherto desolate and 
disordered creation." 234 

To show the reader that most people do not understand 
the esoteric meaning behind the symbol of "light," Mr. 

Mackey wrote these comments in his ENCYCLOPAEDIA: 

"Freemasons are emphatically called the 'sons of 

light,' because they are, or at least are entitled to be, 
in possession of the true meaning of the symbol." 


82 



CHAPTER 11 SONS OF LIGHT 


"Light is an important word in the Masonic sys- 
tem. It conveys a far more recondite [defined as being 

beyond the grasp of the ordinary mind] meaning that 

it is believed to possess by the generality of readers. 

it contains within itself a far more abstruse 

[defined as being hard to understand] allusion to the 

very essence of Speculative Masonry." 5 

Perhaps the very reason that the Masons conceal a great 
truth in the word "light," or "Light," can be best summarized 
in this single statement of Albert Pike in his book entitled 
MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"... Light will finally overcome Darkness." 236 

So, if the student of "esoteric knowledge" wishes to under- 
stand the language, it becomes important to determine, if 

possible, who the "light-bearer" is. And the student can know 

for certain who that is, because one of the greatest "seekers 
of light" has told the world. That writer is Albert Pike, a 

Mason, and he has described who this individual is in his 
book entitled MORALS AND DOGMA. Mr. Pike identified the 
"light-bearer" on page 321 of that book: 

"Lucifer, the Light-bearer! 

Lucifer, the Son of the Morning! 

Is it he who bears the Light ...? 

Doubt it not!" 237 

Albert Pike has admitted that the Masons seek Light! He 
has now admitted that the "Light-bearer" is Lucifer! The 
Masons ask for "Light" from the "Light-bearer" Lucifer! 

But Mr. Pike is not the only Mason who has admitted 
that in easily understandable language. Another Masonic 
writer is Manly P. Hall, and he has said basically the same 
thing in his book entitled THE LOST KEYS OF FREEMA- 
SONRY. The skeptic can know that this book has been in- 
eluded in a "list of the best Masonic books available" in a 
Masonic magazine called THE ROYAL ARCH MASON. The 
list says that "it [the list] is the finest basic library available 


83 



CHAPTER 11 SONS OF LIGHT 


to Freemasons." So the student can know that this book is 
approved reading for the Masonic Order. This is that com- 
ment, as found on page 48 of his book: 

"The seething energies of Lucifer are in 
[the Master Mason's hands] and before he 
upward [through the remaining degrees?] 
prove his ability to properly apply energy." 2,8 

So the energies of Lucifer are in the hands of the Master 
Mason! The god of some of the Masons is Lucifer! There can 
be no doubt, because some of the best known Masonic writers 
have told the reader in their own words! 

Mr. Hall added this comment on page 55 of the same 

book: 

"The Master Mason is in truth a sun, a great re- 

flector of light .... 

He stands before the glowing fire light [the sun?] 

and the world. 

Through him passes Hydra, the great snake [Lu- 
cifer?], and from its [the snake, as a symbol of 

Lucifer] mouth there pours the light of God. 

His [Hydra's, the great snake's?] symbol is the 
rising sun .... 

Albert Pike confirmed that Hydra was a "serpent" on 

page 508 of his book entitled MORALS AND DOGMA. 

So that quote from Mr. Hall’s book confirms that the 
Mason is the intermediary between the sun-god and man. 

And through him passes the truth of the sun-god. 

Simply stated, once again, Lucifer is the god of some of 
the Masons! 

The Bible has made it clear that Lucifer entered the body 
of a snake when he approached Adam and Eve in the Garden 
of Eden. 

So, the Masons believe that "Light," the emanations from 
their god Lucifer, will finally overcome the truth given to 
man by God inside the Bible. 

Albert Pike put another piece of the puzzle into place 
when he wrote this on page 287 of MORALS AND DOGMA: 


his hands 
may step 
he must 


84 



CHAPTER 1 1 SONS OF LIGHT 


"You see, my brother, what is the meaning of Ma- 

sonic "Light." 

You see why the East of the Lodge, where the 

initial letter of the Name of the Deity overhangs the 

Master, is the place of Light. 

it is that Light, the true knowledge of Deity 

[the truth that Lucifer is god!] the eternal Good, for 

which Masons in all ages have sought. 

Still Masonry marches steadily onward toward 
that Light that shines in the great distance [the 

coming New World Order, still perceived as being 

many years in the future] the Light of that day when 

Evil [this "Evil" will be identified later in this study,] 

overcome and vanquished, shall fade away and disap- 
pear forever, and Life and Light be the one law of 

the universe, and its eternal harmony." 2 

So, Mr. Pike tells the careful reader that the "Light" that 

all Masons seek is the true knowledge of the real god. And 
then he tells the world that Lucifer is the real god of the 
universe. 

The final secret of the Masons is no longer a secret! 

The student of the Masons can know that the great 

secret that the Adept Masons are keeping from the Initiate 
Masons is that the concealed God of the Masonic Lodge is 
Lucifer, the "light-bearer!" 

But a study of "Light" would not be complete without 

identifying the individual that the Bible says is the source of 

the true light. The name of this individual has been recorded 

in the New Testament, and it was written down by the disci- 
ple John, in about 80 A.D. He was an eye witness to many of 
the events in the New Testament, and he was moved to write 

the following, in John 8:12: 

"Then spake Jesus again unto them, saying I am 

the light of the world: he that followeth me shall not 

walk in darkness, but shall have the light of life." 

So here we see the exact nature of the battle between the 
followers of the deceiving "light-bearer," Lucifer, meaning the 
Masons, the Illuminati and the New Age, and the true light, 

Jesus. And as has been illustrated, these organizations be- 


85 



CHAPTER 11 SONS OF LIGHT 


lieve that their god, their light, will finally overcome the true 
light, Jesus Christ. 

The battle lines are indeed drawn, and have been for 
many centuries. 

All are working to insure a victory for their side in the 

war. 


86 



Chapter 12 
East and West 


In order to understand why "Light" has become an object 
of worship by the Masons and others, one has to understand 

some simple laws of the physical universe. It is obvious that 
the sun rises in the east, and sets in the west. The Masons 
know that it is in the direction known as the east where the 

physical sun rises each day. 

Mr. Pike indicated that it is in the eastern part of their 
Lodge that their Worshipful Master, their equivalent of the 
President, sits. One Mason who explained this fact was Cap- 
tain William Morgan, a Mason of some 30 years, who exposed 
the Masonic rituals in a book entitled FREEMASONRY EX- 
POSED. According to him, the Master sits in the east for a 
reason: 

"As the sun rises in the east to open and adorn 

the day, so presides the Worshipful Master in the east 

to open and adorn his lodge ...." 241 


87 



CHAPTER 12 EAST AND WEST 


Albert Pike further discussed that point when he wrote: 

"Our Lodges are said to be due East and West, 
because the Master represents the rising Sun, and of 

course must be in the East." 2 2 

Mr. Mackey also wrote about the relationship of the place 
of the Master's location, and the east: 

"The East, being the place where the Master sits, is 
considered the most honorable part of the Lodge ..." 243 

So the sun, a symbol of Lucifer, the god of some of the 
Masons, resides in the east. The Masons know this, so they 
place their Worshipful Master in that area, and then conceal 
the reasons why they have done so from their fellow Masons. 

The significance of this fact will become clear in further 
chapters of this study. 


88 



Chapter 13 

The Pyramid of Giza 


The Masons have agreed with the Egyptians that Osiris, 
one of their gods, was a deity. For instance, Albert Mackey 
wrote rule "Osirus was the sun 244 

Sun-gods all over the world have had temples erected to 
their memory, and as a place where, they might be wor- 
shipped. Osirus was no exception. 

The Masons are aware of this penchant for temple 

building as a place for god worship. In October 1953, a 

Mason wrote the following in the NEW AGE MAGAZINE, the 
magazine published by the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry: 

"If perchance you were to visit the Great Pyramid 

of Gizeh [also spelled Giza] ... you would be pre- 
sented with a souvenir stating that Osiris com- 
manded Thalmes to build him a house in the form of 

a pyramid with certain designated passageways." 243 


89 



CHAPTER 13 THE PYRAMID OF GIZA 


Some in Egypt claim that the Great Pyramid was not 
built as a tomb for a deceased pharaoh, but as a temple for 
initiation into sun worship. There is now a growing body of 
evidence to support that claim. 

But, it is important to set the stage for that conclusion 
first by examining that evidence. 

(The author would like to make a few comments at this 
juncture. It is not my purpose to convince the reader that 
these comments about the purpose of the pyramid are correct. 
I am only attempting to convince you that these sun-worship- 
pers consider them to be true. And, because they do, they are 
making plans for our future. And those plans should concern 
each reader of this material because, as I am attempting to 
point out, the overall changes they are arranging are going to 
alter the very way all of us live our lives. And, I for one, do 
not care for the plans being made.) 

There are some who claim that the pyramid was con- 
structed about six thousand years ago, and not about three 
thousand years ago as most archaeologists believe. 

One who makes that claim is Richard W. Noone in his 
book entitled 5/5/2000. Mr. Noone's book is not about pyra- 
mids as such, but about his claims that massive changes will 
occur on the earth on that date in the year 2000 due to a 
change in the alignment of five planets near to the earth. 
This will not be the place to comment on his charges. 
However, he has done considerable research into the pyra- 
mids as part of his studies. 

He has pointed out that the word for "pyramid" in an- 
cient Egypt was "glorious light," once again connecting the 
pyramid with the sun and the sun-god Osiris. 

Manly P. Hall stated that he too believed that the pyra- 
mid was constructed for some purpose other than for the bur- 
ial of a pharaoh. He wrote: 

"The Pyramids [notice that he capitalizes the 
word] - the great Egyptian temples of initiation." 246 

He also wrote that he knew what the initiation ceremony 
was for: 


"... the illumined of anti 
tals as men; they came forth as gods." 




entered its por- 


90 



CHAPTER 13 THE PYRAMID OF GIZA 


There are many now who believe that an individual 
named Khufu built the Great Pyramid. The name, according 
to Mr. Noone, is 

"phonetically similar to the ancient Egyptian word 
for the Great Pyramid, Khuti, meaning 'Glorious 


Some writers on the pyramid have indicated that their 
research has led them to the conclusion that the pyramid has 
a concealed time table built into its passageways. Max Toth 
is one of these authors, and he has written this in his book 
entitled PYRAMID PROPHECIES: 

"The prophecies of the ancient masters are locat- 

ed into the pyramid form ...." 249 

It is the opinion of Mr. Noone that there is only one 
prophecy" that should be examined, and it is this one: 

"Beginning at the geometrical point beneath the 

pyramid arris edge [defined as two straight lines 

coming together at an angle] meets the projected 

floor line of the ascending passage, we have a 

straight line that runs up the ascending passage and 

Grand Gallery. 

This line measured 6,000 inches." 250 

(For those not familiar with these terms, the pyramid is 
entered through a passageway called the Descending Passage- 
way. This meets with a passageway, going up into the pyra- 
mid, called, obviously, the Ascending Passage, at the end of 
which are several rooms. So, here the author is describing a 
line down the Grand Gallery, through the ground under the 
pyramid, where it meets with a line coming down the outside 
of the pyramid. The line, from the point where these two 

lines meet, back up the inside line, and where it meets the 
rooms at the top of the passageway, measures 6,000 inches. 
The significance of this measurement will be explained in 
some of the following paragraphs. The important thing to no- 
tice here is that this 6000 inch line is truly hidden: it does 
not exist in reality. It is hidden under ground with no ap- 
parent existence. It is truly a hidden prediction.) 


91 



CHAPTER 13 THE PYRAMID OF GIZA 


Joseph Carr, a writer on the Nazi Party of Adolf Hitler 
and its connections with sun worship, wrote about an experi- 
ence an individual had inside the pyramid: 

"In April, 1904 an English Buddhist named Aleis- 

ter Crowley visited Cairo .... 

Rose Edith Crowley [his wife] asked her husband 

to perform a magical ritual .... [He] obeyed by saying 

the prayer of invocation to Horns [another Egyptian 

sun-god.] He later claimed that a being appeared to 

him during that hour [and] announced to [him] that 

the old age was passing away, and a New Age was 
dawning. 

Also revealed to Crowley was that the religion of 

the New Age could not take its place until the old 

religion [presumably Christianity] was smashed." 251 

So, here we see a connection between the pyramid, sun- 

worship and the New Age. 

One of the proofs that the pyramid was not constructed 
as a burial chamber is the fact that both of the two large 
rooms inside the pyramid, the so-called "King's chamber" and 
the "Queen's chamber," have vent ducts leading from inside 

the rooms to the outside of the pyramid. This had led many 

to believe that the ducts were meant to provide air for hu- 

man occupants. Some of these writers have expressed their 
opinions in the books that they have written. One of these is 
Wilfred Gregson, an architect and a 33rd degree Mason, who 
wrote this: 


"Obviously 

the 

idea 

was to 

get air 

moving into 

the pyramid. 

You 

can't exist 

very long 

breathing 

stagnant air. 

So 

my 

principle 

is that 

this 

was a 

temple of initiation." 






Manly P. 

Hall, a 

fellow Mason, 

agreed with 

Mr. 

Gregson, 

when he wrote this comment: 





"... there 

seems 

to 

be no reason why 

a 

legitimate 

tomb should 

have 

air 

vents going from 

the 

: King's 

chamber [as 

well 

as the Queen's 

chamber] 

out 

to the 


surface." 


92 



CHAPTER 13 THE PYRAMID OF GIZA 


Another writer on the pyramid, Andre Pochan, has 
written in his book THE MYSTERIES OF THE GREAT PYR- 
AMID: 

"If the two conduits [into the King's chamber] 
were originally ventilation ducts, the unavoidable 
conclusion is that the Great Pyramid's upper cham- 

ber was not the site of the royal sepulcher. 

Continuous ventilation would have inevitably re- 


suited in 

not 

only 

the putrefaction 

of 

the 

mummy. 

but also 

the 

rapid 

destruction of 

all 

the 

funerary 

furniture 

indispenable 

to the deceased 

for 

his 

life to 

the beyond. 

n 2M 







Mr. Noone connected the great pyramid in Egypt with 
the symbolism of the pyramid in Mexico, called the Pyramid 
at Chichen-Itza: 


"the 

temple at the 

East of 

the 

quadrangle has 

a 

great 

many repeats of 

a huge 

sun 

burst, from 

the 

middle 

of the sun burst 

is the 

huge 

head of a 

ser- 

pent whose mouth is open. 
This needs little explanation. 





The 

sun representing 

'God' 

and 

the serpent 

’His 

Divine 

Wisdom,' holds 

man's head 

so that he 

can 

neither 

see the serpent 'Divine Wisdom,' nor 

the 


Light of God from which it comes." 253 


Mr. Noone is saying that the serpent is attempting to 
keep man from understanding that the god was Lucifer, in 


the 

form 

of 

a 

sun 

burst. 

But 

there is another 

mystery 

concealed inside 

the Great 

Pyramid that 

must 


be 

explored. 

The 

pyramid appears 

to have 

been 

built to 

memorialize 

the 

explosion of 

a great 

star 

4,000 years ago. 

Mr. 


Noone 



says: 

"If the Ascending 

Passage 

and 

Grand 

Gallery 

were 

built to observe this 

supernova explosion, the 

Giza 

complex was 

built to 

memorialize a 

tremendous 

cataclysm in the 

earth's planetary 

system 

which af- 

fected the globe with fire and flood." 




93 
CHAPTER 13 THE PYRAMID OF GIZA 


"The Grand Gallery, aimed like a giant telescope 

at a particular celestial body in the earth's southern 

sky — before its view of the heavens was blocked by 

the completion of the building — points to where ra- 
dio astronomy has just pinpointed the supernova (or 

giant stellar explosion) nearest to our solar system ... 

The Great Pyramid's Grand Gallery is focused at 

this particular spot in the earth's southern sky." 23 

Then Mr. Noone discussed the research being done to 
locate the spot in the universe where the Grand Gallery is 
pointed. He wrote: 

"In the late 1960's Dr. Anthony Hewish, 1974 co- 
recipient of the Nobel Prize in physics, was working 

at England's Mulard Radio Astronomy Observatory. 
Hewish began to track a mysterious rhythmic series 

of pulses, clearly from a point in the earth's southern 


Mr. Noone pointed out that Dr. Hewish : 


"... demonstrated that the strange rhythmic pulses 

were radio emissions from a star that had collapsed 

or blown itself up in the earth's southern sky some 
time around 4000 B.C., a date memorialized in the 

mysteries of Freemasonry as Anno Lucis, the Year of 

Light." 259 


In another part of the world George Michanowsky, author 
of the book entitled THE ONCE AND FUTURE STAR, was 
deciphering an incredible message cut, carved, and indented 
in an ancient cuneiform (meaning a language of wedge- 
shaped characters used in ancient inscriptions) clay tablet, 
located in the British Museum. 


"The ancient Sumerian cuneiform table Micha- 
nowsky was deciphering described a giant star ex- 
ploding within a triangle formed by the three stars 

Zeta Puppis, Gamma Velorum, and Lambda Velorum. 
These three stars are located in the earth's southern 

sky and unknown to Michanowsky at the time were 

being tracked by Anthony Hewish. 


94 



CHAPTER 13 THE PYRAMID OF GIZA 


Michanowsky 

continued 

deciphering 

the 

Sumerian 

star catalogue. 

containing 

observations 

going 

back 

thousands of 

years. The 

remarkably 

accurate 

star 

catalogue now 

stated that 

the blazing 

star 

that 

had 

exploded within 

the triangle 

would again 

be 

seen 

by 

man in 6,000 years." 

260 





So two world 

renowned scientists had independently 

dis- 

covered the results of a large 

explosion that 

they 

both 

felt 

had occurred 

around 

6000 

years 


ago. 


Mr. Noone then asked the question: 

"Is there a Masonic connection between Vela X, a 
star which exploded within a triangle, and the an- 
cient religious symbolism and star dates of Free- 
masonry?" Sl 

And the Masons have answered it with a positive yes. 
Albert Mackey, the Mason, in his ENCYCLOPAEDIA, wrote 
this: 


"In the Year of Light; abbreviated A.L. 
The date used in ancient Craft Masonry, found by 
adding 4000 to the Vulgar [meaning the common] 

Era; thus, 1911 + 4000 = 5,911." 262 

This current book was being written in 1989, A.D., which 
stands for Anno Domini, the "year of the Lord," meaning 
since the birth of Jesus. But according to the Masons, the 

true calendar date should be written 5989 A.L. 

Another writer on the Great Pyramid is Tom Valentine, 

and his book is entitled THE GREAT PYRAMID: MAN'S 
MONUMENT TO MAN. Mr. Valentine wrote: 

"... the Great Pyramid's system of passages and 

chambers is a chronological graph that begins in 
4000 B.C. and continues for six thousand years." 263 

So, according to the Masons, there are only 1 1 years to 
the year 6000. But what happens after the 6,000 years? What 
is next? 


95 



CHAPTER 13 THE PYRAMID OF GIZA 


The New Agers have told us. Marilyn Ferguson, a New 
Age believer, has written a book entitled THE AQUARIAN 
CONSPIRACY, in which she wrote the following: 

"... we are entering a millennium of love and 


A millennium is defined as a thousand year period. So, it 
appears that sometime in the near future, the New Agers are 
going to see the beginning of the millennium reign of Lord 
Maitreya. 

This position was confirmed by the Lucis Trust, also a 
New Age organization, when it wrote the following in a quar- 
terly newsletter for the third quarter, 1982: 

"The year 2000 looms before humanity as a gi- 
gantic milestone which marks both an ending and a 

beginning. It marks the end of a volatile millennium 

which has seen enormous progress and change .... 

But more importantly, the year 2000 stands as a 

symbolic portal through which humanity can pass in- 
to a New Age ... if it so chooses." 265 

So something is coming. 

And it is coming by the year 2000. 

And it is called The New Age. 

Or The New World Order. 


96 



Chapter 14 
Obelisks 


The Masons have admitted that they use symbols to con- 
ceal important truths from their fellow Masons. Previous 
chapters have examined two of the major Masonic symbols, 
the star and the sun. Other Masonic symbols need to be ex- 
amined as well. 

One of these symbols is the obelisk. The word is defined 
by a dictionary as a tall, four-sided stone pillar tapering 
toward its pyramidal top. 

There are three of major importance in the world today: 
one in Washington D.C., called the Washington Monument; 
another one in Central Park, in New York City; and the third 
in the Vatican, located in Rome, Italy. 

The first major obelisk is in St. Peter's square in Rome, 
Italy, and is placed in such a way that every Pope who ad- 
dresses any crowd in the square, must face the obelisk. 

The second major obelisk was brought to New York from 
its location in Alexandria, Egypt, and placed in Central Park 
in New York City in 1881. The four sides of this obelisk are 


97 



CHAPTER 14 OBELISKS 


covered with Egyptian hieroglyphs and these drawings have 

been translated by a variety of Egyptologists including some 
Masonic writers. 

The Masons have told the readers of one of its publica- 
tions that this obelisk was quarried: 

"... to praise and adore the divinity of the sun, 

worshipped by the ancient Egyptians as the source of 
light and life. It is a representation of the God Ra, or 
the sun." 266 

So, there is a symbol of the sun in Central Park, in the 
heart of New York City. 

The third major obelisk is the Washington monument, 

which was constructed to honor George Washington, the first 
President of the United States. President Washington was an 
active and public member of the Masonic Lodge. The monu- 
ment built in his honor: 

"is the tallest such monument in the world, 555 

feet high, though not truly an obelisk, because it is not 
quarried from a single piece but put together from 

36,000 separate blocks of granite faced with marble." 267 

This obelisk is a symbol that has definite Masonic connec- 
tions. It was constructed many years after the President's 

death on December 14, 1799, as it was not until 1833 that 
the Washington National Monument Society was organized to 
erect a monument in his memory. 

The monument was not completed until 1848, when the 
3300 pound capstone was set in place. The weight of the cap- 
stone appears to be semi-symbolic, utilizing the number 33 as 
a reminder of the 33 degrees inside the Masonic Order. 

The obelisk was constructed of a total of 36,000 separate 
blocks and included 188 Memorial Stones inside the monu- 
ment, donated to the Society by individuals, societies, cities, 
states and nations of the world. Approximately 35 of these 
came from Masonic lodges, and the last of these blocks was 
placed into the monument at the 330 foot level. Once again, 
the number 33 shows up in the construction of the obelisk, 
and once again it is semi-concealed in a fact about its con- 

struction. 


98 



CHAPTER 14 OBELISKS 


The total cost of the monument concealed another Ma- 
sonic number, this time the number 13: the cost of the entire 

monument was $1,300,000. 

There are other Masonic secrets concealed in the numbers 

relating to the eight windows in the monument, two on each 

side. Six of these windows are of the same size, but the 
seventh and the eighth, the two facing the east, are larger. It 
will be remembered that The Masons have stated that it is in 
the east that their Master sits. So the east has special sig- 

nificance to them. 

The eight windows total 39 square feet in size, and 39 is 
three times the Masonic number 13. But the two windows 
facing the east conceal another reference to the number 13. 
The student of geometry will remember that the sum of the 

squares of the base and perpendicular in a right-angled tri- 
angle is equal to the square of the hypotenuse, meaning the 

third side. The example often cited to prove that truth is the 

triangle with the three sides being 3 inches, 4 inches, and 5 
inches in length. The square of the two sides, the sides that 
are 3 inches and 4 inches in length, are 9 and 16, and the 
total of those two squares is equal to the square of the 5 inch 
side, or 25. 

Each of the two windows in the east are 2 feet by 3 feet, 
and the square of the third side is 13. The square of 2 is 
four, and the square of 3 is 9. The total of 4 and 9 is 13. 

The number 13 appears to be a very symbolic number to 
the Masons, but finding out why it is has become a difficult 
chore. One clue is contained in the Bible in the book of Gene- 
sis. That book records in Genesis 14:4 that it was in the thir- 
teenth year that an amalgamation of various kings rebelled 
against their leader. It will be recalled that Lucifer rebelled 

against God in the heavens, and some historians equate the 
number 1 3 with rebellion and Lucifer. 

Stan Deyo is one author who explained that the number 
13 had a very definite meaning. He wrote this in his book en- 
titled THE COSMIC CONSPIRACY: 

"... thirteen is the value [assigned] to represent 

Satan, [the] serpent, [the] dragon, [the] tempter or 
rebellion." 268 

So the Washington Monument, dedicated to the memory 

of a Mason, conceals many Masonic symbols inside its obelisk 


99 



CHAPTER 14 OBELISKS 


form. But there is an extremely important meaning that has 

not been explained by modern historians. 

As has been illustrated, the Masons have placed a par- 

ticular importance on the obelisk, primarily because it has its 
root in the ancient times in Egypt. However, there is another 

reason, one that is far more important. 

The first connection is to the past. Carl Claudy, the Ma- 

sonic writer, wrote this: 

"... the initiate of old saw in the obelisk the very 
spirit of the god he worshipped." 269 

So, according to this Masonic writer, the obelisk is a sym- 

bol of a god that was worshipped by the believers of the an- 
cient mysteries. It has been shown that those involved in the 
ancient mysteries worshipped Lucifer. 

But a far more important reason was revealed to those 

careful enough to note the importance of the revelation. Mr. 

Claudy then added this comment: 

"From the dawn of religion the pillar, monolith or 
built up, has played an important part in the worship 

of the Unseen. 

in Egypt the obelisk stood for the very pres- 

ence of the Sun God himself." 2711 

He repeated these very words in another section of the 
same book: 

"... in Egypt the obelisk stood for the very pres- 

ence of the Sun God himself." 271 

He went on to repeat his statement that: 

"... the initiate of old saw in the obelisk the very 

spirit of the God he worshiped." 272 

Mr. Claudy revealed that the obelisk is a symbol of the 
sun-god, and implied that this very deity is present inside the 

stone itself. 

The obelisk stands for the very presence of the sun-god! 

And the sun-god is Lucifer! 


100 



CHAPTER 14 OBELISKS 


Mr. Pike confirmed this statement in his book entitled 
MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"The obelisk was ... consecrated to the Sun." 273 

And Kenneth Mackenzie, a third Masonic writer, added 

this supporting statement: 

"Sun-worship was plainly connected with the erec- 

tion of obelisks .... 

they were placed in front of the temples of 

Egypt. [They referred] to the worship of the sun." 274 

And Mr. Mackey, a fourth Masonic writer, offered this 
comment: 

"Obelisks were, it is supposed, originally erected 

in honor of the sun god." 273 

So, obelisks are a symbol of the "very presence of the sun- 
god himself." This is an explanation that is not offered to the 
overwhelming majority of the American people. Yet, one of 
the major monuments in Washington D.C. is an obelisk. And 
it was erected to honor George Washington, a very visible 
member of the Masonic Order. And the Masons have con- 

cealed various esoteric numbers inside the blocks of the mon- 
ument itself. 

One of the strange incidents that involved the Washington 
monument occurred first in 1981, and then again in 1985, 
when the inauguration ceremony of President Ronald Reagan 

was moved to the west front of the Capitol from the tra- 

ditional location, the east front. Every President since George 
Washington had been sworn in on the east front of the Capi- 
tol building, but, for some unexplained reason, someone 

wanted President Reagan sworn in on the west front. 

Newsweek magazine for January 26, 1981, the issue cov- 
ering the inauguration ceremonies, wrote about this change in 
the location of the ceremony: 

"Swearing in a President on the Capitol's West 

Front - for the first time ever - ...." 


101 



CHAPTER 14 OBELISKS 


The article went on to point out that the reason the move 

was made was not an aesthetic one: 

"But the seldom-used West Front is crumbling, its 
rickety porticos held up by wooden posts. 'It's not 

about to fall down,' assured Capitol architect George 

White, 'but it is in need of structural repair.' 

Rather than pop for a major repair job, however, 
the Inaugural committee ordered a hasty coat of white 

paint - and draped a gigantic American flag over the 

unsightly wooden beams." 

But the Newsweek magazine article did not explain why 
the location was moved to that particular side of the Capitol. 

But a possible explanation was offered, rather subtly, in a 
Time magazine picture that accompanied their coverage of the 
inauguration ceremonies. The picture was a behind the back, 

over the shoulder, elevated shot showing the President giving 
his inauguration address. The picture is approximately 7" by 
8" in size, and both the President, at the bottom of the pic- 
ture, and the Washington monument off in the distance, at 
the top of the picture, appear to be about one inch in height. 

But the interesting caption at the bottom of the picture is 
where it appears the hidden message is contained. The cap- 
tion reads: 

"Before some 150,000 listeners at the West Front 
of the Capitol, Reagan gazes toward the Washington 

Monument and delivers his address." 276 

The President gazes at a symbol of the "very presence of 

the sun-god himself and gives his inauguration address. 

It is unknown if this shift in the location site was for the 
express purpose of giving a signal to those able to understand 
the significance of the President "gazing" at the very presence 

of the sun-god. But it was the first time that any President 

had been sworn in on that side of the Capitol, and it put him 
in a position where, if someone had wished to send a signal 

involving the Washington monument and its esoteric symbol- 

ogy, they could have done so. 

The same scene was repeated in President Reagan's sec- 

ond inauguration in 1985. Time magazine wrote this in their 
coverage of that event in their January 21, 1985 issue: 


102 



CHAPTER 14 OBELISKS 


"A public ceremony will follow on Monday at the 
West Front of the Capitol 277 

A possible explanation of the significance of these two in- 
auguration ceremonies will be offered in one of the last cha- 
pters of this book. 

But, for the esoteric minded, it appeared that someone 
might have wanted some of the American people to know 
something about President Ronald Reagan. 

The move to the west front of the Capitol Building might 
have had a concealed meaning. 


103 



Chapter 15 
The Illuminati 


The thought that there have been people actually plan- 
ning the major events of the future in a harmful way has 
often been expressed by some of the world's leaders. One such 
individual was Winston Churchill, the Prime. Minister of 

England during World War II. He wrote about what he had 
discovered when he made his views public in a London news- 
paper in 1920. These are those thoughts: 

"From the days of Spartacus-Weishaupt to those of 

Karl Marx, to those of Trotsky, Bela Kun, Rosa Luxe- 
mbourg, and Emma Goldman, this world wide conspir- 
acy for the overthrow of civilization and for the 

reconstitution of society on the basis of arrested de- 
velopment, of envious malevolence [defined as being 

done with malice; spiteful] and impossible equality, 
has been steadily growing. 

It played a definitely recognizable role in the 

tragedy of the French Revolution. It has been the 

mainspring of every subversive movement during the 


104 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


nineteenth century, and now at last this band of 

extraordinary personalities from the underworld of the 

great cities of Europe and America have gripped the 

Russian people by the hair of their heads, and have 

become practically the undisputed masters of that 
enormous empire." 11 ' 

Spartacus was the code name that Adam Weishaupt, the 
founder of the Illuminati, used inside that organization; Karl 
Marx was, of course, the so-called "father of communism;" 
Trotsky was Leon Trotsky, one of the major leaders in the 
Communist Revolution in Russia in 1917; and Bela Kun, 

Rosa Luxembourg and Emma Goldman were revolutionaries. 
The French Revolution was in 1789, and many historians 
have concluded that the Illuminati fomented it with the goal 
of putting their fellow member of the Illuminati, the Due d' 
Orleans, on the throne of France. 

Mr. Churchill linked Weishaupt and the Illuminati of 

1776 with the Communist Karl Marx of 1848, and Marx with 

the Russian Communists of 1917. It was his opinion that 
those individuals had been linked together in a conspiracy 
lasting for more than 140 years. He then combined this con- 

spiracy with European and American revolutionaries. And his 
final comment was that their combined purpose was to "over- 
throw civilization." In other words, Mr. Churchill claimed that 
their purpose was to bring the world a "New World Order." 

He had provided the reader with a brief overview of a 
long lasting conspiracy. He had told the world that this con- 
spiracy wanted to overthrow civilization. 

But, because few knew anything at all about this con- 
spiracy, the world paid no attention to Mr. Churchill's com- 
ments. 

That was no accident because this conspiracy has, in the 
main, acted under the cover of concealment. They do not an- 
nounce their plans before they occur. And they certainly do 
not announce their involvement after the planned event has 
occurred. 

Professor Adam Weishaupt boastfully stated that 
ganization would remain concealed from the eyes of 
lie. He 

"The great strength of our Order lies 
concealment; let it never appear in any place in its 


his or- 
the pub- 
wrote; 
in its 


105 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


own name, but always covered by another name, and 

another occupation." 

He even told the world, in his writings, where he would 
conceal the Order: 

"None is fitter than the three lower degrees of Free 
Masonry; the public is accustomed to it, expects little 

from it, and therefore takes little notice of it." 279 

He felt that this secrecy would lead him to success be- 
cause he felt no one would be able to break into it. He wrote: 


"Our secret 
ing can withstand .. 

Association 

„ 280 

works in a 

way that 

noth- 

Another reason that he 

felt that the 

Illuminati 

would 


succeed was the fact that he was offering his members world- 
wide power. He felt that this inducement would enable him 
to draw into his organization only those who would do any- 
thing to satisfy that desire for power. He wrote: 

"The true purpose of the Order was to rule the 
world. To achieve this it was necessary for the Order 
to destroy all religions, overthrow all governments and 

abolish private property." 281 

The Bavarian government discovered the existence of this 
secret conspiracy and investigated the Order in 1786. They is- 
sued a report in which they concluded: 

"... the express aim of this Order was to abolish 

Christianity, and overthrow all civil government." 282 

As mentioned previously, Weishaupt founded the Illumi- 
nati on May 1, 1776, and the selection of that date as the 
founding date of their Order appears to be no coincidence, 
Albert Pike wrote that May 1st was a festival day: 

"The festival was in honor of the Sun." 283 

The reason that Weishaupt chose the First of May to 
found his secret, anti-Christian religion has not been satis- 


106 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


factorily explained. However, there are some interesting clues 
as to why he might have chosen that date. 

One possible explanation involves the Roman emperor 
Diocletian, who reigned from 284-305 A.D. 

After the death of Jesus, the Christian world continued to 
be persecuted by a string of violent Caesers of the Roman 
Empire. But the violence inaugurated by Diocletian surpassed 
them all in violence. 

An edict requiring uniformity of worship was issued in 

303 A.D., and the Christians resisted by refusing to pay 
homage to the image of the emperor. Diocletian met that re- 
sistance with specific retaliation against the Christians: they 

lost their public and private possessions, and their assemblies 
were prohibited. Their churches were torn down, and their 

sacred writings were destroyed. 

In addition, many Christians paid for their resistance 

with their lives: it has been estimated that the victims num- 

bered into the hundreds of thousands. 

Finally, Diocletian grew ill, and abdicated on May 1, 305 
A.D. The persecution persisted, but never again approached 
that of the emperor Diocletian. 

Is it possible that Professor Weishaupt learned about the 
date of this abdication and picked up the mantle laid down 

by Diocletian, and started the persecution of Christians again, 
some 1400 years later? 

The goal of the Illuminati was "man made perfect as a 
god - without God." 284 But it was a strange ideal, because 
Weishaupt permitted his followers to utilize any activity to 
achieve his goal, including lying. He wrote: 

"One must speak sometimes one way and some- 
times another ... so that, with respect to our true line 

of thinking, we may be impenetrable." 283 

The members did tell the truth when they took the initi- 
ation ceremony, however. They took an oath which read, in 
part: 


"I bind myself to perpetual silence and unshaken 

loyalty and submission to the Order ...." 286 

Weishaupt claimed that he was shocked when his Order 
turned into a religion, but that is what he said: 


107 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


"I never thought that I should become the founder 

of a new religion. " 287 

But his religion had a different base than the traditional 
religion: his was based upon a worship of reason: 

"... then will Reason rule with unperceived sway." 

"... Reason will be the only code of Man. This is one 
of our greatest secrets." 

"When at last Reason becomes the religion of man, 
then will the problem be solved." 289 

Weishaupt's dedication of his organization to "reason" 

makes some sense when the reader recalls that "reason" has 

been defined as the "unbridled use of man's mind to solve 
man's problems without the involvement of God." The Bible 
calls this "the fruit of the tree of the knowledge of good and 

evil." 

It was this knowledge that God wanted man not to have, 

and it was the promise made to man by Lucifer that man 

could have it by eating of "the fruit." 

In addition, Weishaupt's religion offered its believers a 
reward not offered by any other religion: worldwide power! 

Weishaupt wrote: 

"The pupils [members of the Illuminati] are con- 
vinced that the Order will rule the world. Every mem- 

ber therefore becomes a ruler." 290 

Weishaupt's religion not only offered power to his believ- 
ers, but he offered them something else not guaranteed by 
any other religion: worldly success. He said that once a can- 

didate had achieved the exalted degree of Illuminatus Minor, 
the fourth of the thirteen inside his Order, his superiors 

would: 

"assist him [the member] in bringing his talents 

into action, and [would] place him in situations most 
favorable for their exertion, so that he may be assured 

of success." 291 


108 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


One of those areas where the Illuminati would strive to 
place their members was inside government. Weishaupt 
wrote: 

"We must do our utmost to procure the advance- 
ment of Illuminati into all important civil offices." 292 

Weishaupt's religion also had a rather unusual view of 
man's nature. Traditional religion teaches all of mankind that 
man is basically a sinner, and that his way out is to change 

his bad habits. Weishaupt felt that this position was in error. 
He wrote: 

"Man is not bad except as he is made so by arbi- 

trary morality. He is bad because Religion, the State, 
and bad examples pervert him." 293 

"Men ... suffered themselves to be oppressed — gave 

themselves up to civil societies, and formed states. To 
get out of this state ... there is no other mean than the 

use of Reason .... 

This can be done in no other way but by secret as- 
sociations, which will by degrees, and in silence, pos- 
sess themselves of the government of the States, and 

make use of those means for this purpose which the 
wicked use for attaining their base ends." 294 

Professor Weishaupt's religion authorized its members to 
use any means that would benefit the goal of the Illuminati. 
That goal was simple: the destruction of all Christianity: 

"Behold our secret .... If in order to destroy all 

Christianity, all religion, we have pretended to have 

the sole true religion, remember that the end justifies 

the means, and that the wise ought to take all the 

means to do good which the wicked take to do evil." 295 

Weishaupt spoke about the Jesuits, an order of priests in- 
side the Catholic Church. He was, it will be remembered, an 
instructor at a Catholic university in Ingolstadt, Bavaria, run 
by the Jesuits. He apparently admired their success, because 
he organized his order in a similar manner. He wrote: 


109 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


"What these men have done for altars and empires, 

why should I not do against altars and empires? By 

the attraction of mysteries, of legends, of adepts, why 

should I not destroy in the dark what they erect in the 

light of day." 296 

Some writers in the past have summarized the beliefs of 
the Illuminati for the future use of historians. One was Nesta 
Webster, who wrote the following about their aims in he 
book entitled WORLD REVOLUTION: 


1. Abolition of Monarchy 

ment. 

2. Abolition of private property. 

3. Abolition of inheritance. 

4. Abolition of patriotism. 

and 

all 

ordered 

Govern- 

5. Abolition of the family 

(i.e. 

of 

marriage 

and all 

morality, and the institution 

education of children). 

6. Abolition of all religion. 297 

of 

the 

communal 

Weishaupt must have felt 

that 

his plan would 

ultimately 

succeed. He certainly felt that 

his 

Order 

would ( 

:ontrol the 


world. And he anticipated that there would be opposition to 
his goals. He summarized all of these thoughts in this state- 
ment: 

"By this plan, we shall direct all mankind. In this 

manner, and by the simplest means, we shall set all in 
motion and in flames. The occupations must be so al- 
lotted and contrived, that we may, in secret, influence 

all political transactions." 298 

Weishaupt decided that his Illuminati needed a cover, and 
he successfully infiltrated the Masonic Order in 1782, at the 
Masonic Congress at Wilhelmsbad. Some Masons became 

aware of that infiltration and were moved to comment about 
it. One such Mason was President George Washington who 
was sent a copy of Professor John Robison's book entitled 
PROOPS OP A CONSPIRACY by a Christian minister named 
G. W. Snyder. The President responded to the minister's 

request that he read the book, and his letter to the minister 


110 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


has been preserved for posterity. Mr. Washington wrote the 
minister: 

"It was not my intention to doubt that the doctrines 
of the Illuminati, and principles of Jacobinism, had not 

spread in the United States. 

On the contrary, no one is more fully satisfied of 
this fact than I am. The idea that I meant to convey 
was that I did not believe that the Lodges of Free- 
masons in this country had, as societies, endeavored to 
propagate the diabolical [defined as being of the devil] 
tenets of [the Illuminati.] 

That individuals of them may have done it, or that 

the founder ... may have had these objects ~ and actu- 
ally, in my view, had a separation of the people from 
their government, is too evident to be questioned. 

I believe ... that none of the Lodges in this country 
are contaminated with the principles ascribed to the 

society of the Illuminati." 299 

The President indicated that he was aware that the Illu- 

minati had arrived in America; that its tenets were diabolical, 
meaning that he recognized that they involved themselves in 

devil worship; and that they intended to separate man from 

his government. 

The President of the United States had acknowledged the 

presence of the devil-worshipping Illuminati in America! 

The book that the President read was written by a mem- 
ber of the Lodge who had been asked to join the Illuminati. 
He was a professor of Natural Philosophy at Edinburgh Uni- 
versity in Scotland. After his study, he concluded that the 
purposes of the Illuminati were completely unacceptable, and 

he wrote his book to expose its goals. He wrote: 

"... an Association has been formed for the express 
purpose of rooting out all the religious establishments, 
and overturning all the existing governments of Eu- 

rope." 300 

He discovered that the leaders would: 


111 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


"... rule the world with uncontrollable power, while 

all the rest, ... will be ... employed as mere tools of the 
ambition of their unknown superiors." 301 

James Watt, the inventor of the steam engine, was a con- 
temporary of Professor Robison, and he wrote this about his 
friend: 

"a man of the clearest head and the most science of 
anybody I have ever known." 302 

But, even with all of these criticisms about the purposes 

of the Illuminati, there were some Masons who felt that the 
association between the Masons and the Illuminati was a pos- 
itive federation. One such Mason, Kenneth Mackenzie, has 

written that this Masonic infiltration was: 

"... an attempt to purify Masonry, then in much 

confusion." 303 

Another Mason who approved of the merger was Dr. Wal- 
ter M. Fleming, one of the four founders of the Shrine, an 

organization that is part of the Masonic fraternity. He and 
three other Masons formed this organization in 1871, and he 
assisted in the preparation of a history of the Shrine in 1893. 
In that book. Dr. Fleming wrote: 

"Among the modern promoters of the principles of 

the Order [the Shrine] in Europe, one of the most not- 
ed was Herr Adam Weishaupt ... professor of law in 

the University of Ingolstadt, in Bavaria ... who revived 

the Order in that city on May 1, 1776. Its members ex- 
ercised a profound influence before and during the 

French Revolution, when they were known as the Illu- 


Dr. Fleming, a 33rd degree Mason, was recognizing the 
found-of the Illuminati as a "reviver of the Order." His quote 
comes from a book entitled PARADE TO GLORY, written by 
Fred Van Deventer, which appears to be given to each new 
member of the Shrine. 


112 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


So Dr. Fleming was supportive of the efforts of Professor 
Adam Weishaupt, because he had "revived the Order." 

Albert Mackey also praised Professor Weishaupt. He wrote 
these comments in his ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMA- 
SONRY: 

"... Weishaupt could not have been the monster that 
he has been painted by his adversaries." 

And the reason he couldn't have been a "monster," was 
because he was: 

"...a Masonic reformer." 305 

However, the major support that Weishaupt has received 
has come from members of the Masonic Order who have at- 
tacked those who have been critical of the Professor and the 
Illuminati he was the founder of. 

Albert Mackey, for instance, admitted that John Robison 
was a fellow Mason, but he wrote these comments about his 
belief that a conspiracy had infiltrated the Illuminati: 

"many of his statements are untrue and 
ments illogical." 306 

"his theory is based on false premises 
reasoning fallacious and illogical ...." 307 

Kenneth Mackenzie in his book entitled THE ROYAL MA- 
SONIC ENCYCLOPAEDIA also criticized Professor Robison 
MM being: 

"The author of a silly and self-contradictory book 

about Freemasonry .... 

the nauseating nonsense with which Robison 

decks his book is only to be compared to the more 

virulent and subtle sarcasm of Barruel." 308 

The individual called "Barruel" by Mr. Mackenzie was in 
fact the Abbe Barruel who had written a four volume series 
on the Illuminati in 1798, independently from the book 
written by Professor Robison. The Abbe's research basically 
supported the conclusions of Professor Robison. 


his argu- 
and his 


113 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


Obviously, some of the Masons feel that the Abbe, like 
Professor Robison, was grossly in error. 

This is what the Abbe wrote about the Illuminati: 

"... a terrible and horrible sect. 

"... it has formed for that general Revolution which is 
to overthrow all thrones, all altars, annihilate all prop- 
erty, [destroy the right to private property] efface [obli- 
terate] all law, and end by dissolving all society." 309 

Another who attacked the Abbe's volumes on the Illu- 
minati was Thomas Jefferson, one of America's founding fa- 

thers. Although it appears that he had read only one of the 
four volumes in the set, Mr. Jefferson commented: 

"Barruel's own parts of the book are perfectly the 

ravings of a Bedlamite." 310 

A Bedlamite was a patient of the Bedlam hospital for 
lunatics in London, England. So it can be seen that Mr. 

Jefferson did not care for the Abbe's research. While he 

charged the Abbe with being a lunatic, Mr. Jefferson praised 

Adam Weishaupt with these words: 

"Weishaupt seems to be an enthusiastic philan- 
thropist. Weishaupt believes that to promote the per- 

fection of the human character was the object of Jesus 
Christ. His [Weishaupt’s] precepts are the love of God 

and love of our neighbor." 311 

Albert Mackey, one of the greatest Masonic scholars and 

researchers, praised the Illuminati with these words found in 
his ENCYCLOPAEDIA: 

"The original design of Illuminism was undoubtedly 

the elevation of the human race." 312 

Mackey also praised the founder as well: 

"He is celebrated in the history of Masonry as the 

founder of the Order of the Illuminati of Bavaria ...." 313 


114 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


Other Masonic writers have praised the founder and his 
conspiratorial society known as the Illuminati as well. Ken- 
neth Mackenzie wrote this: 

"Its object was the advancement of morality, educa- 
tion, and virtue 

"had the Order been allowed free scope, much good 
would have resulted 314 

But, whether the critics or the supporters were correct, 
the Illuminati had come to America. Several researchers into 
the conspiracy of the Illuminati have provided the student 
with their evidence that these conspirators had brought their 
plans to the United States. 

Nesta Webster, who wrote in the 1920's, wrote this about 

her discoveries of where the Illuminati went after their dis- 
covery by the Bavarian government: 

"Whilst these events [the early stages of the French 

Revolution of 1789] were taking place in Europe, the 

New World [meaning America] had been illuminized. 

As early as 1786 a lodge of the Order [of the Illu- 

minati] had been started in Virginia, and this was fol- 
lowed by fourteen others in different cities." 313 

In 1798, Jedediah Morse, a minister and the father of 
Samuel Morse, the inventer of the telegraph, preached a now 
famous sermon on the Illuminati. He clearly had discovered 
their presence in America. He said: 

"The Order [of the Illuminati] has its branches 

established and its emissaries at work in America." 316 

And in 1812, the President at Harvard University, Joseph 
Willard, retired to preach in Vermont. He took the occasion of 
his retirement on July 4, 1812, to express his concern over 
the consequences of the then looming war: 

"There is sufficient evidence that a number of socie- 
ties of the Illuminati have been established in this 
land. They are doubtless striving to secretly undermine 

all our ancient institutions, civil and sacred. These 


115 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


societies are clearly leagued with those of the same or- 
der in Europe .... 

We live in an alarming period . The Enemies of all 

order are seeking our ruin. Should infidelity generally 
prevail, our independence would fall, of course. Our re- 
publican government would be annihilated ..." 317 

Perhaps the next appearance of the Illuminati occurred in 

Chicago, Illinois, in 1886, in what has been called the Hay- 

market Riot. It is uncertain as to whether or not they were 
formally involved as an organization, but the whole affair cer- 
tainly seems to have occurred in a sequence similar to what 
they would have orchestrated if they had been involved. 

Cyrus McCormick, the owner of a harvester works in Chi- 
cago, had refused to accept a union to represent his employ- 
ees. When he was pressed by the union, he closed his factory 
and opened it later with non-union workers. The strikers and 

the non-union workers clashed, and a squad of police arrived. 
A bomb was thrown from out of the crowd, and it killed one 
and wounded many others. Shooting broke out, and sixty- 

eight policemen were wounded and seven of them killed. 

After the Haymarket affair, a Captain in the Chicago 
police department, Michael J. Shaack, decided that he would 
see if he could determine why the disaster had occurred, and 
he started a thorough investigation. About a year later, he 
issued his report, and these are some of his conclusions: 

"All over the world the apostles of disorder, rapine, 

[defined as plunder, pillage] and Anarchy are today 

pressing their work of ruin, and preaching their gospel 
of disaster to all the nations with a more fiery energy 

and a better organized propaganda than was ever 

known before. 

People who imagine that the energy of the revo- 
lutionists has slackened, or that their determination to 
wreck all the existing systems has grown less bitter, 

are deceiving themselves. The conspiracy against so- 

ciety is as determined as it ever was. 

Nothing but the uprooting of the very foundations 
and groundwork of our civilization will satisfy these 

enemies of order ...." 318 


116 



CHAPTER 15 THE ILLUMINATI 


Although Captain Shaak did not specify that the group 
behind the riot was the Illuminati, he clearly had discovered 
that the goal of the conspirators was to "uproot civilization," 
which had been their announced goal for over one hundred 
years. It appears that his research had uncovered the fact 
that the Illuminati had been at work in America. 

1886 was a big year for those uncovering the evidence 
that this conspiracy existed. Two other individuals spoke out 
about the secret societies in the world. One was Henry Ed- 
ward Manning, Archbishop of Westminster, England, who 
wrote that the Communist International was: 

"the work of secret, political societies, which from 

1789 to this day have been perfecting their formation." 

He said that this conspiracy: 

"is now a power in the midst of the Christian and 

civilized world, pledged to the destruction of Chris- 

tianity and the old civilization of Europe." 319 

The other was Abbe Joseph Lane, a respected scholar of 
the time, who wrote that he had discovered a plan: 

"to disorganize at one blow Christian society and 

the beliefs and customs of the Jews, then bring about 

a state of things where, religiously speaking, there will 
be neither Christian nor Jew." 30 

So there were plenty of warnings, but, overall, few in the 

world listened. And the secret societies continued to prosper. 


117 



Chapter 16 
Karl Marx, Satanist 


Other secret societies prospered as well. And some of the 
historic figures of the past belonged to them. And the fact 
that these people belonged to these secret societies has 

generally not been acknowledged by the historians who have 

written the "accidental school of history" (the theory that the 

major events happen by accident. It holds that no one really 

knows why wars, depressions, inflations, etc. happen. They 
just do. The opposing view of history is called The Con- 

spiratorial View of History. This view holds that the major 
events of the past have happened by design. People plan 

wars, depressions, inflations, and revolutions years in ad- 
vance.) 

One of these individuals was Karl Marx, the so-called 

"father of communism." Mr. Marx had been born into a relig- 
ious family. His family was Jewish and had converted to 

Christianity shortly before his birth. Karl was later baptized 
into the Protestant faith. 


118 



CHAPTER 16 KARL MARX, SATANIST 

Marx's first written work was called "The Union of the 
Faithful With Christ," in which he wrote: 

"Through love of Christ we turn our hearts at the 
same time toward our brethren who are inwardly bound 
to us and whom He gave Himself in sacrifice." 321 

Just a short time later, he wrote this poem he entitled 
"The Pale Maiden:" 

"Thus heaven I've forfeited. 

I know it full well. 

My soul, once true to God, 

Is chosen for hell." 322 

George Jung, a friend of Marx's during this time, added 
this comment about Marx's attitude: 

"Marx will surely chase God from his heaven and 
will even sue him. Marx calls the Christian religion 
one of the most immoral of religions." 323 

Marx confirmed this position that something had changed 
his mind about Christianity with these quotations from his 
writings: 

"The abolition of religion as the illusory happiness 
of man is a demand for their real happiness." 324 

"I wish to avenge myself against the One who 

rules above." 325 

Something had indeed changed Marx's view of Chris- 

tianity. He continued: 

"We must war against all prevailing ideas of reli- 

gion, of the state, of country, of patriotism. The idea of 
God is the keynote of a perverted civilization. 

It must be destroyed." 326 

As can be illustrated by his own writings, something had 
not only changed his ideas on Christianity, but something 

had changed his ideas on what God had taught man through 


119 



CHAPTER 16 KARL MARX, SATANIST 

the Bible. Marx was now being critical of God's instructions 

about: 

How to worship the Creator; 

How to create a nation to protect God-given 
rights; 

Why to establish and maintain national borders; 

How to create the conditions under which all 
could be free to love their Creator. 

All of these ideas had a Biblical foundation. All of these 

principles were taught in the Bible. And each of these ideas 

had been tested by a variety of civilizations for many cen- 
turies, but as can be seen from his writings, Marx wanted to 

"war against" all of these Biblical principles. 

Something had indeed changed his mind. 

In addition, Marx had found another bulwark of God's 

plan for man to be unsatisfactory. He also discovered he had 

to war against the family. 

Marx wrote this in his COMMUNIST MANIFESTO: 

"Abolition of the family! Even the most radical flare 
up at this infamous proposal of the Communists." 327 

His bitterness towards the family unit caused members of 
his own family to suffer as well: 

"Arnold Kunzli, in his book KARL MARX - A 
PSYCHOGRAM, writes about Marx's life, including the 
suicide of two daughters and a son-in-law. Three chil- 
dren [of his] died of malnutrition. His daughter Laura, 

married to the Socialist Lafargue, also buried three of 

her children; then she and her husband committed su- 
icide together. 

Another daughter Eleanor, decided with her hus- 

band to do likewise. She died; he backed out at the 
last minute." 328 


120 



CHAPTER 16 KARL MARX, SATANIST 


Marx further showed his disdain for the family unit by 
fathering a child with his own personal maid. She was a gift 
from his mother-in-law upon the occasion of Marx's wedding. 

Apparently he found no hypocrisy in the fact that he had a 
maid at the time he considered himself to be the champion of 
the working man. Marx railed against the rich and pros- 

perous, those who were wealthy enough to have had maids. 
But he had one himself. 

It is possible to understand a small degree of the utter 
despair that Jenny von Westphelan, Karl Marx's wife, must 
have felt being married to a man who allowed such tragedies 

to occur. Marx was quoted as writing: 

"Daily, my wife tells me she wishes she were ly- 
ing in the grave with the children. And truly I cannot 

blame her." 329 

But the historians who have probed Marx's background 
have generally failed to uncover the reason that he had be- 

come so bitter against Christianity and all of its teachings. A 
few honest historians have uncovered the something that 

changed Marx's views, and that something was Satan wor- 
ship. Marx had discovered the world of the occult. 

Marx had first been brought to the ideas of Socialism by 
Moses Hess when he was 23. But the most important influ- 
in his young life was the worship of Satan. 

Many of his friends had discovered this religion before he 
had. One was Mikhail Bakunin, a Russian anarchist, who 

wrote: 


"Satan is the first free-thinker and Saviour of the 

world. He frees Adam and impresses the seal of hu- 
manity and liberty on his forehead, by making him 

disobedient." 330 

Another friend of Marx's was Pierre Proudhon, a French 
socialist and writer. Marx had been introduced to Proudhon 
by Hess. Mr. Proudhon "worshipped Satan," according to a 

book about him and his relationship with Karl Marx. 331 
He had written that God was the prototype for injustice: 


121 



CHAPTER 16 KARL MARX, SATANIST 

"We reach knowledge in spite of him, we reach 

society in spite of him. Every step forward is a victory 

in which we overcome the Divine. God is stupidity and 
cowardice; God is hypocrisy and falsehood; God is 

tyranny and poverty; God is evil. 

Where humanity bows before an altar, humanity, 

the slave of kings and priests, will be condemned .... 

I swear, God, with my hand stretched out to- 
wards the heavens, that you are nothing more than 

the executioner of my reason, the scepter of my con- 

science .... God is essentially anti -civilized, anti-liberal, 
anti-human." 

Here Proudhon declared God to be evil because he be- 
lieved that God had denied man his ability to "reason." 

Notice that the thoughts of these men were not those of 
an atheist. Marx and his friends, at this stage of their lives, 

were not atheists, as present day Marxists describe them- 

selves. That is, while they openly denounced and reviled God, 
they hated Him while they acknowledged His existence. They 
did not challenge His existence. They challenged His su- 
premacy. 

The thing that changed Marx's views about life was the 
fact that he had discovered the world of Satan worship. 

There is evidence that he had joined a Satanic cult head- 
ed by Joana Southcott, a Satanic priestess who considered 

herself to be in contact with a demon named Shiloh. One of 
the distinguishing characteristics of his membership in this 
cult was his long hair and unkempt beard, worn by members 

of her cult. Proudhon also wore his hair in a similar manner, 
and it is quite likely that he was a member of this cult as 
well. 

Other Communists have declared their hatred of God. 
One, a communist named Flourens, wrote this in 1871: 

"Our enemy is God. Hatred of God is the begin- 

ning of wisdom." 32 

Another notable Communist, Nikolai Lenin, the father of 
the Communist revolution of 1917 in Russia, also voiced his 
hatred of God and religion. He wrote the following comments: 


122 



CHAPTER 16 KARL MARX, SATANIST 


"Atheism is an integral part of Marxism. Marxism 
is materialism. We must combat religion." 333 

"We, of course, say that we do not believe in God. 
We do not believe in eternal morality. That is moral 

that serves the destruction of the old society." 334 

"Everything is moral which is necessary for the 

annihilation of the old exploiting social order [Lenin 
wished to destroy the Old World Order, and replace it 

with the New World Order] and for uniting the pro- 

letariat." 

"We must combat religion. Down with religion. 

Long live atheism. The spread of atheism is our chief 

task. Communism abolishes eternal truths. It abolishes 
all religion and morality." 335 

"Religion is a kind of spiritual intoxicant, in 

which the slaves of capital drown their humanity, and 

blunt their desire for decent human experience." 336 

"We shall always preach a scientific philosophy. 
We must fight against the inconsistencies of the Chris- 

tians ..." 331 

Lenin, like Marx before him, came from a religious family. 

His father was a school inspector, and a devout member of 
the Russian Orthodox Church. But, at the age of eighteen, 
Lenin started reading Karl Marx and soon was expounding 
Marxist principles. 

He later wrote: 

"Atheism is a natural and inseparable portion of 

Marxism, of the theory and practice of scientific Social- 

ism. Our propaganda necessarily includes propaganda 
for atheism." 338 

Other Communists have joined the attack on religion. 
Nikita Khrushchev, a Russian dictator who embraced the 

Communist theology during the time he spent at the top of 
the Russian government, wrote this: 

"Do not think that the Communists have changed 

their minds about religion. We remain the Atheists 
that we have always been; we are doing as much as 


123 



CHAPTER 16 KARL MARX, SATANIST 

we can to liberate those people who are still under the 
spell of this religious opiate." 339 

But notice that Mr. Khrushchev went one step further 
than some of the other atheists. He stated that the task of 
the Communist atheists was to "liberate" the God-fearers 
from their God. This, obviously, is the task not only of the 
Communists but of the New World Order. 

Others, more recently, have praised Marxism. One even 
served in a high administrative position inside President 
Jimmy Carter's cabinet. He was Zbigniew Brzezinski, the 
Special Assistant to the President for National Security 
Affairs. He was, or is, also Director of the Research Institute 
on International Change, Professor of Public Law and Gov- 
ernment, and a member of the Russian Institute, all at Co- 

lumbia University. 

In 1970, Mr. Brzezinski wrote a book entitled BETWEEN 
TWO AGES, in which he made some startling observations on 
the nature of Marxism. Some of these are as follows: 

"... Marxism represents a further vital and 

creative stage in the maturing of man's universal 
vision." 

"Marxism is simultaneously a victory of the exter- 
nal, active man over the inner, passive man and a vic- 

tory of reason over belief ...." 

"... Marxism has served as a mechanism of hu- 

man ’progress,' even is its practice has often fallen 
short of its ideals." 

"Teilhard de Chardin [a modern day Jesuit theo- 
logian and writer] notes at one point that 'monstrous 

as it is, is not modern totalitarianism really the 

distortion of something magnificent, and thus quite 
near to the truth?"' 

"... what will probably remain the major contri- 
bution of Marxism: its revolutionary and broadening 

influence, which opened man's mind to previously ig- 
nored perspectives and dramatized previously neglect- 

ed concerns." 

"... Marxism, disseminated on the popular level in 

the form of communism, represented a major advance 


124 



CHAPTER 16 KARL MARX, SATANIST 

in man's ability to conceptualize his relationship to the 

world." 

"Marxism ... provided a unique intellectual tool 

for understanding and harnessing the fundamental for- 

ces of our time. 

it supplied the best available insight into con- 
temporary reality." 140 

It is one thing to make all of these favorable comments 

about Marxism, and it is another to actually test the theory 
against the reality. 

There are nations around the world that have applied 
Marx's theories. It is now possible to measure the promises 

against the actuality. 

One who has actually attempted to determine the actual 
practice of Marxism in Communist Russia was Robert Con- 
guest, a famed British Sovietologist. He estimated that at 
least 21,500,000 human beings had been executed or killed in 
other ways by the Marxist Communist authorities during and 
after the Russian Revolution of 1917. Mr. Conquest pointed 
that out this figure was a low estimate and that the total 
figure could go as high as 45,000,000. 

The revolution in Russia was the first successful attempt 

to create a government in a nation based upon the theories of 
Marxism, the "victory of reason over belief." 

China as a nation also experienced a similar fate during 
its Communist revolution of 1923 to 1947. Professor Richard 
L. Walker in an official government report released by the 
Senate Subcommittee on Internal Security in 1971 estimated 
that the total dead in China might go as high as 64,000,000. 

China, too, had experienced the Marxist "victory of reason 
over belief. " 

A tourist who visited China after the United States had 
established diplomatic relations with that nation in 1973 
shared his thoughts about how Marxism had worked in China 
in an article he wrote for the August 10, 1973 New York 
Times newspaper. That article was entitled FROM A CHINA 
TRAVELER, and was written by the tourist, American bank- 
er David Rockefeller. This is what he wrote about the 
Marxism in China: 


125 



CHAPTER 16 KARL MARX, SATANIST 


"Whatever the price of the Chinese Revolution [as 
many as 64,000,000 killed,] it has obviously succeeded 
not only in producing more efficient and dedicated ad- 
ministration, but also in fostering high morale and 

community purpose." 341 

After reading this comment, the student might recall the 
statement made by Adam Weishaupt: 

"Behold our secret .... 

... remember that the end justifies the means ..." 342 

No one but Mr. Rockefeller knows what he meant by that 

comment, but it certainly seems to mean that he must have 
felt sorry for the 64,000,000 Chinese that were brutally killed 

by the Marxist Communists, but the results certainly justified 

their deaths. He was sorry that 64,000,000 Chinese had to 
die in the Revolution, but it was a small price to pay for 
"efficient administration and community purpose!" Don't 

forget, "the end justifies the means." 

And, the student is not to forget: Zbigniew Brzezinski 

wrote that Marxism was a "victory of reason over belief." 

Perhaps the best example of someone using "reason over 

belief was the story offered by Whittaker Chambers, a for- 

mer member of the Communist Party in America who decided 
to break with the Party and come out from it. He has been 

quoted as saying: 

"Communism is what happens when, in the name 
of Mind, men free themselves from God." 

Mr. Chambers had a very interesting break from his be- 
liefs in Marxism and Communism. He related the story in his 
book entitled WITNESS: 


"But 

I date 

my 

break from a 

very 

casual happen- 

ing. I was sitting 
in Baltimore. 

in 

our apartment 

on 

St. 

Paul Street 

My 

daughter 

was 

in her high 

chair. 

I 

was watch- 

ing her 

eat. She 

was the most 

miraculous 

thing that 


had ever happened in my life. I liked to watch her 



CHAPTER 16 KARL MARX, SATANIST 

had ever happened in my life. I liked to watch her 
even when she smeared porridge on her face or 
dropped it meditatively on the floor. 

My eyes came to rest on the delicate convolutions 
of her ear — those intricate, perfect ears. The thought 
passed through my mind: 'No, those ears were not cre- 

ated by any chance coming together of atoms in na- 
ture [the view of the Communists.] They could have 
been created only by immense design.' 


The thought was involuntary and unwanted. I 

crowded it out of my mind. But I never wholly forgot 

it or the occasion. I had to crowd it out of my mind. 


If I had completed it, 

I should 

have 

had to 

say: 

Design presupposes God. 

I did not then know 

that, at 

that 

moment. 

the 


finger of God was first laid upon my forehead." 

He later added this thought: 

"A Communist [meaning someone who believes 

that Marxism is a "victory of reason over belief] 

breaks because he must choose at last between ir- 
reconcilable opposites — God or Man, Soul or Mind, 

Freedom or Communism." 343 

Mr. Chambers had figured it out. 

Marx, Lenin, Brzezinski and Rockefeller apparently had 
not. 


127 



Chapter 17 

Adolph Hitler, Satanist 


Another individual who joined a secret society was Adolf 
Hitler, the head of the Nazi Socialist Party in Germany. He 
joined a secret society called the Thule Society, termed "the 
secret prime mover of Nazism." 344 And it is a rare historian 
who has written about the importance of this group, or the 
fact that Hitler had joined it. 

The authors of a book on this organization wrote: 

"It is in the Thule Society that one has to look 
for the real inspiration of Nazism." 345 

The Thule Society had interesting roots. It was itself: 

"but a fragment of a much more important secret 
society known as the Germanic Order founded in 

1912." 346 

That organization had its origin in other secret societies: 


128 



CHAPTER 17 ADOLPH HITLER, SATANIST 


"[they had] gathered together certain lodges of the 

Prussian Lreemasonry, as well as a number of openly 

anti-Semitic associations. 

The Thule Society became a particularly active 

branch of the main society." 347 

The importance of the Thule Society in the formation of 
the Nazi Party is now being discovered, but not generally by 
the historians who write the "Accidental School of History." 

"The Committee and the forty original members 

of the New German Workers' Party were all drawn 

from the most powerful Occult Society in Germany: 

the Thule Society." 348 

But the most revealing statement made about this Society 

was that the major leaders all had a common religion: 

"The inner core within the Thule Society were all 

Satanists who practiced Black Magic." 349 

Another writer on the Thule Society is Joseph Carr, who 
has written a book entitled THE TWISTED CROSS. In it, he 
makes this observation: 

"The inner group which controlled the Thule So- 
ciety contained men who were self-confessed Luci- 

ferians ...." 350 

So, the evidence is that Hitler himself became a Luci- 
ferian. He had absorbed the works of the tragic philosopher, 

Friedrich Nietzsche: 

"whose powerful dissertation on 'the Genealogy of 

Morals' sought to make a 'Revaluation of all values' in 
the proof that so-called evil was good, and what was 

habitually believed to be good was evil." 351 

Here is that thought again that the God of the Bible is 
"evil," and somehow the "god" considered to be evil is "good." 
And that what was needed was a "re-evaluation of mor- 
als." In other words, that which has been taught by the 


129 

CHAPTER 17 ADOLPH HITLER, SATANIST 


Biblical "good" God has to be eliminated, and a new system 
substituted therefor. 

These thoughts will be examined later in this study. 

But Hitler also acknowledged the role of Lreemasonry in 
his life: 

"In Hitler's observations, published ... under the 

title HITLER SPEAKS ... one can rediscover the 

important role played by German Freemasonry as a 
model for esoteric structuring of the Nazi Party." 352 

Just like so many other secret societies, the Thule Society 
had an "esoteric structuring." That must have meant that 

there were two classes of members, those who knew what the 
secret was and those who didn't. 

But there is evidence that Adolf Hitler was one of the 

members of the Society that knew. 

The man who played the most important role in Hitler's 

life was Dietrich Eckart, one of the original seven who 

founded the Nazi Party and who was in fact called the 

"spiritual founder of Nazism." One writer wrote just how 

important Eckart was in Hitler's life: 

"Adolf Hitler himself considered Eckart as the 

most important influence on his life." 353 

It is known that Eckart had experimented with numerous 
drugs in an attempt to reach "higher consciousness." It is 

now being discovered that Hitler also attempted the same 
thing: 


"... Hitler attained higher levels of consciousness 
by means of drugs and made a penetrating study of 

medieval occultism and ritual magic ...." 354 

Eckart has been called: 

"a dedicated Satanist ... and the central figure in 

a powerful and wide-spread circle of occultists - the 

Thule Society." 355 

But he was also believed in the future appearance of Lord 
Maitreya, the hoped for New Age Messiah. Eckart partici- 


130 



CHAPTER 17 ADOLPH HITLER, SATANIST 

pated in a series of seances with two Russian generals who 
had left their native land to come to Germany. 

"During these seances, Eckart and his associates 
were told of the imminent appearance of the German 
messiah, a 'Lord Maitreya."' 356 

And he deliberately guided the career of Hitler into the 
occult world of Satan and Lucifer worship. When he lay dy- 
ing, he told those gathered at his bedside: 

"Lollow Hitler! He will dance, but it is I who 

have called the tune! I have initiated him into the 

’Secret Doctrine,’ opened his centres in vision and 

given him the means to communicate with the Powers. 

Do not mourn for me: I shall have influenced 

history more than any other German." 357 

"Eckart claimed to his fellow adepts in the Thule 
Society that he had personally received a kind of 

Satanic annunciation [meaning announcement] that he 
was destined to prepare the vessel of the Anti-Christ, 

the man inspired by Lucifer to conquer the world and 
lead the Aryan race to glory." 338 

Another of the links of the Thule Society with Lucifer 
worship is the emblem chosen as the symbol of the Nazi 

Party itself: the swastika. The dictionary defines a swastika 

as a cross with its four equal arms bent back in a right angle 
extension. There are two forms of the symbol: one with its 
arms bent to the left, and one with the arms bent to the 
right. The former is universally a symbol of good, while the 
latter is universally a symbol of evil. 

"Hitler personally selected the final design of the 

Nazi Blood Llag [the one carrying the swastika as an 
emblem representing the Nazi Party.] He reversed the 
swastika [from the one proposed] to the form that 

represents evil ...." 359 

Hitler had a model to base his selection on: the swastika 
was the symbol of the Thule Society. Its official insignia: 


131 



CHAPTER 17 ADOLPH HITLER, SATANIST 


"consisted 

of 

the swastika traversed by 

two 

lances." 360 



Manly P. 

Hall 

in his book entitled LECTURES 

ON 


ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY advised his readers just what the 
swastika represented: 

"The swastika ... is the whirling cross that 

represents the centralizing motion of the Eternal 
ALL." 361 

One of the original founders of the Thule Society, Rudolf 
von Sebottendorf, linked the swastika with another symbol, 
the sun, when he made this statement in November of 1918: 

"I intend to commit the Thule Society to this 

combat .... I swear it on this swastika, on this sign 

which for us is sacred, in order that you hear it, O 

magnificent Sun!" 362 

So the swastika was a symbol of the Thule Society; it was 
a symbol of the Nazi Party; it was somehow connected to a 
symbol of the Sun-god; and the Sun-god was a symbol of 
Lucifer. 

And those who resisted the symbol of the swastika and all 
it represented had to pay for it with the supreme sacrifice on 
the bloody altar of war. 

50 million people died in World War II. 

50 million people sacrificed to the religion of Lucifer. 

All because the historians who write the "accidental view 
of history" somehow were unable to determine that Adolf 
Hitler had joined a Luciferic cult named The Thule Society 

some 16 years before the war started. 

But, remember, those who write the Accidental View of 

History do not believe that conspirators plan wars inside 

secret societies. 

And they certainly do not believe that Lucifer is a being 

that is worshipped by secret societies. 


132 



Chapter 18 
The Great Seal 


"For more than three thousand years, secret 
societies have labored to create the background of 

knowledge necessary to the establishment of an 
enlightened democracy among the nations of the world. 

... all have continued ... and they still exist, as the 

Order of the Quest." 363 

Thus wrote Manly P. Hall, the 33rd degree Mason, and 

perhaps the most prolific writer on this type of subject in a 
book entitled THE SECRET DESTINY OF AMERICA. 

The title of his book is rather alarming. 

The thought that America has a "secret destiny" will 

probably startle those not familiar with secret societies and 
their plans for America and the world. But that is the claim 
made by Mr. Hall in his book. 

He informed his readers that he saw this Order coming to 
America: 


133 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


"Men bound by a secret oath to labor in the cause 
of world democracy decided that in the American 

colonies they would plant the roots of a new way of 

life." 364 

He then told his readers when these conspirators came to 

America. He wrote that the Order of the Quest: 

"... was set up in America before the middle of the 
17th century," [meaning sometime between 1625 to 
1675.] 365 

That means that Mr. Hall felt that the members of this 
Order came to America about the same time that the first 

settlers arrived. American history records that the first 
visitors from Europe to the American shore were the English 
settlers who came in 1607, to be followed by the Pilgrims in 

1620. But Mr. Hall says that amongst those early settlers 

was a group committed by a secret oath. 

But the only name he mentioned as being involved in the 

Order of the Quest was that of Benjamin Franklin, one of 
America's founding fathers: 

"[Benjamin] Franklin spoke for the Order of the 

Quest, and most of the men who worked with him in 

the early days of the American Revolution were also 

members." 366 

He further identified most of those men as being, not only 

members of the Order, but also Freemasons as well: 

"Not only were many of the founders of the United 
States Government Masons, but they received aid from 

a secret and august body existing in Europe [the Il- 
luminati?] which helped them to establish this country 

for a particular purpose known only to the initiated 

few." 367 

So a secret society, or several secret societies, decided that 
America would be fertile ground for the establishment of a 
new society, or as Mr. Hall called it, a "particular purpose." 

It can be known that those who created the Constitution 
of the United States and its resulting government were not 


134 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


connected to the Order of the Quest. Those who created the 
Declaration of Independence and the Constitution of the 
United States created perhaps the finest documents ever 
penned by men. The Constitutional Republic they created was 
the greatest form of government ever devised by man. They 
created some problems inside the document, (for example it 
permitted slavery.) but overall, they created the most 

magnificent form of government in the history of the world. 

It is obvious that these men, even though Hall stated that 
they were men who "labored in the cause of world demo- 
cracy," could not have been the original Founding Fathers, 
because their purpose inside the Order was known only to 

the "initiated few." 

The creation of America's Republic was certainly a public 
act, made known, it is certain, to every freedom seeking 
nation in the world. 

People do not keep freedom quiet! They let the world know 
that it has been officially recognized by the American Con- 
stitution. 

Even in nations under totalitarian Communism, where 

freedom of the press is either non-existent, or in nearly total 
control of the government, people know that America did 
something that only a few other societies in the past had 
ever done: they had created a truly free Republic ! 

Even today, people still swim shark infested waters, climb 
over barbed wire fences, and dodge army patrols in the dark 
of night to come to America, because they seek freedom! 

Free people do not conspire! 

They make their activities known to the freedom seeking 

peoples of the world: 

IT IS POSSIBLE TO CREATE A FREE 

GOVERNMENT! 

Only those with evil purposes create "secret societies," 
with "secret oaths," with "particular purposes" known only to 
an "initiated few." 

So the purpose of the Order of the Quest was not 
beneficial to freedom loving peoples, no matter that Mr. Hall 

says they "labored in the cause of world democracy." 

They must know something that the rest of America does 
not know: their cause is evil! 


135 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


Mr. Hall then instructed the reader that the Order of the 
Quest concealed their purpose inside the symbols of the Great 

Seal of the United States. This seal is the one that appears 
on the back side of the American dollar bill, and consists of 
two sides, what are called the Obverse side, the one with the 
eagle, and the Reverse side, the one with the pyramid. 

Mr. Hall tells his reader: 

"... if the design on the obverse side of the seal [the 
eagle] is stamped with the signature of the Order of 

the Quest, the design on the reverse, [the pyramid] is 
even more definitely related to the Old Mysteries." 368 

Here Mr. Hall connects the reverse side of the Great Seal 
with the ancient mysteries, the worship of Lucifer as a sun- 
god. 

The Great Seal was designed and accepted in 1782, but 
not until several committees appointed by Congress had failed 
to design one. 

The first committee was asked by the Continental Con- 
gress on July 4, 1776, to "prepare a device for a seal of the 
United States of America," and consisted of three men: Ben- 
jamin Franklin, John Adams, and Thomas Jefferson. This 

committee of three was not able to decide on a design, so 

Congress appointed a second committee. This committee also 

had difficulty in deciding, so Congress appointed a third 

committee. They referred the problem to Charles Thomson, 
the Secretary of Congress, and his designs were adopted on 

June 20, 1782. 

Max Toth wrote a book about the history of the Egyptian 
pyramids, and including a brief review of the pyramid on the 
back of the dollar bill. This is what he wrote: 

"All three committees appointed in succession by 

Congress between 1776 and 1782 included members 

holding various positions in Freemasonry." 369 

So, those who were deciding the design of the Great Seals 
were not only Masons, but were quite possibly members of 

the Order of the Quest. Mr. Hall said that the Order placed 

"their signature" on both sides of the Seal. So, there is reason 

to believe that at the very least, some of the Masons were 

also members of the Order. 


136 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


Mr. Hall then commented: 

"European mysticism was not dead at the time the 
United States of America was founded. The hand of the 
Mysteries controlled in the establishment of the new 
government, for the signature of the Mysteries may still 


be seen on the Great 

Seal 

of 

the 

United States 

of 

America." 370 







"The Great Seal is 

the 

signature 

of this 

exalted 

body — unseen and for 

the 

most 

part 

unknown 

- 

and 

the unfinished pyramid 

upon 

its 

reverse side 

is 

a 


trestleboard setting forth symbolically the task to the 

accomplishment of which the United States Government 

was dedicated from the day of its inception." 371 

He elaborated further: 

"There is only one possible origin for these symbols, 

and that is the secret societies which came to this coun- 
try 150 years before the Revolutionary war [about 1620, 
the date that the Pilgrims came to America.] 

There can be no question that the great seal was di- 
rectly inspired by these orders of the human quest, and 

that it set forth the purpose for this nation as that pur- 
pose was seen and known to the Founding Fathers." 372 

So America has a "secret destiny." And that secret purpose 
was being kept from the majority of America's citizens. But 
for the curious, there are ways of determining just what that 
secret destiny is. 

The symbols of the Great Seals can be deciphered. Ameri- 
cans can know what that future is. 

"Careful analysis of the seal discloses a mass of 
occult and Masonic symbols ...." 

Mr. Hall tells us that some of these symbols have Masonic 
interpretations. The Masons also have symbols, and have, on 
occansion, revealed what those symbols mean. So, it becomes 
possible to know what those Masonic symbols on the Great 
Seal mean. 


137 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


James H. Billington has been the Director of the Woodrow 

Wilson International Center for Scholars at the Smithsonian 

Institute in Washington D.C. since 1973. He received a 

doctorate as a Rhodes Scholar at Oxford University in 
England, and taught history at Harvard and at Princeton. He 
has written a book entitled FIRE IN THE MINDS OF MEN, 
ORIGINS OF THE REVOLUTIONARY FAITH. He has 

written about the Great Seal as well: 

"The ideal was ... the occult simplicity of its [mean- 
ing America's] great seal: an all-seeing eye and a 

pyramid over the words Novus Ordo Seclorum." 374 

So, the search for the "secret destiny" of America ends in 

the meaning of two symbols and a Latin phrase. Therefore, it 
would be possible to determine the future of America if these 
symbols could be deciphered. 

But first, it would be helpful to decipher as many of the 

remaining symbols on both sides of the Great Seal as pos- 
sible. 

The words "Annuit Coeptis" have been traditionally inter- 
preted as meaning "He, [presumably the God of the Bible] 

has prospered our undertakings." But, a far more acceptable 

interpretation would be that the words mean "announcing the 
birth of." 

What the symbols are announcing is new. It was still in 
its infant stage in 1782, and what it is will be explored in 

some of the following paragraphs. 

The eagle in the obverse side has very definite mystic 

meanings. Manly P. Hall gives us one: 

"In mysticism the eagle is a symbol of initiation ...." 375 

Rex Hutchens gives another: 

"The eagle: ... this emblem is of great antiquity 

figuring in the symbolic inventory of the Egyptians, as 
the sun; as wisdom is attained through reason, the 

eagle is also symbolic of reason." 

"Among the Egyptians the eagle was the emblem of 
a wise man because his wings bore him above the 

clouds into the purer atmosphere and nearer to the 

source of light, and his eyes were not dazzled by that 


138 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 

light. Since the eagle also represented the great 

Egyptian Sun god Amun Ra, it is a symbol of the infin- 

ite Supreme Reason of Intelligence." 376 

Another Mason who connected the eagle with the sun was 
Kenneth Mackenzie: 

"With the Egyptians, the Greeks and the Persians, 

the eagle was sacred to the sun." 377 

Albert Pike also confirmed this connection when he wrote 

these comments about the eagle: 

"a bird consecrated to the Sun in Egypt." 
"The Eagle was the Living Symbol of Mendes, a 

representative of the Sun." 373 

Perhaps the reason that the eagle was considered to be 
sacred to the Egyptians was offered by Robert Hieronimus in 

his book entitled THE TWO GREAT SEALS OF AMERICA: 

"... the eagle has been linked to the Sun [the word 
has been capitalized, apparently referring to the sun as 

a deity, rather than to the daytime sun] for it can fly 
nearer to the Sun than any other bird, and is the only 

bird that is said to symbolically look directly into the 

Sun's rays." 379 

Another writer who wrote a book on the Great Seal was 
E. Raymond Capt, and he added this confirmation in his 

book entitled OUR GREAT SEAL: 

"The Eagle ... is also supposed to be the only 

creature that can look directly into the sun." 380 

It is revealing that some of the authors appear to under- 
stand the symbology of the Sun, and others think it is just 

the gaseous orb that lights the earth. 

The drawing of the eagle conceals other secrets and it will 
assist the student to examine these as well. The eagle in the 
seal has nine tail feathers, and either 32 or 33 feathers on 
each of the two wings. These are symbols that have to be 
interpreted: 


139 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


"The nine tail feathers of the eagle represent the 

nine beings in the innermost circle of enlightenment in 
the 'Great White Brotherhood - or the Illuminati."' 381 

There is another explanation, one more acceptable than 
the one offered above by Stan Deyo in his book entitled THE 
COSMIC CONSPIRACY. There are nine degrees in the York 
Rite of Freemasonry, and connecting the York Rite to the tail 
feathers appears to be the more plausible explanation. 

The feathers on the two wings also conceal a secret. There 
are 32 on the right side, symbolic of the 32 degrees inside the 
Scottish Rite of Freemasonry, and 33 on the left side, 
symbolic of the honorary 33rd degree. 

The "all-seeing eye" above the pyramid has two meanings, 

both related to the Masonic Order. One explanation was 
provided by the Masons themselves in an article that was 
inside a Masonic Bible. It said: 

"The ubiquity of Masonic law was symbolized by 
the All-Seeing Eye." 382 

The word ubiquity is defined as the capacity of being 

everywhere at the same time. The Masons are saying that 
their law, the one that will punish the Mason should he 

reveal their secrets, is everywhere and that he cannot hide 
from it. 

The second interpretation of the symbol of the eye has 
been offered by many Masons, including Albert Mackey: 

"An important symbol of the Supreme Being, bor- 

rowed by the Freemasons from the nations of antiquity. 

the open eye was selected as the symbol of 

watchfulness, and the eye of God as the symbol of 

Divine watchfulness and care of the universe." 

"The All-Seeing-Eye may then be considered as a 

symbol of God manifested in his omnipresence ...." 383 

So, the simplest explanation of the symbol is that it is the 

symbol of a deity. And some of the Masons in their writings 

have told the student who that deity is. 


140 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


One of the Masons who took the next step in explaining 
what the symbol stood for was Kenneth Mackenzie who wrote 
this: 

"The eye was also the symbol of Osiris." 384 
This was confirmed by another Mason, Carl Claudy: 


"This [the All-Seeing Eye] is one of the 
most widespread symbols denoting God. The 
of Egypt represented Osiris." 385 

oldest 

Open 

and 

Eye 

Mr. Mackey also confirmed that the 
symbol of Osiris: 

All Seeing 

Eye was a 

"... the Egyptians represented 

deity, by the symbol of an open eye ...." 386 

Osiris, 

their 

chief 

Albert Pike connected Osiris with 

the Sun 

with 

this 


comment from his book MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"... Osiris, the Sun, Source of Light and Principle of 
Good ...." 387 


Manly P. Hall connected the symbol of the eye with the 

symbol of the sun with this statement: 

"His symbol, therefore, was an opened eye, in honor 
of the Great Eye of the universe, the sun." 388 

Rex Hutchens, one of the most recent Masons to write a 
major book supporting the Masonic Order, also wrote that the 

all-seeing eye was a symbol of the sun. He wrote: 

"On the right side [of a sash worn by a Member of 

the Masons inside the Temple] is painted an eye of 

gold, a symbol of the sun or of the Deity." 389 

Albert Pike however revealed the exact meaning of the 
symbol in his book MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"The All-Seeing Eye ... which to the Ancients was 


141 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


So, the all-seeing eye is a symbol concealing the Masonic 
belief that Osiris, a representative of the sun, was a god. And 
some of these writers have reported that the sun-god was 
Lucifer. 

So, the all-seeing eye is a symbol of Lucifer, the all-seeing 
god of the universe. And it was placed on the American seal 
by those who knew what it meant. 

The unfinished pyramid under the All-Seeing Eye also has 
a symbolic meaning, as described by the Treasury 

Department of the United States government in 1935: 

"The pyramid is the symbol of strength and its un- 
finished condition denoted the belief of the designers of 

the Great Seal that there was still work to be done." 391 

(Notice that the Treasury Department reported that the 
pyramid was "unfinished [it had no capstone]" because "there 
was still work to be done" in the United States. The common 
explanation that the "New World Order" in the Great Seal 
was the creation of the Republic under the American Consti- 
tution simply isn't true. That work was finished by the time 
that the seal was approved in 1782. That means that the 

"work still to be done" had to be completed in the future. The 
work of creating a "New World Order" was, in 1782, "still in 

the future.") 

But, the all-seeing eye has a far more symbolic meaning to 
the Masons, as was described by E. Raymond Capt: 

"The triangle, in connection with the All-Seeing 
Eye, is the Masonic symbol of the 'Grand Architect of 
the Universe.'" 392 

Manly P. Hall told his readers who the Great Architect of 

the Universe was: he was the Master of the Masonic Lodges: 

"The Mason believes in the Great Architect 

Let him never forget that the Master is near. The 

All-seeing Eye is upon him." 393 

The Great Architect of the Universe is the title of the god 
of the Masonic order. But there are some who feel that this 
god is not the God of the Bible, but Lucifer, considered by 
these to be the god of some of the Masons. One who has 


142 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


pointed out why he considers this to be true is Edward 
Ronayne, a former member of the Masons, who wrote this in 

his book entitled THE MASTER'S CARPET: 

"An Architect is a man who furnishes plans for, 

and superintends the erection of a building made from 

material already prepared; but God created of nothing 

the heavens and the earth, and all the host of them, 
and hence he cannot be a mere Architect, and it would 
be a direct insult to call him such a nickname." 394 

(The author is one of those who believe that Lucifer is the 
god of some of the Masons. It has been my purpose to prove 
that that conclusion is true with evidence from the Masons 
themselves. Some of that evidence has been presented in the 
material in earlier chapters of this study. Other evidence will 

follow in the remaining chapters of this book.) 

Other Masonic symbols on the dollar bill, as told to the 
student by the Masons themselves in their magazine entitled 
The New Age are the: 

13 leaves in the olive branches; 

13 bars and stripes in the shield; 

13 arrows; 

13 letters in "E Pluribus Unum" on the ribbon; 

13 stars in the green crest above; 

13 granite stones in the Pyramid; 

13 letters in "Annuit Coeptis"; 

On the front of the dollar bill is the seal of the 

United States, made up of a key, square, and the 

Scales of Justice, as well as a compass, which, of 

course, is an important symbol in Masonry. 393 

It is quite certain that the student of history will argue 
that the number 13 used in all of these symbols simply refers 
to the thirteen states that ratified the Constitution. This 
would be a reasonable explanation, were it not for the fact 
that the Masons claim the number as one of their own. It 
appears as if they decided that it was time to form the 
United States when the number of states that could be 
united in the Union reached 13. As was just illustrated, the 
Masons consider the number to have Masonic significance. 


143 

CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


They apparently waited for just that time when there were 
exactly 13 states to form the union, and not 12 or 14. 

One who has assigned an esoteric interpretation to the 
number 13 is Stan Deyo, the author who said this in his 
book entitled THE COSMIC CONSPIRACY: 

"13 is the value assigned to Satan." 396 

But the key phrase on the back of the dollar bill and 
inside the Great Seal is the Latin phrase NOVUS ORDO 
SECLORUM. It means: 


NOVUS: New 
ORDO: Order 
SECLORUM: World 


The New World Order! 

The New World Order on the American dollar bill is not 
the "republic" of thirteen states created by the founding 

fathers. It is the future one thousand year reign of Lord 

Maitreya, the New Age "messiah." Lord Maitreya is the 

earth's representative of the sun-god, Lucifer. And the future 
period is symbolized by the unfinished pyramid, signifying 
that the future work is yet to be done. 

It is an easy task to show that the New World Order is 
not the republican form of government the founding fathers 
created, because the pyramid is unfinished. Whatever the 
New World Order is, it was not completed in 1782. And it is 
not in place yet. 

America is to bring the New Age to the world of the 

future ! 

Some of this nation's founding fathers said so! 

There is no question but that the Great Seal has great 
significance to both the Masonic Order and the "Order of the 
Quest" described by Manly P. Hall, a member of the Masons. 

There is one final piece to be placed into the puzzle of the 
entire scenario, and that is to determine why these symbols 
appear on the dollar bill at all. Why should the great seal of 
the United States contain any symbols that conceal secrets 
from the overwhelming majority of the American people? 
Especially if those secrets are symbolic of a religion that few 
in America subscribe to. 


144 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


Arthur M. Schlesinger Jr., in his book entitled THE 

COMING OF THE NEW DEAL, told how Henry A. Wallace, 
the Vice President in President Franklin Roosevelt's first ad- 
ministration, asked the President to put the two Seals on the 
back of the American dollar bill. Mr. Schlesinger wrote: 

"The occult fascinated him [Wallace.] He saw 

special significance in the Great Seal of the United 
States ... even more in the reverse of the Seal .... 

Wallace did induce the Secretary of the Treasury 
[after he had talked to President Roosevelt] to put the 
Great Pyramid on the new dollar bill in 1935. 

His susceptibility to the occult had drawn Wallace 
in the late twenties into the orbit of a White Russian 

mystic in the tradition of [Helena Petrovna] Blavatsky, 
Dr. Nicholas Roerich ...." 397 

Mr. Wallace himself put his recollections of the events in a 
letter that has been recorded several places, as well as in the 
book entitled OUR GREAT SEAL: 

"The Latin phrase NOVUS ORDO SECLORUM 
impressed me as meaning the New Deal [the term 
applied to President Roosevelt's administrations] of the 

Ages. Therefore I took the publication [a copy of a book 
entitled THE HISTORY OF THE SEAL OF THE 
UNITED STATES] to President Roosevelt .... 

[He] was first struck with the representation of the 
'All-Seeing Eye,' a Masonic representation of the Great 
Architect of the Universe. 

Roosevelt like myself was a 32nd degree Mason. He 
suggested that the Seal be put on the dollar bill rather 
than a coin and took the matter up with the Secretary 
of the Treasury." 398 

Some Masons created the Great Seal in 1782, and other 
Masons put it on the back of the American dollar bill in 
1935. And it appears that all involved knew the meaning of 
the concealed symbols portrayed therein. 

There is an abundance of evidence that the Masons were 
heavily involved in the founding of the United States and the 
design of the Great Seal. 


145 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


The Supreme Council of the 33rd Degree of the Scottish 
Rite of Freemasonry has told the student that 13 of the 39 
original signers of the Constitution were Masons. ’"Another 
Mason, Past Sovereign Grand Commander Henry Clausen, 
put the figure at 23 of the 39. 400 It is also interesting to note 
that there were 39 signers, exactly three times the Masonic 
number 13. 

Other Masons assumed responsible positions inside the 
Army fighting for freedom against the English government. 
33 Generals in George Washington's army and six of his 
aides were Freemasons. 4 

The Masons then and the Masons now are looking forward 
to the "NOVUS ORDO SECLORUM," the Latin phrase on the 
bottom of the reverse side of the Great Seal. 

Manly P. Hall told the world about the return of Osiris, 
someday, when he wrote this: 

"Osiris will rise in splendor from the dead and rule 
the world through those sages and philosophers in whom 
wisdom has become incarnate." 4 2 

The return to a worship of Osiris and what he represents 
as the sun-god, the worship of Lucifer, is still in the future. 
One who told the world that was C. William Smith of New 
Orleans, Louisiana, in the September, 1950 copy of the New 
Age Magazine, the official publication of the Supreme Council, 
33rd Degree Scottish Rite of Freemasonry. 

What Mr. Smith wrote is extremely revealing. After the 
student has learned that Lucifer is the god of some of the 
Masons, it appears that the way to truly understand what he 

wrote is to substitute the name Lucifer whenever he refers to 

God. He wrote: 

"God's plan is dedicated to the unification of all races, 
religions and creeds. This plan, dedicated to the new order 
of things, is to make all things new — a new nation, a new 
race, a new civilization and a new religion, a nonsectarian 
religion that has already been called the religion of 'The 

Great Light.' 

Looking back into history, we can easily see that the 

Guiding Hand of Providence has chosen the Nordic people 
to bring in and unfold the new order of the world. Record 


146 



CHAPTER 18 THE GREAT SEAL 


clearly show that 95 per cent of the colonists were Nordics 
— Anglo-Saxons. 

Providence has chosen the Nordic race to unfold the 

'New Age' of the world - a 'Novus Ordo Seclorum.' 

... God’s great plan in America for the dawn of the 
New Age of the world." 03 

Yes, some Masons truly expect Osiris to rise from the 
dead and rule the world. 

The New Age, the New World Order is near! 

Some are expecting Osiris to rise! 


147 



Chapter 19 
The Freemasons 


An article in the November, 1946 issue of The New Age 

Magazine, published by the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry, 
called attention to the following comment made by Andre 

Tardieu, a former French Premier: 

"Freemasonry does not explain everything; yet, if 

we leave it out of account, the history of our times is 
unintelligible." 404 

Perhaps the reason Mr. Tardieu said that is because of 
what Manly P. Hall has said about Freemasonry. He called 

it: 

"the most powerful organization in the land." 405 

Alice Bailey, the New Age leader, has written this about 

the Masonic Fraternity: 


148 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


"It is a far more occult organization than can be 

realised, and is intended to be the training school for 
the coming advanced occultists." 406 

The word occult is defined as hidden, concealed, secret, 
and esoteric. And an occultist is one who believes in con- 

cealing secrets from others. 

The Masons, it is to be assumed, would rush in to defend 

themselves against such charges. Any secret, hidden or con- 
cealed organization would have to, especially if it was 

discovered that their purposes were not what the average 
citizen believed. And that appears to be exactly what this 
Order has done. 

The traditional explanation offered by Freemasonry as to 
its purpose is this one offered by Henry Clausen, a former 

Sovereign Grand Commander of the Masonic Order. He said 
it was: 

"a particular system of morality, veiled in 
allegory, and illustrated by symbols." 407 

The Masons will only admit certain individuals into their 

initiation ceremonies. Those qualifications are: 

"A candidate for initiation must be a man, free- 

born, unmutilated and of mature age." 408 

There is one more requirement: they must profess a belief 
in a supreme being. 

W.F. Brainard, a Mason in New London, Connecticut, 
gave a speech in 1825 describing the Order he was a member 

of He said: 

"What is Masonry now? It is powerful. It com- 
prises men of rank, wealth, office and talent, in power 

and out of power; and that, in almost every place 

where Power is. of any importance; and it comprises 

among other classes of the community, to the lowest, 

in large numbers, active men, united together, and ca- 

pable of being directed by the efforts of others, so as 
to have the Force of Concert throughout the civilized 

world. 


149 



CHAPTER 19 THE F REE MASONS 


They are distributed too, with the means of 

knowing one another, and the means of keeping secret, 
and the means of cooperating, in the desk — in the 

Legislative Hall ~ on the Bench — in every gathering 

of business ~ in peace and war - among enemies and 

friends — in one place as well as in another! 

So powerful indeed, is it at this time that it fears 
nothing from violence, either public or private, for it 
has every means to learn it in season, to counteract, 

defeat and punish it." 409 

As has been discussed, members of this powerful organiza- 
tion have access to a secret. Included in that secret are plans 

for the future of the world. And whatever those plans are, 
they are kept from the average citizen. 

"Very early in our Masonic career, we are taught 
that Freemasonry is a system of morality, the peculi- 
arities of which are veiled from [the] uninstructed and 

popular world by allegorical treaching [sic: teaching?] 

and symbolic illustration." 4111 

It appears to be a logical conclusion that if the Masons 
had another morality, and if that morality was sound and 
would be of benefit to all the people of the world, you would 
think that they would make it public, instead of concealing it 
inside mysteries and allegories. One can only wonder if the 
reason their morality is kept secret is because their morality 
is not sound and of benefit to the general public. That would 
certainly explain why they want to keep it buried, away from 
the gaze of the citizens of the world. 

Another Mason, George Steinmetz in his book entitled 
FREEMASONRY, ITS HIDDEN MEANING, says: 


"It 

is in 

the ancient symbols 

of Freemasonry 

that 

its real 

secrets 

lie concealed and 

these are 

densely 

veiled to the Mason as to any other. 




The 

most 

profound secrets of 

Masonry 

are 

not 

revealed 

in the 

Lodge at all. They 

belong only 

to 

the 


few." 


150 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


So the secrets of the Masons do not even belong to all of 
the Masons. Some Masons know and some other Masons do 
not know the meanings of the secrets. But the interesting 
thing is that the Masons who do not know are being lied to 
by those who do. Albert Pike confirmed that this statement 

was true by writing this in the book that used to be read by 

all Masons inside the Scottish Rite, Southern Jurisdiction, 

Masonic Order, entitled MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"The Blue degrees [the first three degrees of the 

32] are but the outer court or portico [a covered walk] 

of the Temple. 

Part of the symbols are displayed there to the 

Initiate, but he is intentionally misled by false inter- 

pretations. 

It is not intended that he shall understand them; 

but it is intended that he shall imagine that he shall 

understand them. 

Their true explication is reserved for the Adepts, 
the Princes of Masonry." 412 

The initiate is being lied to by his own fellow Masons! 

One brother is lying to another! Some of the Masons are 
concealing the true meaning of the secrets from other Ma- 
sons. And this is the way that the powerful Masons operate, 

the organization that men of rank, wealth, office and talent 

are joining? 

Pike repeated that position inside the same book, but on 
another page: 

"Masonry conceals its secrets from all except the 

Adepts and Sages, or the elect, and uses false explana- 
tions and misinterpretations of its symbols to mislead 

those who deserve only to be misled; to conceal the 

Truth, which it calls Light, from them, and to draw 

them away from it." 413 

It might be informative at this juncture to identify just 

what an "adept" believed in. Kenneth Mackenzie, a member 
of the Masons, wrote this in his book entitled THE ROYAL 
MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA: 


151 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


"Adept - a name given to the Order of Il- 
luminati." 414 

Was Mr. Pike admitting that only the Adepts, the 

"illuminated Masons," or those who belonged to both organi- 
zations, knew the secret of the Masonic Lodges: that Lucifer 
was a god? 

It would certainly seem so. 

Manly P. Hall also revealed the truth that not all Masons 
understand the meaning of the secrets inside the Temple. He 
wrote this in his book entitled LECTURES ON ANCIENT 
PHILOSOPHY: 

"Freemasonry is a fraternity within a fraternity — 
an outer organization concealing an inner brotherhood 

of the elect. 

it is necessary to establish the existence of 
these two separate yet interdependent orders, the one 

visible and the other invisible. 

The visible society is a splendid camaraderie of 
'free and accepted' men enjoined to devote themselves 

to ethical, educational, fraternal, patriotic, and hu- 
manitarian concerns. 

The invisible society is a secret and most august 
fraternity whose members are dedicated to the service 
of a mysterious arcanum arcandrum [defined as a se- 

cret; a mystery.] 

Those brethren who have essayed to write the 

history of their craft have not included in their dis- 
quisitions [a formal discourse or treatise] the story of 

that truly secret inner society which is to the body 

Freemasonic what the heart is to the body human. 

In each generation only a few are accepted into 

the inner sanctuary of the work .... 

the great initiate -philosophers of Freemasonry 

are ... masters of that secret doctrine which forms the 

invisible foundation of every great theological and ra- 

tional institution." 415 

He further amplified this thought when he wrote these 
comments in another of his books, this one entitled THE 

LOST KEYS OF FREEMASONRY: 


152 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


"The initiated brother realizes that his so-called 

symbols and rituals are merely blinds, fabricated by 

the wise to perpetuate ideas incomprehensible to the 
average individual. 

He also realizes that few Masons of today know 

or appreciate the mystic meaning concealed within 
these rituals." 416 

Other Masonic writers have confirmed that there are two 
classes of Masons. Kenneth Mackenzie added this confirma- 

tion: 


"At the present day there are many secrets not 

usually given, and indeed the condition of Masonic 

education, except among a certain class, is very low. 

There are many good Masons well acquainted 

with the ritual, and even the lectures, but they fail 

from want of taste and opportunity to grasp the 

subtler philosophy of Freemasonry." 417 

The Masons are quick to point out that they do not tell 
even their more intelligent fellow Masons what the secrets 
are; they ask them to figure it out for themselves. But, Pike 
says, they start the process by hinting that the Masons "wor- 

ship" something other than the God of the Bible in the first 
degree. 

Apparently, if the Mason can figure it out for himself just 
who the other Masons worship, he gets to be one of them. 

This is what Pike wrote in MORALS AND DOGMA; 

"It is for each individual Mason to discover the 

secret of Masonry .... 

Masonry does not inculcate her truths. She states 
them, once and briefly; or hints them, perhaps, darkly; 
or interposes a cloud between them and eyes that 

would be dazzled by them. 

That rite [the Scottish Rite] raises a corner of the 

veil, even in the Degree of Apprentice [the first degree 
of the Blue lodge] for it there declares that Masonry is 

, • H 418 

a worship. 

Other clues that Masonry is not a fraternity of phil- 

bhropic gentlemen who meet on a regular basis for fel- 


153 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


lowship and works of charity are contained in other parts of 
Pike's book MORALS AND DOGMA, or in the writings of 
Manly P. Hall: 

"Every Lodge is a Temple 419 

"Masonry is a worship." 420 

"... Masonry is a religious and philosophic body." 

"Every Masonic Lodge is a temple of religion; and 
its teachings are instructions in religion." 422 

Since Masonry claims that it is a religion, it would be 
helpful to the student to define the term and see if Masonry 
meets the requirements. 

A religion is defined as being either of these definitions: 

1. A belief in a divine power to be obeyed and wor- 
shipped as the creator and ruler of the universe. 

2. Any system of beliefs, practices, ethical values 
resembling, suggestive of or likened to such a 
system. 

By the second definition, the Masons certainly qualify as 
a religion. But the Masons themselves deny that this is so. 

This view was presented in 1986 by Bill Mankin, a 32nd 

degree member of the Masonic Lodge, on a series of television 
programs concerning the Masons. The discussions were part 

of a television program called The John Ankerberg Show. Mr. 
Mankin said: 

"We [the Masons] have no creed, no confession of 
faith in a doctrinal statement. We have no theology; 

we have no ritual of worship. We have no symbols 

that are religious in the sense of symbols found in a 
church or a synagogue. 

Our symbols are related to the development of 

character of the relationship of man to men. They are 

working tools to be used in the building of life." 423 

The word religion is defined in another dictionary as: 


154 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


1. A belief in a divine or superhuman power to be 

obeyed and worshiped as the creator and ruler of 

the universe. 

2. Any specific system of belief in conduct and rit- 
ual, often involving a code of ethics and a philos- 

ophy. 

So, by the definition of a religion contained in either 
dictionary, the Masons are a religion. That can be determined 

by a brief review of what the Masons do inside their temple. 

1. The Masons worship a god, (they call him the 

Great Architect of the Universe); 

2. They pray to this god inside their temples. For 

instance, during the Entered Apprentice degree, 
the first of the three inside the Blue Lodge, the 

Worshipful Master, the equivalent of the 
President of the lodge, prays: 

"Vouchsafe thine aid. Almighty Father of the 
Universe ...." 424 

3. They believe that this god in their temples hears 

prayer. The same prayer in the Entered Appren- 

tice degree continues: 

"... and grant that this Candidate for Masonry 
may dedicate his life to thy service." 425 

4. They believe that their worship inside the temple 

will grant them immortal life. In the pamphlet 
prepared by the John Ankerberg Show, they 
quoted the Masonic manual which describes what 

the white apron worn by the Mason stands for: 

"He who wears the lambskin as a badge of a 

Mason is thereby continually reminded of purity 
of life and conduct which is essentially necessary 

to his gaining admission into the Celestial Lodge 

Above." 426 


155 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


5. They believe 

in the 

one god 

who is common 

to all 

religions. 

The 

same 

statement 

of the 

Grand 

Lodge of Maryland continues: 




"Thus, 

Masonry 

is 

a great 

fellowship of 

men 

of all 

countries 

and 

ages who are capable of 

discovering 

in 

the 

religious 

teachings of 

all 

humanity. 

some 

of 

them 

crude indeed. 

the 

fundamental 

truth 

COMMON 

TO THEM 

ALL: 

that God 

is the 

Father of all mankind 

tt 427 

[emphasis by author] 






Any student of worldwide religions is inevitably drawn to 

this conclusion: every religion has a different view of God. 
Every religion conceives the duties and functions of their 
deity to be different; and some religions do not even believe 
in one God, (some have many gods). But there is one thing 
that is probably common to all religions: all possess a belief 
that there is a force of evil in the world. 

The Bible calls this force Lucifer, Satan, or the devil. 

Henry Clausen, the Past Sovereign Grand Commander of 

the Scottish Rite, told his readers in his book entitled 
CLAUSEN'S COMMENTARIES ON MORALS AND DOGMA 
that there was only one god, and that one of the purposes of 

Masonry is to teach its initiates just who that one god is: 

"The true knowledge of the One Supreme Deity is 


So the Masons openly state that there is only one god, 
and that this god is somehow different than the one that is 
worshipped by the religions of the world. 

If the student of Masonry will read the statement of the 
Grand Lodge of Maryland again, with the thought that the 
religions of the world do not agree on the definition of their 
god, but do agree that there is a force of evil, the statement 
starts to make some sense. 

As has already been illustrated in this study, the Masons 
consider Lucifer to be a god. 

6. The Masons believe in a life after death. They be- 

lieve in a "celestial lodge above." 


156 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


7. The Masons believe in a place where that life 
continues after death. During the initiation 
ceremony into the first degree of the Blue Lodge, 

the initiate is told: 

"I'd like to present you. Brother (name), with 

this lambskin, or white leather apron, which is 

an emblem of innocence .... He therefore who 
wears a lambskin as a badge of a Mason is con- 

tinually reminded of that purity of life and 
conduct which is essentially necessary to his 
gaining ADMISSION INTO THE CELESTIAL 
LODGE ABOVE." [emphasis by author.] 429 

But, even with all of this contrary evidence, the Masons 
continue to deny that Masonry is a religion separate from 

any other. 

And, to further compound the problem, the Masons 

continue to teach that their religion is a continuation of 
another ancient worship. Albert Pike stated in his book 
MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"... the Sun, Moon and Mercury ... are still the 

three Great Lights of a Masonic Lodge." 

And then he told the reader just what (or who) these 

lights represent: 

"The three lights represent the Sun, the Moon 

and Mercury; Osiris, Isis, and Horns." 430 

So one of the lights inside the Masonic temple represents 

Osiris, the sun-god. There are other connections inside the 

Masonic religion back to the god of the Egyptians: 

"Osiris, Adoni, Adonis, Atys, and the other Sun- 

Gods - had also a tomb, and a religious initiation; one 

of the principal ceremonies of which consisted in 

clothing the Initiate with the skin of a white lamb. 

And in this we see the origin of the apron of white 

sheep-skin used in Masonry." 431 


157 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


It is to be remembered that the Masons teach "the true 
knowledge of the One Supreme Deity." Is it possible to infer 
from their own words that they know just who that "Supreme 
Deity" is? Pike admitted that his writings concealed a secret 
mystery. He wrote this about the words in his book entitled 
MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"If you reflect, my Brother, ... you will no doubt 

suspect that some secret meaning was concealed in 

these words." 432 

The evidence that Mr. Pike was concealing the truth 
about this secret from his fellow Masons has been presented 
in previous chapters of this study. And the fact that the 
Masons do not want the general public to know the truth 

about this hidden god is confirmed by at least two cir- 

cumstances. 

1. Mr. Pike stated that his book was not "intended 
for the world at large," 433 and 

2. A copy of the book that turned up in a used book 

store had the following phrase stamped on the in- 
side cover: "esoteric book, for Scottish Rite use 

only; to be returned upon withdrawal or death of 

recipient." 

So, whatever secret is contained inside his book. Pike does 
not want it to be known by either the public or by his fellow 
Masons. 

Albert Pike taught his readers a simple, but very pro- 
found Masonic truth on the bottom of page 324 in his 

MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"What is Superior is as that which is Inferior, 
and what is Below is as that which is Above, to form 
the Marvels of Unity." 434 

Notice that Pike capitalizes the words "Superior," "Infer- 
ior," "Above," and "Below," just as one would do when capi- 

talizing the name of a deity. It appears that one of the things 
that is reversed is the understanding of the nature of the 

deity. 


158 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


That teaching was just a few paragraphs after another 
statement of Pike's: 

"The conviction of all men that God is good led to a 
belief in a Devil, the fallen Lucifer or lightbearer 43 

Applying the principle that was taught in the last para- 
graph to the sentence contained above it, it is possible to see 
that Pike considers Lucifer to be the God that is good, and 
that the God of the Bible is the devil, the god of evil. That is 
what that statement about "that which is Below is as that 
which is Above" means. That means that the God in the 
heavens is the god that is below, and the god who is below is 
the god in the heavens. 

So the Masons do believe in a god: it is in the fallen 
lightbearer, Lucifer. There can be no other reasonable ex- 
planation of what Mr. Pike just wrote. 

And that thought will continue to be developed as this 
study continues. 

Even though the Masons continue to publicly deny that 

their Order is a religion, they say it is in some of their wri- 
tings. One example that this is so comes from the pen of 
Albert Mackey, a Mason, in his ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF 

FREEMASONRY: 

"Look at its ancient landmarks, its sublime cere- 
monies, its profound symbols and allegories — all 

inculcating religious observance, and who can deny 
that it is eminently a religious institution; and on this 

ground mainly, if not alone, should the religious 

Masons defend it." 436 

He repeats that claim in another book he wrote entitled 

TEXTBOOK OF MASONIC JURISPRUDENCE: 
"The truth is, that Masonry is undoubtedly a 

religious institution, its religion being of that universal 

kind in which all men agree." 

Another writer, apparently not a Mason, shed a little light 
on the nature of the worship of the Masons. He wrote that 


159 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


they worshipped the Egyptian trinity of Isis, Homs, and 
Osiris: 


"... God has seventy-two known names and one 
ineffable name, unknown to man .... 


The supreme isiac 

initiation 

has 

as its 

sole 

purpose the transmission 
stituted the Word. 

of this 

name. 

which 

con- 

Freemasonry in its 
very close to the Isaic rites. 

first three 

degrees 

is certainly 


Few Masons are aware that their work within the 

temple is carried out under the aegis of the Egyptian 

trinity ." 438 


But Albert Pike apparently was one of those Masons who 
did know. He wrote: 

"Masonry is: 

identical with the Ancient Mysteries." 
a successor of the Mysteries." 440 

Manly P. Hall repeated the claim: 

"... in Masonry, the ancient religious and 
philosophic principles still survive." 441 

Another writer, but in this case apparently not a member 
of the Masons, wrote this in his book entitled SERPENT IN 
THE SKY: 

"Now, the wisdom of the Egyptian Temple did not 

survive Egypt intact, or in its original form, but 

percolated down to our day through more or less 

underground groups without any apparent central 
organization — ... Freemasons ... and others." 442 

And Henry Clausen, the Past Sovereign Grand 

Commander, also confirmed that Masonry is connected to the 
ancient mysteries: 

"We look toward a transformation into a New Age 
using, however, the insight and wisdom of the ancient 

. ■■ 44T 

mystics. 


160 



CHAPTER 19 THE FREEMASONS 


It appears that the evidence presented so far has allowed 
the student of Masonry to draw the following conclusions: 

1. The Ancient Mysteries, carried down to some of 

the worships of today, worshipped a sun-god, a 

veiled reference to Lucifer, the fallen angel of the 

Bible. This worship of the devil was concealed 

throughout the generations by giving him a 
different name. 

2. There were two worships inside each sun-god 

temple: one for the average citizen, and another 

for those who had been initiated into the true 

meanings of the worship: that their god was in 

truth Lucifer. 

3. By the Masons own admissions, they too worship 

the god of the ancients: the sun-god, Lucifer, 

known as the devil of the Bible. 

4. The Masons of today conceal the truth of whom 

they are worshipping from their brothers inside 
the lodge by intentionally lying to them. 

5. And probably the overwhelming majority of Ma- 
sons today do not know this truth, which can be 

inferred from the fact that the Adept Masons 
admit that they conceal this truth from their 
fellow Masons. 

And men of rank, wealth, office and power continue to 

join. 


161 



Chapter 20 
Those Who Object 


But are there others who know that certain Masons 
worship Lucifer? Are there others who know that the Masons 
want to bring about the New World Order? Are there 
warnings being issued for any one who will listen? 

Captain William Morgan, A Mason who exposed the 
secrets of the Masonic Lodge in 1826 in his book entitled 

FREEMASONRY EXPOSED, wrote this: 

"The bane [defined as the ruin] of our civil 
institutions is to be found in Masonry, already 

powerful and daily becoming more so. I owe my 

country an exposure of its dangers." 4 

The publication of this book was not looked upon with 
favor by the Masons after it was made public. The Captain 
paid with his life for his attempts to warn America. The 

introduction to the original edition identified his murderers as 
being the Masons themselves. It said: 


162 



CHAPTER 20 THOSE WHO OBJECT 


"... the author ... was kidnapped and carried away 
... by a number of Freemasons ...." 445 

The Masons, however, do not believe that Captain Morgan 
was murdered. Albert G. Mackey in his ENCYCLOPAEDIA 
says this: 

"There are various myths of his disappearance and 

subsequent residence in other countries. 

it is certain that there is no evidence of his 
death that would be admitted in a Court of Probate." 446 

Even though the Masons deny that the Captain was 

murdered, the newspapers of the day reported that his 

murder was fact, and it was widely accepted in America that 
members of the Masons were responsible for his death. As a 
result of the national furor over the killing, this nation's first 

third political party, called the Anti-Masons Party, sprang up 
as a protest to the activities of the Masonic Order. 

A former Mason and Minister from New York, William 
Preston Vaughn, also attempted to warn America in 1830: 

"If the lodge went unchecked, the United States 

would have a Masonic monarchy for its government, a 
Masonic church, a Masonic way to a Masonic heaven, 
and blood and massacre and destruction to all who 

subscribe not to the support of the Monarch." 447 

John Quincy Adams, the sixth President of the United 

States, also had strong feelings about the Masonic Order. He 
wrote this in 1833: 

"I do conscientiously and sincerely believe that 

the Order of Freemasonry, if not the greatest, is one 
of the greatest moral and political evils under which 

the Union is now laboring." 448 

He continued by saying that Masonry was: 

"a conspiracy of the few against the equal rights 
of the many; anti-Republican [here he was not refer- 


163 



CHAPTER 20 THOSE WHO OBJECT 


ring to the Republican Party, but to the concept of a 
republic as a form of government] in its sap [meaning 

vitality.]" 449 

"I am prepared to complete the demonstration be- 

fore God and man, that the Masonic oath, obligations 
and penalties cannot by any possibility be reconciled to 

the laws of morality, of Christianity, or of the land." 450 

Millard Fillmore, the thirteenth President of the United 
States, made this statement: 

"The Masonic fraternity tramples upon our rights, 

defeats the administration of justice, and bids defiance 

to every government which it cannot control." 451 

Another who spoke out against the Masons was Ulysses 
S. Grant, the eighteenth President, who said this: 

"All secret oath-bound political parties are 
dangerous to any nation, no matter how pure or how 

patriotic the motives and principles which first bring 

them together. " 452 

John Marshall, the Chief Justice of the Supreme Court in 

the early days of this nation, was a member of the Masonic 

Lodge. Apparently he changed his mind and later recanted. 

He made this charge: 

"The institution of Masonry ought to be 
abandoned as one capable of much evil, and incapable 

of producing any good which might not be effected by 
safe and open means." 4 3 

Another warning came from John G. Stevens, a Baptist 

clergyman, who denounced his Masonic ties by publishing his 
views in AN INQUIRY INTO THE NATURE AND 
TENDENCY OF SPECULATIVE MASONRY. Included in his 
writings were these conclusions: 

"Masonry was a state within a state and that one day 

Masons would overthrow the democratic government of 

the United States and would crown one of their 'grand 
kings' as ruler of this nation." 454 


164 



CHAPTER 20 THOSE WHO OBJECT 


Another minister who came out of Masonic Order was 
Charles G. Finney, who left the Order when Captain Morgan 
was murdered. He wrote a little pamphlet entitled "WHY I 


LEFT FREEMASONRY," in which he 
tions: 

made 

these 

observa- 

tt 

in taking these oaths I 

had 

been 

grossly 

deceived 

and imposed upon. Indeed 

I 

came 

to the 

deliberate 

conclusion that my oaths 

had 

been 

procured 

by fraud 

and misrepresentations; 

that 

the 

institution 


was in no respect what I had been informed it was; 
and ... it has become more and more irresistibly plain 
to me that Masonry is highly dangerous to the State, 

and in every way injurious to the Church of Christ." 455 

But perhaps the most ringing criticism of the Masons 
came from Pope Leo XIII, the Catholic Pope from 1878 to 

1903. He wrote these words in an encyclical entitled HU- 
MANUS GENUS: 

"Their ultimate purpose: namely, the overthrow of 

that whole religious and political order of the world 

which the Christian teaching has produced, and the 

substitution of a new state of things in accordance 
with their ideas, of which the foundations and laws 

shall be drawn from mere naturalism." 456 

The Pope went on later in his Encyclical to explain what 
he meant by the term Naturalism: 

"... the fundamental doctrine of the naturalists 
is that human nature and human reason ought in all 

things to be the mistress and guide." 457 

"... the naturalists teach ... that marriage belongs 
to the genus of commercial contracts, which can 
rightly be revoked by the will of those who made 
them, and that the civil rulers of the State have power 
over the matrimonial bond." 438 


165 

CHAPTER 20 THOSE WHO OBJECT 


So the Pope correctly noted that the Masons were com- 
mitted to creating a New World Order: they wanted to create 
a "new state of things" by overthrowing the "whole religious 
and political order." Then he identified the new world they 
wanted to replace it with: one based upon reason. 

He continued his discussion of why he was concerned 
about the Masons: 

their endeavor to obtain equality and 
community of all goods by the destruction of every 

distinction of rank and property." 459 

Here the Pope states that the Masons share the vision of 
Karl Marx, the Communist, who wanted to "abolish private 

property." The Pope said that the Masons wanted to destroy 
"the distinctions of property." 

The Pope's fate after he wrote these warnings to the 
world was perhaps revealed in a Time magazine article on 

June 18, 1984. The article said this was what might have 

happened to him: 

"... there were the whispers about how poison 
killed Leo XIII in 1903 ...." 460 

Another who attempted to warn the world about the 
Masonic Order was Bernard Fay, who wrote a book entitled 
REVOLUTION AND FREEMASONRY. This is why he shared 
his concern: 

"The New Masonry did not aim to destroy 

churches, but, with the aid of the progress of ideas, it 
prepared to replace them." 461 

According to Mr. Fay, the Masonic religion wanted to 
replace the Christian religion! 

Another writer on the subject of the Masons is Arthur 
Edward Waite, who wrote this in his book entitled THE 

ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY: 

"The Latin Church [apparently meaning the 
Catholic Church] has agreed to regard Freemasonry 
as ... those forces which are at work in the world 
against the Church in that world." 462 


166 



CHAPTER 20 THOSE WHO OBJECT 


But more current examples of Christian churches warning 
its members, as well as the world, can be located. It is not 
just the Catholic Church which is concerned about member- 

ship in the Masonic Order. 

The Orthodox Presbyterian Church met at Rochester, New 
York, on June 2-5, 1942, and they issued a report on the 
Ancient Order of Free and Accepted Masons. The following 
was part of their conclusions: 

"... Masonry is a religious institution and as such 

is definitely anti-Christian. ... membership in the Ma- 

sonic fraternity is inconsistent with Christianity." 463 

Furthermore, another church body, this time the Lutheran 
Church-Missouri Synod, passed a resolution in 1975 calling 
for "specialized literature for persons who belong to anti- 

Christian sects and cults." One of the six booklets that 
resulted from the call was one on the Freemasons called 
"HOW TO RESPOND TO THE LODGE." 

But one of the more dramatic studies of the Masons 
occured a short time ago in England, when the Church of 
England released a report on them after a summer session 
examined the Order. The article that appeared in the Arizona 
Daily Star, released by the Associated Press on July 14, 1987, 
said that: 

'"Church of England leaders overwhelmingly 

endorsed a report yesterday that called Freemason 
rituals blasphemous ....’ 

The report: Freemasonry and Christianity: Are 

They Compatible?" said some Christians found Ma- 

sonic rituals disturbing and ’positively evil.’" 464 

Perhaps the best summary of the whole concern about the 
Masonic Order came from an ex-Mason, Edward Ronayne, in 
his book entitled THE MASTER'S CARPET. Mr. Ronayne 
said this: 

"Masonry ... is a system which has not the least 
shadow of support, either from history, from scripture, 

from reason, or from common sense, but, in fact, is 
diametrically opposed to them all." 465 


167 



CHAPTER 20 THOSE WHO OBJECT 

But, men of rank, wealth, office and power still join it. 


168 



Chapter 2 1 
Albert Pike 


One of the Masonic writers frequently cited in this study 
as being an expert on Masonic affairs has been Albert Pike, 
the Sovereign Grand Commander of the Southern Jurisdiction 
of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry from 1859 to his death in 
1891. So it might be helpful to know a little about his past. 

He has been described by fellow Masons in a rather 
flattering manner. Carl Claudy has written this: 

"Pike was ... one of the greatest geniuses Free- 
masonry has ever known. He was ... a teacher of the 
hidden truths of Freemasonry. 466 

Manly P. Hall has written: 

"Albert Pike, who has gathered ample evidence of 

the excellence of the doctrines promulgated by the 
mysteries ...." 467 


169 



CHAPTER 21 ALBERT PIKE 


And Dr. Robert Watts, a fellow 33rd degree Mason, made 

some very complimentary comments about him as well. He 
said that he was: 

"... the world's greatest Masonic scholar." 

And he praised: 

"... the tremendous genius of Albert Pike." 468 

Perhaps Pike's finest accomplishment for the Masonic 

cause was his book entitled MORALS AND DOGMA, pub- 

lished in 1871 by the Supreme Council of the Thirty -Third 
Degree for the Southern Jurisdiction of the United States. 

There is some disagreement as to whether or not this book is 
to be read by all Masons seeking higher degrees inside the 
Masonic Order. This author was told by members of the 

Masons in Tucson in 1985 that the book was still given to all 

Masons for their perusal. However, Rex Hutchens, a 32nd 

degree Mason, and the author who wrote a new book entitled 
A BRIDGE TO LIGHT for the Masons in 1988, said this in 
his book: 

"MORALS AND DOGMA was traditionally given 

to the candidate as a gift upon his receipt of the 14th 

Degree." 469 

His use of the word "was" implies that it is no longer 
given to the Masonic candidate. 

However, Mr. Hutchens had words of praise for it. He 
wrote: 

"Contained within its pages are some of the most 
profound teachings of the Rite." 470 

Henry Clausen, one of Mr. Pike's successors as Sovereign 
Grand Commander of the Masons, also praised his book: 

"... an inspired and classical compilation of Pike's 

own research ...." 47 

Other Masonic scholars who have come after him have 
revered his name. This comment came from Albert Mackey: 


170 



CHAPTER 21 ALBERT PIKE 


"His standing as a Masonic author and historian 

was most distinguished, and his untiring zeal was 

without a parallel." 472 

The Masonic Order as a body must have thought highly 
of Mr. Pike as well because they permitted him to rewrite the 
Scottish Rite rituals. 

But perhaps the greatest example of the influence of this 
man was reported by General Gordon Granger, who had an 
occasion to meet with both Mr. Pike and then President 

Andrew Johnson, a fellow Mason. This event occurred in 
March of 1867, and was later testified to by General Granger 
in front of the House Judiciary Committee. They were investi- 
gating charges that President Johnson should be impeached, 
and they felt that the General's recollections of that meeting 
might be helpful. 

The General told the committee: 

"They talked a great deal about Masonry. More 
about that than anything else. And from what they 
talked about between them, I gathered that he 
[meaning Pike] was the superior of the President in 

Masonry. I understood from the conversation that the 

President was his subordinate in Masonry. That was 

all there was to it ...." 473 

But that wasn't all there was to it. On June 20, 1867, the 
President received a delegation of Scottish Rite officials in his 
bedroom at the White House where he received the 4th 
through the 32nd Degrees of the Scottish Rite. 

But the important revelation is that the General had tes- 
tified that the President of the United States was the 

subordinate to Albert Pike in Masonry ! 

And the importance of that fact can be gathered from the 

oath the initiate takes during the third degree, called the 

Master Mason's degree, inside the Blue Lodge. The initiate 

takes the following oath: (emphasis by author) 

"Furthermore, I DO PROMISE and swear THAT I 

WILL OBEY ALL regular signs, SUMMONSES, or to- 
kens GIVEN, handed out, sent, or thrown TO ME 

FROM THE HAND OF A BROTHER MASTER MA- 


UI 



CHAPTER 21 ALBERT PIKE 


SON or from the body of a just and lawfully 
constituted lodge of such 474 

The capitalized words when taken together read: "I do 

promise that I will obey all summonses given to me from the 

hand of a brother Master Mason." 

That means that the President of the United States had 
to take orders from Albert Pike should he order him to do so! 

The significance of that startling proposition will become 

more evident as additional evidence of just what Mr. Pike be- 
lieved in is presented in further chapters of this study. 

There is a hierarchy in the United States! 

And Presidents who are Masons take orders from other 

Masons! 


172 



Chapter 22 
Hiram Abif 


The Masons have wrapped their initiation ceremony 

around a legend involving an individual named Hiram Abif. 
The Masons have constructed this legend themselves from 
two brief references to him in the Bible. 

This information on Hiram comes from Mackey's ENCY- 
CLOPAEDIA: 

"When King Solomon was about to build a temple 
to Jehovah [called Solomon's temple,] the difficulty of 

obtaining skillful workmen to superintend and to 
execute the architectural part of the undertaking was 

such, that he found it necessary to request of his 

friend and ally, Hiram, King of Tyre, the use of some 
of his most able builders. Hiram [the King] willingly 

complied with his request [and dispatched] Hiram out 

of Tyre." 475 


173 



CHAPTER 22 HIRAM ABIF 


The Bible, in the 1st Book of Kings 7:13, says that Hiram 
Abif was: 

"... a widow's son, ... and was filled with wisdom 

and understanding." 

The Masons claim that Hiram Abif was a Master Mason, 
and possessed the secrets of the degree, secrets that he could 

not share with his fellow workers. The reason for that was 
because the other workers at the Temple were "apprentice 
Masons," not entitled to a share of the secrets of the Master 
Mason. 

"Fifteen Fellow Crafts [masons but not possessors 
of the secrets] seeing the temple about to be completed 
and being desirous of obtaining the secrets of a Master 

Mason ... whereby they might travel into foreign 

countries, work and receive Masters' wages, entered 

into a horrid conspiracy to extort [the secrets] from 

[the Master] or take his life. 

twelve of them recanted, the other three, 

however persisted in their murderous design." 476 

According to the legend, Hiram Abif was slain by these 
three "ruffians" at "high twelve," because he refused to share 

the secrets. The three ruffians were named Jubela, Jubelo, 
and lubelum. 

The Masons admit that the death of Hiram is "a purely 

symbolic event ...." Therefore, the student must look else- 

where for an explanation of what his symbolic death means. 

In addition, they further admit that the story is not based 
completely on the two brief mentions of Hiram in the Bible: 

"Thus the Biblical account of the story of Hiram 

is occasionally at variance with the legend as told in 
Masonic literature." 477 

The remaining parts of the legend of Hiram Abif are not 

pertinent to this study, so they will not be discussed here. 

However, it will be helpful for further discussion in 

later chapter of this book for the following comments to be 

added at this juncture. 


174 



CHAPTER 22 HIRAM ABIF 


Rex Hutchens, a 32nd degree Mason, has placed an 

important piece into the puzzle in his book entitled A 

BRIDGE TO LIGHT. He gives his readers this explanation as 
to what the symbolic death of Hiram means: 

"What are the symbolic meanings of the attacks 

upon Hiram? 

Hiram is first accosted at the south gate of the 

Temple where the instrument of the attack is the rule. 

In Greek, the word for a 'rule' whether a measuring 

instrument or a code of conduct, is canon. Thus we see 
the bureaucracy of the early Church establishing the 

Canon Law to regulate conduct. 

This law was to be obeyed with unquestioned 
loyalty, hence it is an apt symbol of the suppression of 

freedom of speech which might question the divinity 

and justice of these laws; therefore Hiram, with the 

rule, is struck where the organs of speech are. 

The instrument of attack at the west gate of the 
Temple was the square ...; it represents the merger of 

civil and religious power intending to control man's 

emotions, telling him not only what he can do but also 
what he can believe. 

Thus Hiram is struck near the heart, the tradi- 

tional seat of the affections. 

The setting maul, an instrument of brute force, is 

a fitting symbol of the blind, unreasoning mob. It fears 
the force of the intellect and seeks the destruction of 
the products of the mind. 

Hiram is killed at the east gate by a blow to the 
head, the seat of the intellect." 478 

So Mr. Hutchens is telling his reader that the "ruffians" 
that killed Hiram Abif were not individuals seeking the 
secrets of Masonry from Hiram, the Master Mason, but were 
concealed symbols of "the Church," the "church and the 
state," and the forces fearing the power of man's "reason." 

This is an amazing revelation! It is rare that the Masons 
share the exact interpretation of their secrets as they have 
done in this instance. Remember that the contents of Mr. 
Hutchens' book have been approved by the Supreme Council 
of the 33rd degree of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry. This 
explanation has official sanction! They want us to know that 


175 



CHAPTER 22 HIRAM ABIF 


the enemies of the Masons are the Church, the State, and 
opposition to "man's reason." 

In another part of his book, Mr. Hutchens provides the 
reader with another explanation of the symbols. This addi- 

tional explanation of the true meaning of the symbols is 
strikingly similar to the first. 

"... the Master Hiram is the symbol of intelli- 
gence, liberty and truth and the assassins are the 

symbols of tyranny, ignorance and intolerance or 
fanaticism." 479 

So he equates the church and the state with tyranny, ig- 
norance, intolerance and fanaticism. As will be shown in 
another part of this study, the Masons have pledged them- 
selves to avenge the death of Hiram! They have pledged 
themselves to destroy the state and the church! 

So, the real purpose of the Masons has been discovered. 
The Masons are not a philanthropic organization out to assist 

men to better themselves. 

They have a hidden purpose. 

And it takes but a little fortitude to discover what that 
purpose is. 

Their purpose is to destroy organized religion, and the 
state, just like the Illuminati and the Communist Party! 

They have said so in their own literature! 

There can be no doubt! 

Additional evidence that the above interpretation of Mr. 
Hutchens' comments is correct will follow. 


176 



Chapter 23 
The Hierarchy 


Alice Bailey, one of the leaders of the New Age 
Movement, reported that she was aware that a group existed 

that she called the Hierarchy that possessed enormous power. 

She wrote that she actually visited this group during one of 

their meetings: 

"... as one of the Masters, unknown to you, re- 
marked at a meeting of Members of the Hierarchy a 

few weeks ago ...." 480 

She further amplified her thoughts on what these indi- 

viduals did: 

"The Hierarchy directs world events ... so that the 

unfolding consciousness may express itself through 

developing and adequate social, political, religious and 

economic world forms. They give direction; They throw 


177 



CHAPTER 23 THE HIERARCHY 


a light; They definitely influence the tide of human 
affairs." 481 

"The Hierarchy receives that esoteric 'Fire of God’ 
which brings to an end cycles, ideologies, organisations 

and civilisations when the due and right time comes." 

482 

According to Miss Bailey, these "Masters" have been 
working for the good of man for: 

"millions of years. 

the Hierarchy has stood in silence behind world 

events, occupied with the following work — a work 

which will eventually be carried on exoterically 
[meaning in the open] instead of esoterically [meaning 
hidden.]" 483 

She wrote an answer to the question of what her sup- 


porters could do to 

"facilitate their work." She 

admitted 

that 

they could: 






"... teach the 

law of 

evolution 

and 

its inevitable 

corollary, perfected men. 
Men must be 

taught that such 

Great 

Souls 

exist. 

and exist entirely 

to serve 

Their 

fellow 

men. 

The 

public must be 

familiarized 

with 

Their 

names 

and 

attributes, with Their work 

and 

purpose. 

and 

men 

must be told that 
vation of the world." 484 

They are 

coming 

forth 

for the 

sal- 


Another hint that the world is not run by the people that 
the public thinks was provided by Manly P. Hall in his book 
entitled THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES: 

"... the sanctuary of wisdom wherein dwell the 
real rulers of the world - the initiated philosophers." 

485 

It appears as if Mr. Hall is indicating that those who 
have been initiated into Lucifer worship are the real rulers of 
the world. 

That is certainly not what the people of the world believe. 


178 



CHAPTER 23 THE HIERARCHY 


But Mr. Hall has actually gone further and identified 
those who truly rule the world. He added this revealing 
thought in his book entitled THE LOST KEYS OF FREE- 
MASONRY: 

"Masonry is an ordainer of kings. Its hand has 

shaped the destinies of worlds." 486 

But, even if the people do not know that their rulers are 
not the visible heads of their governments, Albert Pike 
pointed out that they will soon demand that they be led by 
these people. He wrote in his book entitled MORALS AND 

DOGMA: 

"The World will soon come to us for its Sov- 

ereigns [apparently meaning its governmental leaders] 
and Pontiffs [apparently meaning its religious leaders.] 

We shall constitute the equilibrium of the Uni- 

verse, and be rulers over the Masters of the World." 487 

And Manly P. Hall repeated the thought: the people will 

be soon asking that the illuminated ones rule the world: 

"The criers of the Mysteries speak again, bidding 

all men welcome to the House of Light. 

The great institution of materiality has failed. 

Religion wanders aimlessly in the maze of theo- 

logical speculation. 

Only the illumined reason can carry the under- 

standing part of man upward to the light." 488 

Private property (called "materiality" by Mr. Hall) has 

failed. Religion has not succeeded in solving man's problems. 
The people will soon demand that someone else with a new 
get of solutions step forward. 

And those with the Light of Lucifer are waiting to step 
forward to rule. 

There is no adequate explanation as to why some people 
want to rule others. But history is replete with individuals, 
groups, organizations, nations, and conspiracies, etc., all of 
whom have wanted to rule over others. One satisfactory 


179 



CHAPTER 23 THE HIERARCHY 


answer as to why this is so comes from a book written by 
B.F. Skinner entitled WALDEN TWO. Mr. Skinner has his 
alter ego declare: 


"I've had only one idea in my life — the idea of 

having my own way. ’Control’ expresses it - the 

control of human behavior. 

... it was a frenzied, selfish desire to dominate. 

I remember the rage I used to feel when a certain 
prediction went awry. I could have shouted at the 

subjects of my experiments, ’Behave! Behave as you 
ought!’" 489 


The world knows that there are people who have desired 

power over the lives of others. History is strewn with the 

carnage of those who wanted to rule the world. 

Masons, believers in the New Age Movement, the Commu- 
nists, the Illuminati and others want to control human be- 
havior. The moral mind of the population in general cannot 
comprehend this desire for power; all that the citizens of the 
world can do is become aware of that strong compulsion, and 
to try to prevent those who desire power over others from 
gaining control. 

The New Age appears to be on schedule! And those who 

are anxious to lead the world of the future are preparing 

themselves for the task. 


180 



Chapter 24 
Masonic Obligations 


The Scottish Rite of the Freemasons has a total of 33 init- 
iation ceremonies, one for each of the first 32 earned degrees, 
and one for the honorary degree, called the 33rd degree. 

Students of the Masons can know just what the initiation 
rites of the various degrees consist of. Many individuals, such 
as Masons, ex-Masons, and historians who have researched 
the Masonic Lodges, have described the exact content of the 
ceremonies in a variety of books and articles. 

For instance, it is possible to know how Masons protect 
themselves from harm by reading part of the oath the Mason 
takes during the initiation ceremony of the Third degree, 
called the Master Mason degree. The initiate binds himself to 
this oath: 

"Further, I will keep a worthy brother Master 

Mason's secrets inviolable, when communicated to and 
received by me as such, murder and treason excepted. 


181 



CHAPTER 24 MASONIC OBLIGATIONS 


Further, I will not cheat, wrong or defraud a 

Master Mason's Lodge, nor a brother of this Degree, 

knowingly, nor supplant him in any of his laudable 

undertakings, but will give him due and timely notice, 
that he may ward off all danger." 490 

That means that any Mason who determines that a fellow 
Mason has committed, or is about to commit, a crime, 

"murder and treason excepted," will be oath-bound not to 
report him to the proper authorities. A Mason who tells a 
fellow Mason that he is going to blackmail a non-Mason, can 
know that the hearer will not report him. 

And, if the first Mason learns that the blackmailing Ma- 
son is about to be arrested for his crime, the first Mason 

must report his discovery to the other Mason. 

But these examples of Masonic oaths are but a part of the 
evidence. The student can learn about the other commitments 

that the initiated Mason obligates himself to. 

Another book that explains the obligations that Masons 
assume is one entitled the MASONIC HANDBOOK, and it 
further explains what these commitments are. This written 
manual explains what the Mason should do if he is selected 
on a jury and observes the defendant identifying himself as 
being a member of the Fraternity: 

"If you're on a jury, and the defendant is a 

Mason, and makes the Grand Hailing sign [a secret 

sign that identifies one Mason to another,] you must 

be sure not to bring the Mason guilty, for that would 
bring disgrace upon our order. 

It may be perjury, to be sure, to do this, but then 

you're fulfilling your obligation, and you know if you 

live up to your obligations you'll be free from sin." 

And the HANDBOOK advises the member that it is per- 
missible to cheat or swindle certain people: 

"If you cheat, wrong, or defraud any other society 
or individual, it is entirely your own business. 

If you cheat the Government even. Masonry can- 
not and will not touch you, but be very careful not to 
cheat, wrong or defraud a brother Mason or a lodge, 


182 



CHAPTER 24 MASONIC OBLIGATIONS 


whoever you may defraud; 
and you'll be free from sin." 

live 

up to 

your 

obligation 

And this advice to the 
crimes of murder and treason: 

Mason 

further 

extends 

to the 

"You must conceal all 

the 

crimes 

of your brother 


Masons, except murder and treason, and these only at 

your own option, and should you be summoned as a 

witness against a brother Mason be always sure to 

shield him, prevaricate, don't always tell the whole 

truth in this case, keep his secrets, forget the most 

important points. 

It may be perjury to do this, it is true, but you're 

keeping your obligations, and remember if you live up 

to your obligation strictly, you'll be free from sin." 491 

The Mason also redefines the two words adultery and 

chastity: 

"Furthermore do I promise and swear that I will 

not violate the chastity of a Master Mason's wife, 

mother, sister, or daughter, I knowing them to be 

such, nor suffer it to be done by others, if in my 

power to prevent it." 492 

Critics of this part of the initiation ceremony observe that 
this restriction, in essence, allows the Master Mason to en- 
gage in adultery with any other wife, mother, sister, or 

daughter, just as long as that woman is not connected to 

another Master Mason. It would appear that a better reading 
of that oath would be something like this: 

"Furthermore do I promise and swear that I will 

not violate the chastity of anyone's wife, mother, sister 

or daughter ... especially be they connected to a fellow 
Master Mason." 

But that is not what the oath taken by the Third Degree 
Mason says. That oath implies that permission is given to 
violate any other woman, just as long as they are not con- 
nected to another Master Mason. 


183 



CHAPTER 24 MASONIC OBLIGATIONS 


A brief summary of this advice was offered by Carl 
Claudy in his book entitled INTRODUCTION TO FREE- 
MASONRY. He wrote: 


"We keep our brother's secrets, guilty or innocent. 

It makes no difference in what way our brother 

stumbles. We are not told to stretch forth the hand in 

aid if, and perhaps and but! 

Not for us to judge, to condemn, to admonish 

for us only to put forth our strength unto our failing 

brother at his need without question and without 

„*• t .1 493 


So, the Mason protects his fellow Masons, even if they 
commit murder or treason. And the Masons teach their fellow 
Masons that certain forms of adultery are acceptable. 

As has already been explained, the Mason takes oaths to 
obey orders from his superiors inside the Masonic Order. 

Albert Mackey told all Masons this truth in his book entitled 
THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY under the title 
of "Obedience:" 

"The first duty of every Mason is to obey the 
mandate of the Master. The Masonic rule of obedience 

is like the nautical imperative: 'Obey orders, even if 

you break owners. 

So, the Masons obey orders, protect criminal activities, lie 

if necessary, and are free to commit adultery with anyone 

other than a fellow Mason's wife, child, mother or sister. 

And the Masons claim that their Order is a moral one. 

And the average citizen continues to believe that it 
teaches its members good values. 

And worldwide, men of rank, wealth, office and talent 
continue to join it. 


184 



Chapter 25 
The 33rd Degree 


As has been previously discussed, some of the most 
respected Masonic writers have been awarded the honorary 
33rd Degree. That includes the three most quoted writers in 
this study: Albert Pike, Albert Mackey and Manly P. Hall. 

Mr. Hall has instructed his readers just how important 
the 33rd degree is: 

"Philosophically, the Thirty-third degree of the 
Ancient and Accepted Scottish Rite represents the in- 
nermost sanctuary of Masonic mysticism." 495 

The 33rd degree is reportedly the smallest circle of the 
entire Masonic Lodge, having the least number of members of 
any degree inside the Lodge. It is believed by many that this 
is where the ultimate power resides. In fact, the 33rd Degree 
Council, the one that resides in Washington D.C., claims to 
be The Mother Council of the World, and The Mother Juris- 
diction of the World. 


185 



CHAPTER 25 THE 3 3RD DEGREE 


One of the reasons why this degree is so important is be- 
cause it appears that it possesses the knowledge of the final 
secret of the Masons. In fact, the candidate receiving the 32nd 
Degree is told that "he still has not reached the light." 496 

One of the symbols explaining this truth to the 33rd 
degree Mason is the symbol of this degree: the Phoenix bird. 
The dictionary defines the Phoenix bird as an Egyptian myth, 
a beautiful, lone bird which lived in the Arabian desert for 
500 years and then consumed itself in fire, rising renewed 
from the ashes to start another long life. 

The Phoenix bird is dramatically depicted on the cover of 
Albert Pike's book entitled MORALS AND DOGMA. It shows 
up as well on the covers of pamphlets circulated by the 33rd 
degree Masons. It is an object of jewelry worn around the 
neck by 33rd degree Masons. 

The Masons know what the symbol means. 

Manly P. Hall tells his readers that: 

"the Phoenix [bird] is the symbol of the Reborn in 

Wisdom." 497 

And that: 

"the phoenix [bird] was regarded as sacred to the 


So the Phoenix bird is a symbol of the sun, and of the re- 
birth of man into a new religion: the religion where wisdom 
and reason become god. 

Others in their writings have indicated that they also un- 
derstand the symbology of the Phoenix. Fred Gittings, in his 
book entitled SECRET SYMBOLISM IN OCCULT ART, wrote 
this: 


"the 

phoenix 

bird 

will live 

for a 

period of 

five 

hundred 

years, at 

the 

end of which it 

builds itself a 

nest of 

precious spices. The 

nest 

completed. 

the 

phoenix 

sings a 

doleful song and 

then 

flaps its 

wings 

to set the nest on fire. 






The 

bird is 

soon 

burned to 

ashes. 

and from 

this 

mass of 

carbon 

there 

miraculously 

springs 

to life a 

new 


phoenix. 


186 



CHAPTER 25 THE 3 3RD DEGREE 


we may see in it [this myth] certain ideas 

which must have appealed to them [the occultists.] 

From the ashes of burned material forms there 

could spring forth new life." 

... the phoenix ... is linked with the Sun ...." 499 

The phoenix bird symbolizes a rebirth, not only of an indi- 
vidual inside the Masonic religion but also of a new civili- 

zation arising out of the ashes of the ruined one. According to 
this symbol, the world has been destroyed by the religious 

teachings of God, and as soon as these beliefs are eliminated 

from the world, a new civilization will be built upon a new 

religion. That religion will be constructed on a belief in the 

unrestricted use of man's reason. 

This appears to be the true meaning of the Phoenix bird 

utilized as a symbol by the 33rd degree Masons. 

But it appears that there is one more secret of the Ma- 
sonic Order and it is taught to the initiates of the 33rd de- 
gree. This explanation of the final secret is one that is not 

available to any of the other 32 degrees. It appears that this 

secret is only hinted at in these other degrees, but is actually 

described to at least some of the initiates of the 33rd degree. 

Evidence has been presented in previous chapters that the 
Masons conceal the fact that they are out to avenge the mur- 

der of their legendary hero, Hiram Abif. Their writers have 
told their readers that the three assassins of this Master 

Mason are described as being actual individuals in the actual 

rituals, but are in truth symbols of the real assassins, the 

institutions of the church and the state. So the real goal of 

the Masons is the actual destruction of organized religion and 
national governments. 

Rex Hutchens, a 32nd Degree Mason, has written simply 

to make that point clear in his book entitled A BRIDGE TO 
LIGHT. He explained that these statements were true: 

"The axe [used as a symbol in the 22nd degree] 
should remind the Mason of the march of civilization 

and progress which required him to hew the poisonous 
trees of intolerance, bigotry, superstition, uncharitable- 
ness and idleness to let in the light of truth and 

reason upon the human mind." M 


187 

CHAPTER 25 THE 33RD DEGREE 


According to this position, mankind's problem is that he 
has not been allowed free exercise of his "reason" by a God 
who restricts man with a series of "Thou shalts" and "Thou 
shalt nots." If religion were out of the way, the "illuminated 
mind" of the super-intelligent could build a paradise here on 
earth. The unrestricted use of man's mind is the solution to 
the problems of the earth. 

According to this view, religion has been the source of all 
of man's problems. All that must be done is to abolish religi- 
on and the world will be a paradise. That is the true 
meaning of Mr. Hutchens' writings. 

He then explains what the ebony crucifix utilized in the 

18th Degree means: 

"The ebony crucifix (black, meaning evil, dark-ness) 

represents the world's treatment of those who strive to 

make known the truth. 

The Lost Word, one recalls, is a representative of 
many things - the loss of reason, intellect and the mor- 

al sense and the loss of a true conception of Deity. In 
the world represented in this apartment, Man has made 
not only God, but the Devil, in his own image." 501 

According to this theory, God is a figment of man's mind. 

He doesn't exist. If God doesn't exist, what mankind calls 
religion is fictional. Man does not need religion; in fact, 

religion has caused immense problems all over the world. 
When religion disappears, man can use his mind to solve 
man's problems. Reason will discover man's morality, and all 
of the problems of the past will disappear. 

Mr. Hutchens then went on to explain what the axe dis- 
played in the 30th degree meant: 

"The Great Order (Templars) naturally revolted 
against a Church which demanded of its members an 

absolute surrender of the reason as well as of the 


Once again, the church restricts mankind by not allowing 
him to obey his instincts or base passions. Religion teaches 
that these must be kept in check by a moral code, one that is 
given to him through the Bible. For instance, religion teaches 


188 



CHAPTER 25 THE 3 3RD DEGREE 


that man is truly free if he does not take the life of his 
fellow man, steal his neighbor's property, take his neighbor's 
wife, and if he conducts himself in all of his dealings with 
honesty and integrity. 

According to the Masons, this teaching of God restricts 
mankind's "reason as well as his will." They feel that this is 
an intolerable situation and remedies must be sought. But 
since many in the world would not wish to willingly give up 
their religious views, and would rebel if they discovered that 
others are seeking to destroy their religion, the conspirators 

have to meet in secret. Those with these plans must surround 
themselves with others who are not aware of their goals so 
that they can deny that their activities are what they truly 
are. So the conspirators work inside secret organizations, 
keeping the truth from their fellow members, and only teach- 
ing a few individuals the true goals of their secret society. 

This is the true meaning of what Mr. Hutchens is writing. 

He went on to explain what the additional symbols of the 
"skull, tiara and crown" meant. These objects are displayed as 
well as the axe in this 30th degree ceremony. Mr. Hutchens 
explained what these objects represent: 

"The crown represents all those kings and em- 
perors who have usurped or abused power, reigned for 

themselves and not for the people and robbed a free 

people of their liberty .... 

The tiara is not a symbol of any particular re- 

ligion or creed [This is not true. On a previous page, 
he states that the tiara is a "Pope's tiara," meaning 
that it is a symbol of the authority of the head of the 

Catholic Church] but of the patron of ignorance and 
ally of despotism [obviously the Pope] which in every 
age has made dupes of men and enslaved humanity 

through fear and superstition." 503 

This thought was continued in another section of his book: 

"... a grave voice announced [during the 30th 

degree initiation ceremony] the duties of a philosopher 
and a Knight Kadosh [the name of the 30th degree.] 

The candidate learns that the Knight Kadosh 'now 

pursues with feet that never tire and eyes that never 


189 



CHAPTER 25 THE 33RD DEGREE 


sleep, the personifications of the three assassins of 

Hiram, the Incarnations of Evil which these three 

were but the tools;" 504 

And Mr. Hutchens amplifies these thoughts with this 

comment in his explanation of the 32nd degree: 

"To be a Soldier of the True Religion [the "True 

Religion" is a knowledge that Lucifer is the true god 

of the world] is to recognize the corruption of the true 
religion given to man. Thus, we may combat, with 

reason and truth, all spiritual tyranny over the souls 

and consciences of men." 505 

These words contain some real truth in a concealed form. 

With this understanding of what Mr. Hutchens just wrote, it 
is now possible to summarize the truth contained in his 
writings. The following is a fair interpretation of what this 

author is saying in his explanation of the symbols utilized in 
the 30th degree. 

1. The crucifix used in this degree is black, meaning 

that it is evil and darkness. The crucifix is the 

symbol of Christianity, and has been for nearly 2,000 

years. But here, Mr. Hutchens tells the reader that 

the crucifix is a symbol of evil and darkness. The 

Christian Church is considered by this Masonic writ- 

er to be darkness and evil. 

2. The Church has treated the Masons, those who are 

secretly preaching a new religion, with contempt. 
This claim of the Masons has been discussed in 

previous chapters. 

3. The Masons feel that the Church has deprived man 

of his ability to utilize his reason by asking that 

mankind obey God's Moral Absolutes. Mr. Hutchens 

apparently wants man to "know good and evil," the 

exact knowledge that the devil offered man in the 

Garden of Eden. 

4. The Bible claims that God made man in His own 

image. It is the contention of the Mason that the 
exact opposite is the truth: man has made God in his 
image. Since God is the product of an active 

imagination, there is no God. 


190 



CHAPTER 25 THE 33RD DEGREE 


Mr. Hutchens then quotes from a book written by Albert 

Pike called LEGENDA: 

"Men are good. Evil institutions alone have made 

them bad; and it is the duty of Masonry and every 

Knight to aid in leading them back to the truth." 506 

The Christian position is that all men are sinners, and 

that they must improve themselves by freely choosing moral 

alternatives; but here Mr. Hutchens quotes Mr. Pike who 

takes the opposite position: it is the environment that has 
made man evil. In fact, man is good. Man is not at fault; if 

only man could change the environment, man would be per- 

fect. The two positions are diametrically opposed to each 
other. 

But the Masons will set the record straight when they 

establish their control over all of mankind. 

The 33rd degree of the Masons has been described as 

representing "the innermost sanctuary of Masonic mysticism." 

So this degree is the innermost center of the entire Masonic 

Order. Here must reside the final mystery. And it appears 
that the public can know what that final mystery is. 

The motto of the 33rd degree is ORDO AB CHAO, trans- 
lated by the Masons as meaning: Order out of Chaos. 507 

According to the Masons, the present world is in chaos be- 
cause of organized religion, but it will soon be made right. 

And the 33rd degree Masons apparently are volunteering for 

that task. 

Adam Weishaupt, the founder of the Illuminati, put the 
problem into the same perspective: 

"Liberty and Equality are the essential rights 
that man in his original and primitive perfection re- 

ceived from nature. 

Property struck the first blow at Equality; poli- 
tical society or Governments were the first dispos- 

sessors of Liberty: the supporters of Governments and 

Property are the religions and civil laws; therefore to 

reinstate man in his primitive rights of Equality and 

Liberty, we must begin by destroying all Religion, all 

civil society and finish by the destruction of all proper- 

* m 508 


191 



CHAPTER 25 THE 3 3RD DEGREE 


But there is evidence that not all 33rd degree Masons re- 
ceive the remaining "light" when they go through the initia- 
tion ceremony. 

One who can testify to that evidence is Jim Shaw, a 33rd 
degree Mason who apparently became a Christian between 
the 32nd and 33rd degrees. But Mr. Shaw went to Washing- 
ton D.C., the site of the initiation ceremony into the 33rd 

degree anyway. He told what happened to him during the 

three days of the ceremony in his book entitled THE DEAD- 
LY DECEPTION: 

"The first day: 

We [all of the candidates for the 33rd degree] 

were called into one of the offices, one at a time, and 

interviewed by three members of the Supreme Council. 

I was ushered into the office and seated. The very 

first question I was asked was 'Of what religion are 

you?' 

Not long before this I would have answered with 

something like 'I believe the Ancient Mysteries, the 

'Old Religion,' and I believe in reincarnation. 

However, ... I found myself saying, 'I am a 

Christian.' 

After they sent me back out, I sat down and 

thought about it. When the next man came out, I 

asked him, 'Did they ask you if you are a Christian?' 
He said, 'Yes, they did.' 

'What did you tell them?' I asked, and he replied, 
'I told them 'No, and I never intend to be!' 

Then he said a strange thing to me, 'They said 

I'm going higher,' and he left through a different door, 
looking pleased." 509 

So according to this 33rd degree Mason, there are two 
layers inside that degree exactly as there are throughout the 
rest of the Masonic Lodge. Apparently, the one who states 
that he is a Christian does not proceed further. 

Mr. Shaw, now a Christian minister, reported that 
nothing special happened during the other two days, so he 
returned to his home. 

But there was an interesting comment that he made 

about who else was present during those three days of 
ceremonies: 


192 



CHAPTER 25 THE 3 3RD DEGREE 


"There were some extremely prominent men there 

that day, including a Scandinavian King, two former 

Presidents of the United States, an internationally 
prominent evangelist, two other internationally prom- 
inent clergymen, and a very high official of the federal 
government 510 

Unfortunately for the student of the Masonic Order, 

Reverend Shaw did not identify who these gentlemen were. 

However, he did state the reasons why he has left Ma- 
sonry: 

"Having left Freemasonry after 19 years and 
attained the 33rd degree, I feel ... a duty to warn 

others to avoid the satanic trap of Freemasonry." 511 

The Reverend shares the view of this writer: Masonry is 
satanic! They worship Lucifer, also known as Satan, the 
devil! 

Someone has published part of the initiation ceremony of 
the 33rd degree. That part of the ritual is included on pages 
363 and 364 of a book entitled OCCULT THEOCRASY, 
written by Edith Starr Miller. This book was not published 
until after her death in 1933. 

The following is what takes place inside the 33rd degree 
initiation ceremony: 

"For the Sovereign Grand Inspector General the 

33rd is the last degree of the Rite. The Order is the 
Great Avenger of the assassinated Grand Master [the 
33rd degree is the avenger of the death of Hiram Abif] 


and the 

grand 

champion 

of 

humanity. 

for the 

innocent 

Grand Master 

is man. 

man 

who is 

Master, 

King of 

Nature, 

man 

who is 

born 

innocent 

and unconscious. 

[Hiram is 

a symbol of all men.] 





But 

he 

has fallen 

under the 

blows 

of three 


assassins, three scoundrels have thwarted his hap- 
piness and rights and have annihilated him. 

The three infamous assassins are Law, Property 

and Religion. [Here is the true explanation of the 
three assassins of Hiram: they are Law, meaning 

government; Property, meaning the right to own 


193 



CHAPTER 25 THE 33RD DEGREE 


private property; and Religion, the concept that man is 

to live by God's moral absolutes.] 

Law, because it is not in harmony with the rights 

of the individual man and the duties of social man in 
society, rights which belong to all. Duties are but the 
immediate consequence of the rights inherent in all, 

for the enjoyment of all rights. 

Property, because the earth belongs to nobody 

and its fruits belong to all in proportion as they are 

required by each for the needs of his own well being. 

Religion, because religion is but philosophies 
evolved by men of genius and adopted by the people in 
the belief that they would increase their well being. 

Neither law, property nor religion can be imposed 

on man as they annihilate him by depriving him of 

his most precious rights. They are assassins on whom 

we have sworn to wreck vengeance, enemies against 

whom we have declared war to the death and without 
quarter. 

Of these three infamous enemies it is on religion 

that we must concentrate our most deadly attacks, 

because no people has ever survived its religion. Once 
Religion is dead. Law and Property will fall to our 
mercy, and we shall be able to regenerate society by 
founding on the corpses of the assassins of man. 

Masonic Religion, Masonic Law, and Masonic Prop- 


So, the final secret of the Masonic Order has been made 

public! The sUident of the Masons can now know what their 

goals are. 

The Masons are out to destroy the right to private prop- 
erty; the right to worship a God in an organized religion; and 

the right to set up a government based upon a concept that 
government exists to protect man's God given rights to life, 
liberty and property. 

The Masons teach: 


"You are here to 

And to learn, if you can learn." 

think, 

, 513 

if you can 

think; 

Those who wish to 
And they can learn! 

expose 

the Masons can 

think! 


194 



CHAPTER 25 THE 3 3RD DEGREE 


And what they can learn after thinking is simple: 

Some of the Masons worship Lucifer! 

And some of the 33rd degree Masons want to destroy the 
eight to private property, the right to orderly government, 
and the right to worship the God of the Bible! 

And the student can know because some of the Masons 
have told them! 

They stand convicted by their own words ! 


195 



Chapter 26 
The Humanists 


There is a religion in America today that embodies many 
of the beliefs of the Masons, the New Age Movement, and the 
Communists. 

It is called the Humanist Religion. 

This religion even has a dictionary definition: 

Humanism: a modern, nontheistic, rationalist 

movement that holds that man is capable of self- 
fulfillment, ethical conduct, without recourse to super- 
naturalism. 

Some call this religion Secular Humanism, and the word 
Secular is defined as "of relating to worldly things as distin- 
guished from things relating to church and religion." The 
word is connected to the Latin word saecularis, meaning 

worldly. 


196 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


The English word "Secular" is connected to the translation 

of the Latin phrase found on the back of the dollar bill, 

"Novus Ordo Seclorum," meaning the New World Order. 

Some powerful people have identified themselves with this 
religion. One of these was former Vice President Walter Mon- 

dale, later an unsuccessful candidate for the Presidency in 
1984 as a Democrat. He made his support known during a 
speech to the 5th Congress of the International Humanist 

and Ethical Union held at the Massachusetts Institute of 

Technology in August of 1970. Mr. Mondale said: 

"Although I have never formally joined a human- 
ist society, I think I am a member by inheritance. My 

preacher father was a humanist ... and I grew up on a 
very rich diet of humanism from him. 

All of our family has been deeply influenced by 
this tradition including my brother Lester ...." 514 

The former Vice-President has been so moved by his 
religious views that he has been a contributor to a magazine 
called The Humanist. 

Jimmy Carter, then the President of the United States, 
sent the American Humanist Association a telegram in April 
of 1978, in which he praised them for their activities: 

"Those who participate in the Annual Meeting of 

the American Humanist Association are furthering a 
movement that greatly enhances our way of life. 

The work of your organization in this area is, 
therefore, especially gratifying to me, and I welcome 
this opportunity to applaud your important accomp- 
lishments." 515 

The Humanists have issued two manifestos in which they 
have stated what their religion believes in, and any student 
can determine just what those positions are. 

The first one was issued in 1933, and has been called 
limply THE HUMANIST MANIFESTO I. The introduction to 
that document reads, in part, as follows: 


197 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


"The time has come for widespread recognition of 
the radical beliefs throughout the modern world. The 

time is past for mere revision of traditional attitudes. 

Science [apparently meaning Evolution] and eco- 
nomic change [meaning Communism] have disrupted 
the old beliefs. Religions the world over are under the 

necessity of coming to terms with new conditions cre- 

ated by a vastly increased knowledge and experience. 

In every field of human activity, the vital move- 

ment is now in the direction of a candid and explicit 
HUMANISM. 

In order that religious Humanism may be better 
understood, we, the undersigned, desire to make cer- 
tain affirmations which we believe the facts of our 

contemporary life demonstrate.' 

There is a great danger of a final, and we believe 

fatal, identification of the word RELIGION with 
doctrines and methods that have lost their significance 
and which are powerless to solve the problems of 

human living in the 20th century. 

While this age does owe a vast debt to the 

traditional religions, it is none the less obvious that 

any religion that can hope to be a synthesizing and 

dynamic force for today must be shaped for the needs 
of this age. To establish such a religion is a major 

necessity of the present. It is the responsibility which 

rests upon this generation." 516 

What was just expressed in those paragraphs of the 
introduction can be summarized in a few short sentences: 


1 . 

Science and economic 

changes have 


shown 

the 

world that religion 

no 

longer 

has 

the 

answers to man's problems. 





2. 

Humanism has the new answers. 





3. 

We can thank "religion" 

for 

what it 

has 

done 

in 

the past, but it is time 

to 

move on 

to 

new 


beliefs. 


198 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


4. And humanism is the new religion that can 

replace the old. 

This Humanist Manifesto contains fifteen planks of their 
beliefs, but only five are pertinent to this study. The First of 
these states: 

"First: Religious humanists regard the universe as 

self-existing and not created." 

Since the universe has always been, and was not created, 

there is no reason to believe in a creator. So the humanist 

religion is an atheist one, believing that there is no god. 

"Second: Man has emerged as the result of a con- 
tinuous process." 

The Biblical view is that man and animals were all cre- 
ated within a period of six days. The Humanists believe that 
evolution is a more satisfactory explanation of the origins of 
both the universe and of man. And that the process has tak- 
en billions of years. The Humanists have stated that evo- 

lution is part of their religious view of man. 

"Fifth: ... the nature of the universe ... makes 

unacceptable any supernatural or cosmic guarantees of 

human values." 

There is no prayer answering god in the universe, and 
there are no God created moral absolutes. 

"Sixth: We are convinced that the time has 

passed for theism [a belief in one God,] deism [a belief 

in the existence of a God on purely rational grounds 

without reliance on revelation or authority] ...." 

Once again, the Humanists profess their belief that God 
does not exist. Obviously, modern man is too sophisticated to 
believe in a god whose existence cannot be proven. 

"Fourteenth: The humanists are firmly convinced 

that existing acquisitive and profit-motivated society 
has shown itself to be inadequate and that a radical 


199 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


change in methods, controls and motives must be 
instituted. 

A socialized and cooperative economic order must 
be established to the end that the equitable distri- 

bution of the means of life be possible." 517 

It will be remembered that Karl Marx, the so-called 
"father of Communism", supported the concept of a "socialized 
and cooperative economic order." He stated that position in 
his writings. He wrote: 


"From each according to 

according to his need." 

his 

ability, to 

each 

And he added this additional 
consider the very essence of Communism: 

comment. 

which 

many 

"In one word, you reproach us 
do away with your property. Precisely 

with 

so: 

intending to 
that is just 


what we intend." 3 ' 

That is what the Humanists believe! 

The Humanists, just like Karl Marx, do not approve of an 
economic system that encourages the right to own private 
property. They believe in the economic system known as 
socialism, just like Karl Marx. 

The beliefs of the Humanists can be summarized by stat- 
ing that the religion stands on a stool with three major legs: 
evolution, atheism, and communism. There should be not 
doubt as to what they believe in. Any student can read it in 
the two Manifestos. 

This 1933 edition of the HUMANIST MANIFESTO was 

signed by thirty-four men, only two of whom have any bear- 
ing on this study. One was Professor John Dewey of Colum- 
bia University, the father of so-called "progressive education," 

and the other was Lester Mondale, the brother of the Vice- 

President. 

Professor Dewey's religious views on life have had a 
dramatic effect on education in America. 

In 1974, Saturday Review magazine published their "gold- 
en anniversary issue," and as a part of their commemoration 

of those 50 years, they asked various American leaders to 


200 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


name the "most influential figure" in their respective fields of 
endeavor. 519 

The individual that they named as the "most influential 
figure in American education" during the period of 1924 to 
1974 was: 

John Dewey! 

One dean of a major university in California was quoted 
as saying: 

"It has to be Dewey .... I'd allege that he is the 
only great educator in our history." 

Another educator said that Dewey: 

"towers above everyone else." 

And another educator said: 

"No individual has influenced the thinking of 

American educators more ...." 

John Dewey was a Socialist/Communist, an atheist, and 

believed in the fraud known as evolution. He believed that 

there were "no moral absolutes," and that man should de- 
velop his own set of "moral" values. He believed that 

Christianity was "powerless to solve" man's problems. 

Yet this is the individual who "has influenced the 

thinking of American educators" the most. 

To further illustrate the convoluted thinking of this man, 
one only needs to examine a quote attributed to him: 

"There is no God, and there is no soul. There are 

no needs for the props of traditional religion. 

With dogma and creed excluded, then immutable 

truth is also dead and buried. 

There is no room for fixed, natural law or 

permanent moral absolutes." 

These opinions are absolutely incredible, and reveal just 
how shallow and confused Professor Dewey's thoughts were. 


201 

CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


He claimed that when religion was removed from the 

environment, "immutable truth" would be "dead and buried." 

This is impossible! 

The word "immutable" is defined as being unchangeable. 

The professor was admitting that truth was "immutable." 

He was saying that "unchangeable truth" could be 

changed ! 

That which is unchangeable cannot be changed! By its 
own definition! 

Yet Professor Dewey said it could be! 

He also said that there was "no room for ... permanent 
moral absolutes." That which is permanent cannot be done 

away with. It can only be ignored. But if they are permanent, 
they will still remain. 

Professor Dewey believed that that which is unchangeable 

can be changed. He believed that that which is permanent 
can be done away with. 

Professor Dewey was out of touch with reality. 

Those who are out of touch with reality are defined as 

being insane. Those who believe that that which is unchange- 
able can be changed are insane! 

Yet Professor Dewey has "influenced the thinking of 
American educators more than any other educator." 

And his religious beliefs are becoming the official religion 

of America. 

In 1973, on the fortieth anniversary of the issuance of the 

first Manifesto, the Humanists issued the second Manifesto. 
This one basically reaffirmed what the first Manifesto said: 

"As in 1933, humanists still believe that 
traditional theism, especially faith in the prayer- 

hearing God, assumed to love and care for persons, to 
hear and understand prayers, and to be able to do 
something about them, is an unproved and outmoded 
faith. No deity will save us; we must save ourselves." 520 


Once again, the Humanists stated their belief that God 
does not exist. Since there is no God, man is on his own. 
Since man is on his own, man needs to create his own re- 
ligion, and the Humanists have done just that. 

The Second Principle of the Humanist Manifesto II states: 


202 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


"Promises of immortal salvation or fear of eternal 
damnation are both illusory and harmful. Rather, 
science affirms that the human species is an emer- 

gence from natural evolutionary forms 

Here the Humanists restate their conviction that man is 
nothing more than a highly evolved animal. It is a fact of 
modern reality that this position is no longer the sole theory 
of origins being offered to the world by the scientific 

community. The Theory of Evolution is currently being 

challenged by what is known as Creation Science. This ap- 
proach is rapidly proving, using scientific data, that evolution 
is a fraud and a hoax. Scientists of world renown are deser- 
ting their long held evolutionary beliefs after being exposed to 
this competing theory. The scientist who has the integrity to 
compare the two theories side by side is discovering that 

evolution is not scientific. Debates between the evolutionists 

and the creationists on college campuses all over the world 
are being won by the creationists. As a result, science is 

slowly returning to the position held by the scientific world 
before Charles Darwin revolutionized it with his improvable 
and unsound theories known as Evolution. 

In spite of this. Evolution is an official part of the 

Humanist religion. 

The Third Principle reads: 

"Ethics is autonomous and situational, needing no 

theological or ideological sanction. To deny this dis- 

torts the whole basis of life." 

There is no God, therefore there are no God-given Moral 
Absolutes. The words of these Absolutes, such as "Thou shalt 
not," have no relevance to today's societies, and because this 
is true, man does not have to obey these teachings. He is 
therefore free to decide these matters for himself. It follows, 
therefore, that Religion will shortly pass away. All that needs 
to be done is for it to be officially buried by the Humanists, 
New Agers, Masons and Communists. 

This new "moral" philosophy has an official name. Situa- 
tional Ethics, and will be examined more in detail in a subse- 
quent chapter of this study. 

The Fourth Principle states: 


203 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


"Reason and intelligence are the most effective 
instruments that humankind possesses. There is no 

substitute: neither faith nor passion suffices in itself." 

Here the Humanists side with the Masons who have 

deified reason. As was just discussed, this view holds that 

man's mind is the ultimate savior of mankind. Humanists 
strive to create an environment where man can utilize his 
mind to save humanity. That means that religions must be 
removed from that environment so that man will be free to 

utilize his mind so that he can solve man's problems without 

religious interference. 

The Sixth Principle reads: 

"In the areas of sexuality, we believe that 
intolerant attitudes, often cultivated by orthodox 
religions and puritanical cultures, unduly repress 
sexual conduct. The right to birth control, abortion 

and divorce should be recognized." 

According to this Principle, religions in America have been 
"unduly repressive" in their teaching about mankind's sex- 
uality. They have taught the world that abortion is murder 
(believing that abortion is a violation of the Moral Absolute 
"Thou shalt not kill.") The Humanists believe that birth 
control must be available, and abortion on demand permitted. 

The Eighth Principle reads: 

"We must extend participatory democracy in its 

true sense to the economy, the school, the family, the 

workplace and voluntary associations." 

The Christian and Jewish religions for centuries have 
taught that the husband is the head of the household. But 
the humanists would change that, by allowing the entire 
family to decide the direction that the family is going to take. 
If the family is having difficulty in making a decision, such 
as whether to take a vacation in the mountains or at the 
seashore, the family is to decide democratically: each person 
is to have one vote. And if there are three children and their 
choice is the seashore, and the majority rules, the two 

parents, and the family, will visit the seashore. The fact that 


204 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


the parents know that they cannot afford the vacation at the 
ocean is to have no bearing on the decision. The majority 
rules! 

It is almost inconceivable that a "rational" mind could . 
conceive of such a program for a family unit, but that is what 
the new Humanists propose. 

And not only must the family experience the joys of parti- 
cipatory democracy, so must the workplace. Imagine the ex- 
perience of having a work force of 5,000 deciding how much 
the production will be that day, and at what price they will 
be offered, and to whom they will be sold. 

This is what the Humanists want. 

And the Humanists want the students to have a say as to 
what will be taught that day in school. Allowing five year 
olds to determine the subjects to be discussed will practically 
eliminate education as an instructional tool. 
The Eleventh Principle reads: 

"We believe in the right to universal education." 

Karl Marx, who declared himself a "humanist," in the 
Communist Manifesto, wrote this in the Tenth Plank: 

"Free education for all children in public schools." 


The education of the children used to be the direct re- 
sponsibility of the family. Parents were originally the teachers 

of this nation's children, and later were thought able to pay 
for the educational needs of their own children once this na- 

tion went to a system of public education. But here the Hu- 
manists side with the Communists who believe that education 

should be the concern of the entire society. In other words, 
those couples who have either decided against having chil- 
dren of their own, or elderly parents, who have already raised 
their children, were to be made to support the educational 
costs of the parents who produce children. 

The concept that parents without children should pay for 
the education of the parents with children came directly from 
the writings of Karl Marx, the communist. He wrote "From 
each according to his ability, to each according to his need." 

Marx taught that parents without children had to pay for 
those parents with children. 


205 



CHAPTER 


26 


THE 


HUMANISTS 


The Twelfth Principle reads: 

"We deplore the division of humankind on nation- 
alistic grounds. ... the best option is to transcend the 

limits of national sovereignty and move toward the 

building of a world community .... 

We thus reaffirm a commitment to the building of 

world community ...." 

The world government is coming, and the Humanists are 
proud to announce their support for it. 
The Fourteenth Principle reads: 

"... excessive population growth must be checked 

by international concord." 

The thought that some held the position that there was a 

"population explosion" was discussed in my book entitled THE 
UNSEEN HAND, and was shown to be a fraud. This is what 
I wrote: 

"Oregon, a rather small state by comparison to 

others in the United States, has a total of 95,607 
square miles inside its borders. The world has 
approximately four billion (4,000,000,000) inhabitants. 

If the entire population of the world moved to 

Oregon, and left the remainder of the world completely 
devoid of human life, a family of four would have a 
piece of Oregon approximately 50' by 53'. This is about 

half the size of a typical residential lot in a sub- 

division." 522 

The idea that the world is exploding because there are 
simply too many people on the earth is a fraud, but the 
Humanists believe it. In fact, that belief in a lie is a part of 

their official belief structure. And, not only do they 

acknowledge the non-existent "problem," they wish to involve 
government in solving it. Governments deciding to "control 
populations" is the thing that makes dictators exceedingly 

happy. 

So the population explosion was not an explosion at all, 
but was being offered for other purposes. Those who were 
frightening the population of the world into believing that 


206 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


government had to intercede to control a non-existent problem 
had a hidden agenda. The operative word is the word 

"control," and would have gladdened the heart of any dictator. 
The type of government necessary to coerce people into 

controlling the non-existent "population explosion" is one that 

should frighten any thinking person. 

But this thought has apparently not occurred to those 
who ascribe to the Humanist religion. 

The last paragraph of their Manifesto contains a sum- 
mation of their basic beliefs: 

"We further urge the use of reason and com- 

passion to produce the kind of world we want ...." 

So the Humanists have linked themselves with the others 
who look to man's reason as the solution to all of the 
problems caused, in their way of thinking, by the religions of 
the world. 

This second Manifesto was signed by 102 individuals 
including some very familiar names: 

Isaac Asimov, author, 

Alan F. Guttmacher, Planned Parenthood Federation, 
Lester Mondale, brother of the former Vice-President, 

Andre Sakharov, Academy of Sciences, Moscow, USSR, 
and 

Joseph Fletcher, Visiting Prof., School of Medicine, 
University of Virginia. 

Each year, the Humanists honor the "Humanist of the 
Year" with an award and those honored in the past have 
been some of the most influential people in the world: 

1969: Dr. Benjamin Spock 

1972: B.F. Skinner 

1975: Betty Friedan 

1980: Andre Sakharov 

1981: Carl Sagan, the noted astronomer 

1984: Isaac Asimov 

1985: John Kenneth Galbraith, economist 
1986: Faye Wattleton, president of Planned 
Parenthood 


207 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


But one of the most well known Humanists is Madalyn 
Murray O'Hair, the woman who in 1963 was successful in her 
attempts to eliminate prayer and Bible reading in America's 
public schools. 

Mrs. O'Hair has had an interest in the religious views of 
Humanism for many years. She was once the editor of the 
magazine entitled THE FREE HUMANIST, and was elected 
to the Board of the American Humanist Association in 1965, 

and was elected in 1973 for a second four year term. 

In public statements she has been quoted as saying that 
"there's absolutely no conclusive evidence" that Jesus ever 
lived and that Christianity has never "contributed anything to 
anybody, anyplace, at any time." She has called religion "the 
mental excrement of primitive man," and has said that: 

"religion is the wildest form of insanity. I would 
turn every church into a home for the aged or out- 
patient clinic, etc. Christianity, which is anti-science, 

anti-life, anti-sex, anti-woman, anti-freedom, anti- 
peace, is detrimental to the United States." 

She has not confined her activity to just the prayer-in- 

school issue, either. Her attack on Christianity has gotten her 
involved in other issues. 

In December of 1974, she supported the Lansman-Milam 

petition (RM 2493) to the Federal Communications Com- 
mission (the FCC.) This petition asked them to impose an 
immediate freeze on all: 

"applications for reserved educational FM and TV 

channels ... by any and all 'Christian,' Bible, 'Religious,' 

and other sectarian colleges and institutions." 523 

In September of 1977, she filed suit in the federal court 
to remove the motto "In God We Trust," from all U.S. cur- 
rency. She asked the court to declare the motto unconsti- 

tutional, and then order the Secretary of the Treasury to no 
longer place it on any American money. 52 

In November of 1977, she involved herself in a demand 
that the Governor of Texas prohibit the display of a nativity 
scene in the State Capitol during the Christmas holidays. She 
also objected to a monument inscribed with the Ten 

Commandments on Capitol grounds. However, she went on to 


208 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


say that she found no objection to the Christmas tree placed 

inside the Capitol building, because that was "a pagan thing 
which has nothing to do with religion." 

Earlier that month she was arrested and charged with 

disrupting a public meeting for loudly protesting the opening 
of a city council meeting with a prayer. The article that 
reported her activity quoted her as saying: 

"I'm going to try to have the mayor and the 

minister who leads the prayers arrested. They're 
interjecting religious activity into a governmental 

meeting." 25 

Two years later, in 1979, the Supreme Court unanimously 
rejected her suit about the removal of the "In God We Trust" 
motto from all American currency. The judge who ruled 
against her in the District Court was quoted as saying that 
the motto: 

"has nothing whatsoever to do with the estab- 

lishment of religion. Its use is of a patriotic or 
ceremonial character and bears no true resemblance to 
a governmental sponsorship of a religious exercise. 

Moreover, it would be ludicrous to argue that the use 

of the national motto fosters any excessive govern- 

mental entanglement with religion. " 526 

One of her more recent cases involved a group that she 
was the founder and the President Emeritus of, called the 
Society of Separationists. They sued the state of Texas, 
claiming that they had been systematically excluded from 
jury duty because of their refusal to swear an oath to God. 

They claimed that the oath that all prospective jurors must 
take before they are sworn in as members of a panel that 
requires them to be sworn in "so help me God," was a viola- 
tion of "the constitutional separation of church an state. 527 
That was an interesting, but not persuasive, argument 
because the Constititution of the United States contains no 
such statement in its wording. There is no required "sep- 
aration of church and state." Those are the words of Thomas 
Jefferson and not of the Constitution. 


209 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


The First Amendment to the Constitution of the United 
States reads: 

"Congress shall make no law respecting an es- 
tablishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise 

thereof; [the remainder of the Amendment protects 

other rights and does not concern itself with the right 
to religious freedom.] 

Notice that Congress is prohibited from establishing a na- 
tional religion. Notice furthermore that the states may do so 
if they so choose. That is because of the Tenth Amendment to 
the Constitution that reads: 

"The powers not delegated to the United States 

by the Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the States, 

are reserved to the States respectively, or to the 

people." 

So, Congress has no authority to require anyone to believe 
in any particular religion. There is no reason why the na- 
tional government may not print a motto such as "In God We 
Trust" on its currency. 

Mrs. O'Hair's string of failures has affected her family as 
well. All of her activity for the cause of atheism has failed to 
induce one of her two sons to believe in the theory. 

Her son, William Murray, the child she filed the suit to 
restrict prayer in public schools for, later became a Christian. 
He said in a letter in May, 1980, that he was publicly 

apologizing to the American people because: 

"the part I played as a teenager in removing 
prayer from public schools was criminal. I removed 

from our future generations that short time each day 

which should rightly be reserved for God. Inasmuch as 
the suit to destroy the tradition of prayer in school 

was brought in my name, I feel gravely responsible for 

the resulting destruction of the moral fiber of our 

youth that it has caused." 528 

In June of 1988, he told us a little about what his mother 
believed in. He told the world in an interview that: 


210 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


"My mother was always a Marxist. She was the 

manager of the New Era Bookstore in Baltimore, 

which was and is today an official Communist Party 
bookstore." 

Mr. Murray further amplified his thoughts about his 

mother in a book he wrote about Nicaragua. He said: 

"Many people identify me as being the son of 

atheist leader Madlyn Murray O'Hair. Granted, she is 

my mother, but her identification as an atheist 'leader' 
is not quite true. It was never her intent to be an 

atheist leader, but a Marxist leader." 

He reminisced about his childhood with his mother when 
he added these thoughts: 

"... I'm able to reflect upon the change in my own 

life [Mr. Murray, as mentioned previously, has since 

become a Christian] from being raised in a home 

where there was hatred toward freedom; hatred 
toward free enterprise; and hatred toward God." 

It wasn't until 1988, however, when some of the truth 
about Mrs. O'Hair's lawsuit came out. The Houston Chronicle 

told the world in its June 18, 1988 newspaper, that: 

"Madalyn Murray O'Hair ... said she invented a 

non-existent public interest group so it would not 

appear that she was fighting the battle alone. 

'I lied like **** [expletive deleted] during the 

whole thing. The public wasn't willing to listen to just 
one single woman alone with two kids tugging at her 

so what I did was invent the Maryland Committee 

for the Separation of Chinch and State, which really 

didn't exist." 

Others of national and international renown have em- 
braced the Humanist religion as well. 

Another who publicly did was Karl Marx, the Communist. 
He also claimed Humanism as his own. He wrote: 


211 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


"Communism as a fully developed naturalism is 
humanism 529 

And in 1970, the New Program of the Communist Party, 
U.S.A., stated: 

"Marxism is not only rational; it is humanist in 
the best and most profound meaning of the term." 530 

But Humanism is not just a word in a dictionary. It is be- 
coming the official religion of the United States. The proof 
that Humanism has received official sanction as the religion 
of the United States starts with a Supreme Court decision in 
a 1961 case called Torcaso versus Watkins. The Court ruled 
that Humanism was to be officially sanctioned as a religion 
when they declared: 

"Among religions in this country which do not 

teach what would generally be considered a belief in 
the existence of God are Buddhism, Taoism, Ethical 

Culture, Secular Humanism and others." 531 

The Court ruled that the First Amendment to the Con- 
stitution granted the same protection and imposed the same 
limitations on the "religion of Secular Humanism" as are 
applicable to other religions. 

And in 1965, the Supreme Court in another case wrote 
that: 


"... a humanistic belief that is sincerely professed 
as a religion shall be entitled to recognition as re- 

ligious under the Selective Service Law. 332 

The result of this decision is to exempt anyone from the 

draft who professes that his religion is called Humanism. 

So the Supreme Court has correctly identified Humanism 
as a "religion." And even the Humanists declare that their 

religion is a religion. The President of the American Human- 
ist Association wrote this: 

"Humanism is a religion without a God, divine 

revelation or sacred scriptures." 53 


212 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


And Sir Julian Huxley, a signer of the Humanist Manifest 
II, wrote this in a Humanist Association promotional bro- 
chure: 

"I use the word 'humanist' to mean someone who 

believes that man is just as much a natural pheno- 

menon as an animal or plant; that his body, mind and 
soul were not supernaturally created but were pro- 
ducts of evolution." 524 

And to show that the government of the United States 

has officially recognized the Humanists as a religion, the 

American Humanist Association has been granted a religious 
tax exemption. 

So, as has been illustrated. Humanism is based upon a 
belief in three major philosophies: 

Communism, evolution and atheism. 

And it is being taught in the schools of America (this will 
be explored in a later chapter of this study.) 

In 1987, some parents with young children in the Ala- 
bama public school system found the teaching of this religion 

in their tax-supported schools to be objectionable. They filed 

suit to prevent their children from being taught a religious 
view in violation of their own personal religious views. An 

article that appeared in the Arizona Daily Star reported what 
happened: 

"A federal judge ordered Alabama officials yester- 

day to remove 36 textbooks from public schools, saying 
they furthered a belief in humanism and denied the 

role of religion in American society. 

The sweeping ruling, a victory for 624 conser- 
vative Christians who pressed the lawsuit, found for 

the first time that secular humanism is a religion that 
is unconstitutionally advanced in the nation's public 

schools. 

[U.S. District Judge W. Brevard Hand] found that 

five home economics textbooks, published by such 

giants as McGraw Hill Book Co., advance religious 

tenets in violation of the First Amendment's prohibi- 

tion against governmental establishment of a religion. 


213 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


In addition, Hand found that 31 history and so- 
cial studies textbooks, also published by major houses, 

were 'not merely bad history, but lack so many facts 

as to equal ideological promotion."' 

The Alabama Civil Liberties Union was not pleased with 

the decision. The article quoted their executive director Mary 
Weidler as saying: 

"This decision confirms our worst fears of federal 

censorship over local public school matters. It severely 

threatens non-sectarian public education in Alabama 
and around the nation." 

This concern about "federal censorship" by the Alabama 

Civil Liberties Union is very puzzling. Their position that the 
removal of textbooks from the public schools by the federal 
government constituted "censorship" revealed a blatant hypoc- 
risy. Because in the "Creationism Science versus Evolution 
Science" court case also in Alabama a few years later, the 
American Civil Liberties Union, presumably the parent of the 
Alabama organization, took the opposite position. In that 
case, they argued that Creationism science textbooks should 
be removed from the students in Alabama's science class- 
rooms. It was their position that the Creationism Science 

could not be taught side by side with the theory of Evolution 
in science classes in the state. They argued that only Evolu- 

tion could be taught. 

In other words, they argued in favor of the censorship of 
Creationism textbooks from the classroom. 

Their objection in that case was basically that the Crea- 
tionism textbooks taught a religious view of science in opposi- 
tion to the traditional Evolutionist view. In other words, those 
who claim to protect America's "Civil Liberties" wanted the 
books removed in one case, but not in the other. 

They claimed that the Creationists wanted to teach a re- 

ligious view in the science classes, and they urged that the 
court to remove the textbooks. The Christians claimed that 

the Humanists were teaching a religious view in other class- 
rooms in the school districts, and the Civil Liberties Union 
objected when the judge removed the books. 


214 



CHAPTER 26 THE HUMANISTS 


This doesn't make sense, unless those claiming to protect 
America's "civil liberties" wanted only the Humanist religion 
taught in the public schools. That conclusion fits the facts. 

If they were concerned about "federal censorship of school 
matters," they should have been consistent. They should have 
allowed the state to utilize Creationism science textbooks be- 
cause they "feared federal censorship." 

But they didn't. The "civil libertarians" are not consistent. 

Censorship is not called censorship if your side does the 
censoring. 

And the American Civil Liberties Union wants to be the 
censor. 


215 



Chapter 27 
Situation Ethics 


"If we are gods, we can develop our own truth." 

But if Humanism succeeds and religion is removed from 
the American lifestyle, the Christian style of morality will be 
done away with as well. That means that the Humanists 
must have a moral view to offer in its place. 

And they do: it is called Situation Ethics. 

The dictionary defines "situation ethics" as: 

"A system of ethics according to which moral 

rules are not absolutely binding but may be modified 
in the light of specific situations." 

The Humanists have declared their support of this con- 
cept. They have included it in their Humanist Manifesto II: 

"Third: We affirm that moral values derive their 

source from human experience. 


216 



CHAPTER 27 SITUATION ETHICS 


Ethics is autonomous and situational." 536 

Douglas Grothuis, author of UNMASKING THE NEW 
AGE, wrote: 

"Once you've deified yourself [made yourself into a 
god,] which is what the New Age is all about, there is 
no higher moral absolute. It's a recipe for ethical an- 
archy."^ 37 

In essence, the New. Agers are saying: All moral values 
are situational. The situation determines what's right or 
wrong, and since situations constantly change, what's right 
today may be wrong tomorrow. 

The New Age Movement, the Humanist Religion, and the 
Communists have made a god out of man; they have deified 
mankind. The new morality for a man-god is whatever he 
decides it is, and that is what the New Age-Humanists- 
Communists have done. Their new morality is called Situa- 
tion Ethics. 

Dr. Arthur E. Gravatt, M.D., defined the term for a scien- 
tific journal: 

"... moral behavior may differ from situation to 

situation. Behavior might be moral for one person and 
not another. Whether an act is moral or immoral is 
determined by the law of love;' that is the extent of 
which love and concern for others is a factor in the 
relationship." 538 

But it was another who coined the phrase "Situation Eth- 
ics." That honor belongs to Joseph Fletcher, who first used 
the word in a speech to Harvard alumni in 1964. He was a 
professor at the Cambridge Episcopal Theological Seminary. 

This is what he believes: 

"... for me there are no rules - none at all .... 

anything and everything is right or wrong 

according to the situation — what is wrong in some 

cases is right in others .... 


217 



CHAPTER 27 SITUATION ETHICS 


a situationist would discard all absolutes except 
the one absolute: always to act with loving concern." 539 

By this definition, mass murderers would not be in error 
if they professed that their acts were based on a love for 
humanity, and that they had committed their murders with 
"a loving concern." If, for example, one of these murderers 
killed people in an area polluted with radioactive wastes, and 
said that these acts were being committed because the 

murderer did not want them to be affected by the pollution, 
and that he loved them, the act would be acceptable ac- 
cording to those who believed in Situation Ethics. 

This "morality" known as "Situation Ethics" is the under- 
lying philosophy of the Communists/Socialists who murder a 
percentage of a nation's population in a quest for their goal of 
Communism or Socialism. The advocates of these "-isms" 
claim that their goal is so desirable that those who they 
murder must give way for the good of all humanity. The 

corollary of this position is "The end justifies the means." 

The Communists in Russia murdered up to 42 million 
people in the Communist Revolution of 1917 because the 

Communist society was deemed to be worth all of the carnage 
by the murderers. 

It is certain that Adolf Hitler felt that his murders of 
some 50 million people during World War II were not wrong 
because the "Third Reich" that would result after the war 

was over would be worth it. 

Chou En-Lai and Mao Tse Tung murdered as many as 64 
million people in their Communist Revolution that started in 
1923 and ended in 1949 and one can know that they felt that 
the price the dead people had to pay for the rest of the 

Chinese was worth the end result. 

It will be remembered that Adam Weishaupt, the founder 
of the Illuminati, wrote that "the ends justified the means." 

Weishuapt wrote further that "no man [would be] fit for 

our Order who [was] not ready to go to every length." 54(1 

Only one with no moral values, in other words, one who 
believed in Situation Ethics, would be "willing to go to every 

length." 

John Robison, the exposer of the Illuminati, wrote: 

"Nothing was so frequently discoursed of as the 

propriety of employing, for the good purpose, the means 


218 

CHAPTER 27 SITUATION ETHICS 


which the wicked employed for evil purposes; and it 

was taught, that the preponderancy of good in the 
ultimate result consecrated every mean employed." 341 

A modern day exponent of the Situation Ethics philosophy 
is actress Shirley MacLaine. She has written: 

"There is no such thing as evil. Evil is fear and un- 

certainty. Evil is what you think it is. 

This business of 'evil' and 'satan' was a ridiculous 

concept to me." 542 

And the Masons also believe in Situation Ethics. Mason 

H. L. Haywood wrote in his book entitled GREAT TEACH- 
INGS OF MASONRY: 

"Human experience ... is the one final authority in 

morals. 

Wrong is whatever hurts human life or destroys 

human happiness .... 

Acts are not right or wrong intrinsically but ac- 

cording as their effects are hurtful or helpful." 543 

And he repeated the thought in another of his books, 

THE MEANING OF MASONRY: 

"What is good for me may be evil for you; what is 
right to do at one moment may be wrong the next." 544 

And Albert Pike agreed with this comment in his book 
MORALS AND DOGMA: 

"... all truths are truths of Period, and not truth for 

eternity." 545 

Mr Pike held that there were no absolutes. All truths 

were only for the period. This view is called Situation Ethics. 

Mr. Pike called his book MORALS AND DOGMA. Situa- 

tion Ethics is a particular view of morality. Judging from Mr. 
Pike's comments, it would be fair to conclude that this was 
the moral view of the book. Mr. Pike was instructing every 


219 



CHAPTER 27 SITUATION ETHICS 


Mason who read the book that the Masonic religion believed 
in Situation Ethics. 

Fellow Mason Manly P. Hall took a little different tack, 
but said basically the same thing: 

"It has always been a serious question to me 

whether Jesus ever actually spoke the words: 'If ye 

love me, keep my commandments,' for the statement is 
clearly out of accord with both divine and human 


Jesus taught his followers that they were to obey his com- 
mandments. Those commandments were called Moral Abso- 
lutes. Mr. Hall was saying that Jesus never taught that, and 
that human reason would not accept the principle that there 
were moral absolutes. Human reason has concluded that 

keeping a divine commandment is not "reasonable." 

Friedrich Nietzsche, whose powerful dissertation on THE 
GENEALOGY OF MORALS sought to make "a revaluation of 
all values," wrote that "so-called evil was good, and what was 

habitually believed to be good was evil." 547 

The Communists are also taught that there are no abso- 

lutes in life. Nikolai Lenin, the Russian Communist, certainly 
believed in Situation Ethics. His revolution in 1917 murdered, 
as has been discussed before, nearly 42 million people, to 

achieve the goal of Communism for the Russian people. He 
wrote: 

"Communism is power based upon force and limited 
to nothing, by no kind of law and by absolutely no set 

rule." 548 

"The dictatorship of the proletariat is nothing else 

than power based upon force and limited by nothing — 

by no kind of law and by absolutely no rule." 349 

"We must combat religion. This is the ABC of all 

materialism and consequently of Marxism. 

Down with religion. Long live atheism. The spread 

of atheism is our chief task. 

Communism abolishes eternal truths. It abolishes 
all religion and morality." 53(1 


220 



CHAPTER 27 SITUATION ETHICS 


Lenin showed that his thinking was just as illogical as 
that exhibited by John Dewey. He stated that "Communism 
abolished eternal truths." 

This is impossible! 

The word "eternal" is defined as being of infinite duration, 
or perpetual. 

That which is eternal has no end. It will continue to exist 
throughout all of time. 

Lenin admitted that in his view, these "truths" were eter- 
nal. Yet he admitted that Communism would "abolish" these 
"eternal truths." 

That which is eternal cannot be abolished. 

Unless your thinking is as convoluted as that of Nikolai 
Lenin ! 

Lenin was just as insane as John Dewey! 

He continued with other similar thoughts: 

"We, of course, say that we do not believe in God. 
We do not believe in eternal morality. 

We repudiate all morality that is taken outside of 


human, class 

concepts. 

We 

say that our 

morality 

is en- 

tirely subordinated to 

the 

interests of 

the class 

strug- 

gle. 






Communists 

must 

regard 

themselves 

as free. 

indeed 


morally obligated to violate the truthfulness, respect 
for life, etc., when it is absolutely clear that a great 


deal more harm 

[to 

Communist objectives] would be 

done by adhering 
them. 

to 

such 

principles than by 

violating 

That is moral, 
society." 551 

that 

serves 

the destruction of 

the old 

"We must repudiate 

all 

morality which 

proceeds 

from supernatural 

ideas. 

or 

ideals which are 

outside 


class conceptions. Everything is moral which is 
necessary for the annihilation of the old exploiting 
social order and for uniting the proletariat. 

In what sense do we repudiate ethics and morality? 

In the sense that they were preached by the 
bourgeoisie [meaning the rich?] who declared that 
these were god's commandments." 532 


221 



CHAPTER 27 SITUATION ETHICS 


Frederick Engels, a co-worker in the world of Communism 
with Karl Marx, wrote: 

"leaving aside the problem of morality ... for a revo- 
lutionist any means are right which lead to the pur- 

pose, the violent, as the seemingly tame." 553 

Feodor Mikhailovich Dostoevski, the Russian novelist, 
wrote this in one of his writings: 

"If there is no god, everything is permitted." 554 

What happens to the individual's mind after he accepts 
the philosophy of situation ethics can be best illustrated by 
studying the writings of Sergei Nechayev, the Russian Rev- 
olutionary. This young man had an enormous influence on 
the outcome of the Russian Bolshevik Communist Revolution 
of 1917, and the resulting deaths of approximately 42 million 
people, because his writings had an enormous influence on 
Nikolai Lenin. Nechayev wrote: 

"Our cause is terrible, complete, universal and piti- 
less destruction .... Let us unite with the savage, 

criminal world, these true and only revolutionists of 

Russia." 555 

Only a believer in Situation Ethics could ever say such a 
thing. There are no moral absolutes when complete destruc- 
tion is your goal. And that was the goal of this revolutionary. 
He continued: 

"The revolutionary is a doomed man. He has no 

personal interests, no business affairs, no emotions, no 

attachments, no property and no name. 

Everything in him is wholly absorbed in the single 
thought and the single passion for revolution. 

The revolutionary knows ... he has broken all bonds 
which tie him to social order and the civilized world 
with all its laws, moralities and customs and with its 
generally accepted conventions. 

The object is perpetually the same: the surest and 

quickest way of destroying the whole filthy order. 


222 



CHAPTER 27 SITUATION ETHICS 


The revolutionary ... despises and hates the existing 

social morality .... 

For him, morality is everything which contributes 

to the triumph of the revolution. Immoral and criminal 

is everything that stands in his way. 

[The revolutionary] must be tyrannical toward 
others. All the gentle and enervating sentiments of 

kinship, love, friendship, gratitude, and even honor 

must be suppressed in him and give place to the cold 

and single-minded passion for revolution." 

"Do not pity .... Kill in public places if these base 


rascals dare to enter them, 
lages. 

kill 

in houses, kill 

in vil- 

Remember, those who will 
against us. 

not 

side with us 

will 

be 

Whoever is against us is 
destroy enemies by all means." 536 

our 

enemy. And 

we 

must 


What this young revolutionary wrote about was unrestrict- 
ed Situation Ethics, where there absolutely is no right and 
wrong. NechayeVs thoughts are the logical result of this type 
of thinking. Once the revolutionary accepts this ethical code, 
anything is permitted. Murder, looting, pillaging, and torture 
become acceptable behavior. 

And this is the ethical code of the Humanist. 

Situation Ethics leads some into a position of hating the 
entire society, and of wishing to destroy the whole social 

fabric, the "old world order." Then those who wish to fill the 
void can remake the world. And the new world that will be 
created will be called The New World Order. 

Remember that Nechayev wrote that the revolutionary in- 
tended to "destroy the whole filthy order." The goal of the 

revolutionary was to destroy the "old world order" and replace 
it with the "New World Order." 

Perhaps the major purpose of Situation Ethics was made 
clear in a book written by Aldous Huxley entitled BRAVE 
NEW WORLD REVISITED. He identified the destruction of 
the individual as the primary goal of this new ethical 

teaching. He wrote: 

"... a new Social Ethic is replacing our traditional 

ethical system — the system in which the individual is 

primary. 


223 



CHAPTER 27 SITUATION ETHICS 


the social whole has greater worth and signi- 

ficance than its individual parts, ... that the rights of 
the collectivity take precedence over ... the Rights of 

Man." 557 

But Situation Ethics is not new. It is as old as the Bible. 
Isaiah the prophet was moved to write about the system in 
about 740 B.C. He wrote this in Isaiah 5:20-21 in the Old 
Testament of the Bible: 

"Woe unto them that call evil good, and good evil, 

that put bitter for sweet, and sweet for bitter." 

Situation Ethics calls evil good and good evil. 

And it is the philosophy of the Humanists, the Commu- 
nists and some of the Masons. 

And it is rapidly becoming the morality of America. 


224 



Chapter 28 

The Attack on Religion 


The New World Order is already here. 

There are already people and organizations attacking the 
family, nationalism, the right to private property, the right to 

worship, and the right to practice a decent morality, among 
other things. 

One of the first areas of "The Old World Order" to come 
to the attention of the destroyers was the Christian Church. 

And one of the first to be attacked in recent history was 
Pastor Everett Sileven of Louisville, Nebraska. He is the 

pastor of a fundamentalist church in that community and he 
taught his congregation that they had the scriptural obliga- 
tion to teach their children themselves. And, to accomplish 
this end, the church voted to open a Christian school in the 
summer of 1977. 

The church felt that educating the children of the con- 
gregation was a ministry of the church, just like Sunday 

school, or preaching. And, since the church felt the need to do 
this as a part of their religion, they chose not to register 


225 



CHAPTER 28 THE ATTACK ON RELIGION 


their school, nor license their teachers, through the state of 
Nebraska. They also believed that the First Amendment to 
the Constitution of the United States protected their right to 
freedom of religion. 

That First Amendment reads in part: 

"Congress shall make no law respecting an 
establishment of religion, OR PROHIBITING THE 
FREE EXERCISE THEREOF ...." 

Since government was prohibited from passing a law 
abridging the free exercise of their religious rights, the 
church felt that they would not be interfered with. 

This church was the first in Nebraska to open a Christian 
school without licensing their teachers. So, they were the first 
to be challenged by the state government of Nebraska. 

Later, in August, the Nebraska Department of Education 
entered the school and told the Pastor that the school was 
breaking state law because they had not certified their in- 
structors. They cited Rules numbered 14 and 21, which they 
said were procedures for getting the school licensed, and for 
licensing their faculty. 

The Pastor explained their position, but his arguments 
were not listened to. Later, The sheriff came and arrested the 
Pastor, and the case went to a county court. The Pastor also 
used as his defense Article 1, Section 4 of the Nebraska State 
Constitution which read: 



"All 

persons have a 

natural 

and 

indefeasible 

[de- 

fined 

as 

that which cannot 

be 

undone 

or made 

void] 

right 

to 

worship Almighty 

God 

according to the 

dic- 

tates 

of 

their own consciences 

nor 

shall any 

inter- 


ference with the rights of conscience be permitted. 

Religion, morality and knowledge, however, being 
essential to good government, it shall be the duty of 

the legislature to pass suitable laws to protect every 

denomination in the peaceable enjoyment of its own 

mode of public worship, and to encourage schools and 

the means of instruction." 

The Pastor then testified: 


226 



CHAPTER 28 THE ATTACK ON RELIGION 


"... the primary objection of the Faith Baptist 

Church to accepting licensure from the State is the 

violation of Ephesians 1 :22 which reads: 

'The God of our Lord Jesus Christ gave him 

[Jesus] to be the head over all things of the church."' 

And Colossians 1:18: 

'... and he [Jesusl is the head of the body, the 

church ....' 

The Pastor continued to resist, and the judge rewarded 

that resistance with several terms in prison. 

Pastor Sileven wrote an explanation as to why he refused 
to allow the state to control his school in his book entitled 
THE PADLOCKED CHURCH: 

"We came to the firm conclusion, unanimously, 

that Christ could not be submitted to the authority of 
the state, leaving the state the right to determine the 
philosophy of the curriculum or the qualifications of 

the teachers." 558 

In addition, the Pastor looked at the activities of the 
judge who ruled in this case: 

"The judge who presided in our case admitted 

that he did not look at the First Amendment [to the 
U.S. Constitution] before deciding our case. He also 
admitted that he defines education as non-religious; 

therefore, he defines away our religious beliefs and 


The Pastor and the members of the Faith Baptist Church 
continued to believe that the operation of a school to teach 
the children of the church's members was a part of the 
church's ministry. The state countered with the argument 
that they were not qualified to determine what their children 
were to be taught, nor capable of determining who should 
teach them. 

And, since the Pastor refused to neither shut his school 
down, nor allow the state to license his teachers, the judge 
ordered the sheriff to enter the church during a service. 


227 



CHAPTER 28 THE ATTACK ON RELIGION 


arrest the Pastor, and anyone else who resisted, and then 
padlock the church doors. 

The final outcome of the whole case occurred in January 
of 1985 when the State Supreme Court overturned the 
Pastor's final eight month jail conviction, and it appeared 

that there would be no further court action on the case. 

The state had used its powers without legal support, and 
the Christian school of the Faith Baptist Church continued 

operating. The Christian Church, at least in Nebraska, did 

not have to allow the state to set the policy of the school, 
determine the curriculum, nor license the teachers of their 

children. 

But the battle is not over. 

It has only begun. 

This was just one of the early skirmishes. 


228 



Chapter 29 

The Attack on the 
Family 


The family unit has been called the cornerstone of 

civilization. The concept that the parents are responsible for 
the upbringing of the children produced during the marriage 
is the cornerstone of American life. Yet, there are efforts in 
America today to undermine, if not to destroy, the family unit 
altogether. 

The desire to destroy the family unit is, as has been 
briefly alluded to in previous sections of this study, one of the 
goals of the New Age-Humanist-Communist movement. 

Marilyn Ferguson, the New Age writer, has written this 
about the family unit in her book entitled THE AQUARIAN 
CONSPIRACY: 

"Many sociologists anticipate the 'evolution' of 
monogamy. Marriage, they say, must be transformed 

as an institution if it is to survive at all. 


229 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


If monogamy is tied inextricably with the re- 

striction of all sexual expression to the spouse, they 
said, it will ultimately be monogamy that suffers." 56(1 

The word "monogamy" has two meanings, both of which 
are applicable to this study. The word is defined as: 

1. The practice or state of being married to only 

one person at a time. 

2. The practice of marrying only once during 
life. 


The dictionary added an appendage to the second 

definition: it said that that definition was "rare." 

And indeed it is. 

The tradition in America that the husband takes himself 
a wife, and then remains faithful to that spouse for the re- 
mainder of their life together is a Judeo-Christian one. In 

other words, it comes from the beliefs and teachings of two 

religious faiths. 

Since this is not something that is written instinctively 
into the hearts of all men, and since man is given free choice, 

man is free to accept or reject the created institution of the 

family. The married man does not have to have but one wife 

and to remain faithful to her. It is only religion that has 

taught him that the monogamous marriage is the preferable 

lifestyle. 

Marilyn Ferguson, a New Age writer, writes further: 

"Traditional monogamy contravenes the growing 
sense that the greatest good of human existence is 

deep interpersonal relationships, as many of these as 

is compatible with depth. 

younger people are trying to devise and invent 

a form of marriage appropriate to a new era." 361 

As has been previously illustrated, the New Age 

Movement and the Communist Movement want to destroy the 
family. Here, one of the major New Age writers says that it 

is the young people who are attempting to devise a new 
marriage institution. The children are being taught to change 

the marriage contract by those in the New Age Movement 


230 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


who have written the textbooks, or encouraged a dialogue 

with the intent of changing their attitudes. 

Even the definition of a family, meaning a male husband, 
a female wife, a child or children, has to be redefined for the 
New Age. Marilyn Ferguson has told us that this has already 
taken place: 



"The 

American 

Home Economics 

Association 

rede- 

fined 

the 

family in 1979 as 

'two 

or 

more 

persons 

[meaning 

two men. 

or two women as 

well 

as one man 

and 

one 

woman] 

who share 

resources, 

share 

respon- 

sibility to one another over time. 






The 

family is 

that climate 

that 

'one 

comes 

home 

to;' 

and 

it is this 

network of 

sharing 

and 

commitments 

that 

most 

accurately 

describes 

the family 

unit. 

regard- 


less of blood, legal ties, adoption, or marriage."' 

The American concept of marriage is that of a male hus- 
band, and a female wife. Homosexual or lesbian marriages 
are not legal. But that can change anytime those who make 
the laws decide to change it. The New Agers apparently want 
to change the laws to allow the marriage of two men or two 
women. 

A major step in changing the traditional definition of the 
family just occurred in the state of New York. The headline 
of the July 6, 1989 article that discussed the change, reads: 

"Court rules gay couple a 'family.'" 

The article reported: 

"New York's highest court ruled today that a 

partner in a long-term homosexual relationship may 

take over the couple's rent-controlled apartment when 

the lover who signed the lease dies. 

the Court of Appeals ordered a lower court to 
reconsider its decision to evict a New York City man 
from a rent-controlled apartment he shared ... with his 
now-dead lover. 

the court expanded the definition of a 

'family'.... 


231 

CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


The word is crucial because state law says only 

'family members' may take over rent-controlled 
apartments when the tenant of record dies. 

The court said that the definition should include 

adults who show long-term financial and emotional 

commitment to each other, even if they don't fit the 

traditional meaning of a 'family.'" 562 

So, even the definition of a family is under attack. It will 

have to be changed if the family is to be destroyed. 

As discussed, there are some who want the family unit to 

be destroyed altogether. The destruction of the family unit 

has been the goal of the Communists and Socialists for over 
140 years. Karl Marx, the so-called father of Communism, 
wrote that that was the goal of the Party: 

"Abolition of the family! 

Even the most radical flare up at this infamous 

proposal of the Communists." 563 

And Robert Owen, the so-called father of Socialism, wrote: 

"In the new moral world, the irrational names of 
husband and wife, parent and child, will be heard no 
more. All connection will the result of affection; the 

child will undoubtedly be the property of the whole 

community." 564 

And the process of the change from the idea that the 
raising of the child should be the responsibility of the family 
to that where the child will be raised by the state has 
already started in some of the Communist countries. 

One of those countries is Cuba. 

The Cuban people were once basically a religious people, 
with the overwhelming majority belonging to the Catholic 
Church. But much of that has changed since Fidel Castro, 
the Communist, converted that nation into a Communist 
country. These comments are from a 1988 article in the New 
American magazine: 

"Heterosexual relations in Cuba are characterized 
by rampant promiscuity and widespread prostitution. 


232 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


The abject poverty to which Castro has reduced the 

island encourages prostitution. 

The institution of marriage has almost lost its 

meaning in Cuba. Many persons marry and divorce 

frequently. 

the Castro regime has worked to destroy family 
ties and to break the control of parents over their 

children. The Communists in Cuba have baited 
children with the offer by setting up live-in schools in 
the countryside. At these schools students study half a 
day and then must work in the fields for the other 
half. 

While attendance at these 'escuelas en el campo' 
[meaning camp schools] is not mandatory, students of 

junior high and high school levels are encouraged to 

attend. Even students who do not attend the live-in 

school must participate yearly in a six-week work 

period deep in the rural areas of Cuba. 

The Castro regime relies heavily upon the use of 

hundreds of thousands of unpaid school children to 

work in the fields each year. Under the cover of 
educational programs, the Castro regime exploits child 
labor and disrupts parental authority." 565 

It is interesting that the leader of Cuba, Fidel Castro, 
sets the example for infidelity and promiscuity in the mar- 
riage union. He has five known children born out of wedlock 
to different mothers. 566 

Other Communist nations have shown their commitment 

to the destruction of the family. The Communists in China 
have also been at least partially successful in their drive to 
destroy the family unit. Those who have studied that nation's 

past know that the family unit had been the cornerstone of 
their civilization for centuries. 

One Chinese citizen who was able to flee his country after 
the Communists took control in 1949 was Reverend Shih-ping 
Wang, the East Asia director of the Baptist Evangelization 
Society. He testified before the House Committee on Un- 
American Activities about what happened to the family when 
Communism seized control of China: 

"The family unit is broken up. Husbands and 

wives are separated in different barracks. The children 


233 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


are taken away from the parents and placed in 

government-run nurseries. 

Husbands and wives meet only once a week for 

two hours - they have no other contact .... 

The parents may see their children once a week 

and when they see them they can show no affection 

toward their children. Names are taken away from 

children and they are given numbers. 

There is no individual identity." 567 

Some of the measures to control the family unit in China 
are rather subtle, while others are not. For instance, any 
couple wishing to get married must have permission of the 
Communist Party. Political dissidents, for one, are not 
permitted to marry. Once any couple is granted that permis- 

sion, even the decision as to how many children the couple 
can have in these so called "marriages" is a decision of 
others. 

One who testified to that fact was another Chinese 
refugee. Dr. Han Suyin, a native of Peking, who reported in 
an address to the Swiss Society of Surgeons in 1975 that the: 

"residents of each neighborhood in the People's 
Republic of China meet annually to decide how many 

babies will be born during the next year and to which 

families. 

Priority is given to newly married women without 
children. As a guarantee against chance or mistakes, 

contraceptive pills are distributed on each street every 

morning." 568 

This policy of allowing the "people" to decide just how 
many children each couple can have in China has led to the 
practice of infanticide, meaning the intentional killing of 

babies. The government does not allow any couple to have 

more than one child, and this edict has caused the following 
problem: 

"a leading newspaper of Southern China [has] 
reported that during 1980, eight female infants were 
found dead, abandoned in front of the local party 

headquarters .... 

Most had been suffocated." 569 


234 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


The article continued by explaining why only female 

children were being killed by distraught parents: 

"Should a couple's first [and only] child be a girl, 
many parents fear that they will be left without an 
heir or source of support in their declining years. 

Thus, in certain areas some parents have begun 
murdering their first-born female offspring." 

Other options are available for those parents who do not 
have the courage to murder their children. A recent report, in 
March of 1989, reported that some parents have developed 
another method of allowing their children a way to survive: 

"An estimated 25 million 'illegals' are living in 
Red China. They are unregistered children who are 
not immigrants or aliens, but native-born Chinese 
whose parents hide them and keep them unregistered 

by the government because of its official 'one family- 
child’ policy. 

The unregistered children cannot attend govern- 
ment schools, receive government aid of any kind, or 
work for the government in any capacity." 570 

This decision to allow only one child to a couple in China 
is enforced by other practices: 

"If a couple persists in having a second child, one 

of the parents is forced to buy all grain rations at 

twice the regulation prices for the next seven years. 

The third child does not get the identity card that 

entitles him to food rations." 571 

But if the Communist Party discovers that a Chinese 

woman got pregnant without their permission, they force her 
to have an abortion. Jonathan Mirsky, in an article for The 
Nation, wrote that women who got pregnant without permis- 
sion had been kidnapped on Communist Party orders and 
forced to have an abortion, even if she was in the third 
trimester of her pregnancy. 

This "one -child per family" concept poses another problem: 
what does the Communist Party do if the woman gives birth 


235 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


to twins? That question was answered by an American who 
visited Red China. 

Stephen Mosher was a graduate student at Stanford 
University working on his doctorate when he was asked to do 
research for his thesis in China. He consented, and went to 
live in a small village in the southern part. His discoveries of 
life in that nation astounded him. These are his comments 
about what happens when a Chinese woman gave birth to 
twins: 

"... an official ... demanded that she specify which 
of the two she wished to raise. The mother could not 

answer him, so the official made the decision for her, 

disposing of one of the newborn babies." 572 

The practice of abortion has become so widespread that 
the United States government has estimated that more than 
78 million were performed in Red China between the years 
1971 and 1982. 

But the Chinese Communists place other obstacles in the 
way of a Chinese couple. These obstacles hinder the ability of 
the couple to enjoy married life. 

"It is now mandatory for women to work in the 

fields. They do, and they still do all the housework." 

Obviously, a Chinese woman forced to work in a field does 
not have time to be involved in the full-time raising of I 
family. 

The utter despair of some of the women in China because 
of these Communist imposed conditions has led to a new 
problem: 

"Peasant girls in the remote southern region of 
China are taking their lives in unprecedented 
numbers." 573 

Girls are committing suicide in record numbers in Red 
China because of the pressure on the marriage, the abortion 
problem, and the requirement that they can give birth to only 
one child. 

But the problem in China is not too many Chinese. 

It is simply to much Communism. 


236 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


The Communists have imposed Communism, also called 
the New World Order, on the Chinese people, and it has 
failed, just as could have been predicted by anyone who had 
studied the history of Communism. 

The Communist system does not work; it has never 
worked; and it is not working in China. 

And there is an easy way to prove that that statement is 
correct. 

Off the shore of Communist China lies the islands known 
as Formosa or Taiwan. This separate Chinese nation has not 
bought the fraud known as Communism. It is basically 
allowing its citizens to enjoy the right to private property. 
The Taiwanese government is supporting the economic system 
known as the Free Enterprise System. 

Former Congressman Eldon Rudd of Arizona illustrated 
the difference between Communism and Freedom: 

"With 270 times the land area and 58 times the 
population, the Gross National Product [the G.N.P.] of 
Mainland China [Communist China] is only 10 times 

the G.N.P. of Taiwan. 


The 

figures I 

have cited 

illustrate 

beyond contra- 

diction 

the 

material abundance 

created 

by freedom's 

climate. 







In 

my 

view, 

this is the 

smallest 

and least 

im- 

port ant 

of 

the 

remarkable 

differences 

between 

the 

People's 

Republic 

of China [meaning 

Communist 

Chi- 

na] and 

the 

free 

government of Taiwan. 

The true 

dif- 

ference 

is spirit — 

the human 

condition. 

the absence 

of 


compulsion and regimentation, the presence of indi- 

vidual opportunity." 574 

So the problem in China is not too much population. 

It is too much Communism. 

It is too much "New World Order." 

So the family unit in China, the cornerstone of their civil- 
ization for centuries, has essentially been destroyed by the 
Communist Party. 

And it was not destroyed by mistake. It was planned that 
way. 

And the Bolshevik Communists in the Soviet Union have 
nearly duplicated the "success" of the Chinese Communists. 


237 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


The September, 1988 Reader's Digest magazine carried an 
article called Should We Bail Out Gorbachev? in which they 
discussed life in the Soviet Union. This is one of the com- 

ments made in that article: 

"At least 13 million urban families still must live 
in communal apartments or dormitories, sharing bath, 

kitchen and even bedrooms with other families. In 

Moscow, newly constructed apartment complexes are 
crumbling." 575 

So a great percentage of the Russian families do not have 

a place to live separate from other people. Married life does 
not seem exceptionally attractive to a young couple contem- 
plating marriage. So, if the Communists are trying to destroy 
the family in Russia, one of the ways to do it would be to not 
construct enough government owned apartments or houses. 
And that is exactly what they have done. 

Also, the Soviet Union is utilizing the same infanticide 

that is occurring in Red China. 

"Topping the world in legal abortions is the Soviet 

Union ~ where there are an estimated eight million 

annually of the 30 million worldwide. 

According to the Moscow News, an astounding 

nine of 10 of the first pregnancies in the U.S.S.R. end 
in the legal killing of the unborn child. 

The corresponding figures in the United States, 
reports the Alan Guttmacher Institute in New York 

City, is one of three of the first pregnancies termi- 

nating in abortion and 1.6 million abortions annually." 76 


Those who support the concept of legal abortions often 
claim that those who charge that life begins at conception are 
wrong. 

Their position is that life begins at birth. But there are 
others who are claiming that even that date is not adequate, 
and that life should start at some later date. 

One of these is Sir Francis Crick, a British medical 
doctor, a socialist and, by the way, a signer of the HU- 


238 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


MANIST MANIFEST II. He has been quoted as saying that 
he foresees the day when: 

"no newborn infant will be declared human unless 

it has passed certain tests regarding its genetic 

endowment. If it fails these tests, it forfeits its right to 

live." 577 

Picture the anguish of the parents who have given life to 
a newborn child, deemed to be "defective" by Dr. Crick, when 
they discover that the good doctor has decided to "take its 
right to life." Imagine what this concept does to those 
planning a family. 

And now the reader can understand what some of the 

Humanists think of the value of human life. Once an indi- 
vidual denies the existence of God, he becomes god himself, 

and he can decide all of those things that other people feel 
God used to decide. Such things as: the right to life, the right 
to property, etc. 

But the attacks on the family in America are a little more 
subtle. But they are real, none the less. 

In 1988, the Supreme Court decided that a husband has 

no right to stop his wife from having an abortion. The 
appeals court, which passed the decision onto the Supreme 
Court, had stated that the husband "has no right to veto [his 

wife's] decision [to have the abortion] as such [a] decision 

concerns only her." 578 

This decision certainly had a long-lasting effect upon the 
marriage where both parties to the marriage contract are 
supposed to have a say in any decision that affects both 

parties. 

But the latest attack on the family is a new phenomenon 
called "child abuse." The National Committee for the 
Prevention of Child Abuse advises there were 1.2 million 
reports of child abuse in 1984. Those who have paid attention 
to this or more current figures are suitably outraged, having 
been conditioned to believe that this abuse is rampant inside 
the American society. 

However, the reason that the response to these statistics 
can be called hysteria, is this comment from Douglas 
Besharov, the first director of the National Center on Child 
Abuse and Neglect, who has charged that over 60 percent of 


239 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


these complaints are totally unfounded. And others have said 
that that figure might be as high as 80 percent. 

And in most of the remaining cases, the injury actually 

involved neglect ~ failure to provide what some social worker 
deemed to be adequate food, clothing or shelter — a far cry 

from the sordid crimes widely publicized in the press. 

One foreign nation which responded to the hysteria was 
Sweden, which passed a law in 1979 punishing parents who 
spank their children. The Parade magazine article that re- 
ported on the law mentioned the case where a father told his 
son not to take his younger brother out on a bicycle ride. The 
son disobeyed his father, and the father gave him a spanking 
on the buttocks. 

The son marched down to the local police station and re- 
ported his dad for spanking him. A jury later found the fa- 

ther guilty and fined him. 

In America, this hysteria has led to a horrendous in- 
trusion of the government into private family matters, much 

of which appears to be unwarranted and some of which is de- 
monstrably harmful to the children involved. 

The definitions of "child abuse" have basically made crimi- 
nals out of nearly every parent in America. A federally 
funded study, sponsored by the National Institute of Mental 
Health, and released in November of 1985, defines the vic- 
tims of "violence against children" as being those who have 
"slapped or spanked," or "pushed, grabbed, or shoved" their 
children. It would be difficult to find any parent in America 
that wouldn't be included in those categories. 

The broad definition of "child abuse," which makes every 
parent in America into a criminal, makes sense if the ob- 
server remembers that there are people in America today who 
want to destroy the family. The way for them to achieve their 
goal is to convince the world that families abuse their chil- 
dren, and that "social workers" do not. Then, when the au- 

thorities come to take the children away from the parents of 
America, the overwhelming majority of the remainder of the 
citizens will accept the action as being required by the con- 

ditions. 

And the traditional family, as was known in America for 

centuries, will exist no longer. 

And some will be pleased. 

Textbooks are beginning to teach that the family unit is a 
relic of the past. Arthur W. Calhoun wrote a book entitled A 


240 
CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


SOCIAL HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN FAMILY. It was a 
social service textbook utilized as a vehicle to educate stu- 
dents that the society must assume traditional responsibilities 

assumed by the family. Mr. Calhoun wrote: 

"The view is that the higher and more obligatory 

relation is to society rather than to the family; the 
family goes back to the age of savagery while the state 

belongs to the age of civilization. The modem indi- 
vidual is a world citizen served by the world, and 

home interests can no longer be supreme. 

But as soon as the new family consisting only of 

the parents and the children stood forth, society saw 

how many were unfit for parenthood and began to re- 
alize the need for community care. 

As familism of the wider sort ... weakens, society 
has to assume a larger parenthood. 

In general, society is coming more and more to 

accept as a duty the task of guaranteeing wholesome 

upbringing of the young ... the child passes more and 

more into the custody of community experts [called 
teachers or social workers] who are qualified to per- 
form the complexer functions of parenthood ... and 

which the parents have neither the time nor knowl- 
edge to perform." 579 

The family unit in America is decaying, and the thinking 

is that society must hire "experts" who are capable of the 
raising the children instead of the parents. So, suddenly 
"child abuse" articles started showing up in the newspapers of 
America. When the "experts" say that it is time to take the 

children away from all of the parents, the society will accept 
the decision because it appears to be the proper solution. 

An organization known as Friends of Earth decided that 
the solution is to "license" parents: 

"If the less stringent curbs on procreation fail, 

someday perhaps childbearing will be deemed a pun- 
ishable crime against society unless the parents hold a 

government license. 

Or perhaps all potential parents will be required 

to use contraceptive chemicals, the governments issu- 

ing antidotes to citizens chosen for childbearing." 3 


241 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


In addition to the family causing all of this harm to child- 
ren, parents are also producing too many offspring. The con- 
tention is that the world is simply over-populated. Fortunate- 
ly, for the planners, the same Friends of Earth has become 

aware of this problem and they are offering their solution: 

"... we should set a goal of reducing population to 
a level that the planet's resources can sustain indef- 
initely at a decent standard of living ~ probably less 

than two billion." 581 

When one considers that the world has approximately five 
billion people on it now, one can only wonder how the 
Friends of Earth are going to eliminate 3 billion people. So 

far, the solutions do not include plans to simply poison or 
shoot billions of people, but one can only wonder what the 
Friends of Earth will offer the world if the people do not vol- 
untarily solve this purported problem. 

The organization does not rule out the use of force to stop 
the "population explosion," however. They continued: 

"Ultimately, those policies may have to embrace 

coercion by governments to curb breeding." 82 

It doesn't take much imagination to envision the size of a 
government that would have the ability to prevent every cou- 
ple in the world from producing unwanted pregnancies. 

Nor does it take superior intelligence to see what the next 
step would be should all of these "voluntary" methods fail. If 

the world population will not voluntarily stop producing too 

many children, then coercive measures must be employed. 

But, it can be assumed that the Friends of the Earth be 
lieve that those 3 billion people will understand when they 
come to exterminate them. Don't forget, it is for the good of 
humanity! 

But in the future, the parent who believes that he or she 

is capable of raising children will become a criminal. One 

organization that sees that situation occurring in the future 
is the World Future Society, which wrote this: 

"The adult criminal of the twenty-first century 
may be less common than his twentieth century coun- 


242 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


terpart, in part because of the way society treats 

children from the moment they are born. 

Parental care in the year 2000 may be different, 

from today's, and better, since by then the movement 

to license or certify parents may well be under way." 

In most cases, certified couples would be allowed to have 
their own natural children. In some instances, however, 

genetic scanning may find that some women and men can 

produce "super" babies but are not well suited to rear them. 

These couples would be licensed to breed, but will give up 
their children to other people licensed to rear them. 

Child breeding and rearing may be considered too impor- 

tant to be left to chance. 

"... wanted children will have fewer environmental 

reasons to turn to crime, and controlled breeding will 

result in fewer biological reasons for crime." 583 

The attack on the family in America has taken several 

clever and unique twists. The family destroyers have resorted 

to cleverness to disguise their original intent: they do not 

want the parents to know that the destruction of the family 

is their goal. So they conceal their purposes by quietly 

causing problems that create intense pressures on the family. 

One of the methods utilized is that of inflation. 

Inflation is simply defined by a dictionary as an increase 
in the money supply, causing prices to go up. That means 

that whoever controls the money supply controls the price 
level. Increase the money supply, and prices rise. Decrease 

the money supply and prices go down (called Deflation.) Once 
Inflation or Deflation has been documented, the government 
economists point with pride at the supposed perpetrators: the 
public. They never direct their attention at the real culprit in 
America: the privately owned Federal Reserve system. 

This private banking establishment has complete control 
over the quantity of money in circulation. Therefore, they 
have the ability to create Inflation or Deflation whenever 
they choose to do so. 

The rising price level without a corresponding increase in 
a family's income causes the wife in a family unit who has 
chosen to care for her own child at home to leave the nurtur- 
ing of the children to others in order to seek gainful employ- 


243 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


ment so that she can increase the family's earnings. The 

parents are forced to place their children in a government 
run school. This enables the planners to teach the children 
what they want taught at an earlier age. And it places the 
mother in a position where she sees less and less of her 

children, and the children see more and more of the govern- 
ment trained substitute "parents." 

The planners have been extremely successful, as the 

number of working mothers has been steadily increasing. 
According to a report issued in 1987, more than 44 percent of 
women work outside the home, compared to only 32 percent 
in 1960. Of women with children under one year of age, close 
to 50 percent are currently employed, a figure that has 

doubled since 1970. 584 

But, what happens to the child when they are placed into 
day care centers? Are they better off? One group of indi- 

viduals who feel that they are not are the doctors inside the 
American Academy of Pediatrics who have reported that the 
children placed in these centers are subject to all sorts of 
diseases caused by bacteria, viruses and parasites. They are 

more than 12 times as likely to catch flu viruses and 15 to 
20 times more likely to catch other diseases than children 

under maternal care. 

So the day care center has a negative impact on the 

health of a child placed there by a working mother. When the 
child gets sick, the mother must take time off from her job to 
care for the child, or to place the child in the hands of the 
medical fraternity. If the mother gets paid by the hour, and 
only gets paid when she is on the job, this frequent sickness 
costs the family additional revenue. And the only time that 
the mother sees her child, other than evenings or weekends, 
is when the child is sick and not feeling well. This does not 
tend to support warm mother-child feelings. 

But there is another lesser known problem when the 
mother is not directly involved in the care of the child. Until 
fairly recently, the assumption that care by the mother was 
the best kind of child care went unchallenged. John Bowlby's 
widely acclaimed book entitled MATERNAL CARE AND 
MENTAL HEALTH, published in 1951, concluded that the 
"warm, intimate, and continuous" care of the mother or 
permanent mother substitute was essential to the "develo- 
pment of character and mental health." He called the absence 
of this mother-child relationship "maternal deprivation" and 


244 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


said that it was likely to result in "maladjustment of the 
child." 

This was the consensus view of the vast majority of psy- 
chologists, psychiatrists, pediatricians, and the general public 
until the medical and professional organizations capitulated to 
the demands of the feminist movement in the 1970s. 

The continuing debate over Dr. Jay Belsky's recent "here- 
sy" is testimony to the power of the feminist/day care lobby 
in academic and professional circles. Belsky, a professor of 
child psychology at Pennsylvania State University, was, a 
decade ago, one of the influential voices that saw no harm in 
institutional child care. Now, he says, convincing research 
shows that non-maternal care for more than 20 hours per 
week for children under a year old is a "risk factor." Day care 
at that young age can impede secure parent/child relation- 
ships and lead to rebellious and aggressive behavior, or shy 
and withdrawn behavior in the preschool and early years. His 
views have caused him much grief, as colleagues and femi- 
nists have come down hard on him for his views. They have 
impugned his research, his credentials, and his motives. 585 

Even Dr. Benjamin Spock, certainly no "conservative" in 
other matters, has also resisted the push for group child care, 
especially before the age of three. He has taken a position 
that appears to be out of character for him. He has written: 


"It 

is stressful for 

children 

to have to 

cope 

with 

groups. 

with strangers. 

with people outside 

the 

fam- 

ily." 586 





And 

another "certified 

Harvard 

liberal," Professor 

Burton 


White, warns parents: 

"Unless you have a very good reason, I urge you 
not to delegate the primary child-rearing task to any- 
one else during your child's first three years of life." 387 

But the debate is certain to continue. Those who want to 
destroy the family will continue to urge mothers to leave the 
home and "become fulfilled in the workplace." When the 
mother goes into the workplace to "become fulfilled," or to 
increase the family's income, she leaves the care of the chil- 
dren to others. 


245 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


Those who warn against such practices will continue to be 
scorned by the feminists and others who have a hidden 
agenda: they want to destroy the family. 

Another subtle pressure against marriage was concealed 
inside a headline in a local newspaper that read: "New tax 

laws to increase 'marriage tax' for many." The article defined 
the term "marriage tax" as a term used to: 

"describe the extra tax burden paid by a married 
couple when compared with the tax paid by two single 
people with the same total income." 588 

So, those individuals smart enough to know how the tax 
laws work against them decide not to get married. 

And in some cases, the destruction of the family has not 
gone unnoticed. Newsweek magazine of January 12, 1981, 
carried an article by Dr. Jonathan Kellerman, a psychologist, 
and author. He wrote this: 

"However, when one examines the role 
government has played in its relationship to the 

family, it is clear that not only has there been no 

support, on the contrary there has been a systematic 
erosion of the family, perpetuated by executive, 
legislative and judicial branches of government. 

The trend of the last two decades toward more 

government intervention and control has carried with 

it a clear message to families: you are not competent 

to decide how to live your life — we know better. " 389 

And some in America have discovered that the 

psychologist was correct. An article in the Arizona Republic 
reported that "Family life [was! harmed by government, poll 
says." The article quoted pollster George Gallup, who said 

that: 


"nearly 

half 

of those 

who 

responded to 

his 

organization's 

1980 

survey on 

the 

American family 

be- 

lieve the 

federal 

government 

has 

an unfavorable 

in- 


fluence on family life." 59 

And the government is once again using the tax laws to 
discriminate against families with full time mothers. The 


246 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


present tax code favors families whose mothers enter the 
work force over families with full-time mothers. Those par- 
ents who do not send the mother out into the work force 

must subsidize those who do. 

Secondly, the tax laws are weighted heavily against 

parental choice in child care. Most surveys indicate that 
working parents generally prefer leaving their child with 
relatives, neighbors or friends. Current tax laws do not 

recognize these forms of child care as legitimate; thus, par- 
ents who choose to use them do not receive an income-tax 
credit for the costs of child care. So many parents choose to 
have the government assist them in the costs of their child 
care by providing a tax credit and give their children over to 

the government to raise them. 

And lastly, current or proposed legislation concerning 
child care tax credits discriminate against the many church- 
related day care facilities. These laws prohibit funding for 
any child care facility "unless all religious symbols and arti- 
facts are covered or have been removed." 

A classic example of the unrestrained use of government 
force against a child care facility occurred in 1984, when the 
State of Texas attempted to completely shut down three chil- 
dren's homes run by Pastor Lester Roloff. He, like Pastor 
Silevin before him, refused to allow the state to license his 
homes for the children who had been voluntarily placed there 
by their parents. The state of Texas went to court, but in 
1981 a state district judge denied its request for an injunc- 
tion against the Pastor's homes, concluding that the licensing 
procedure as applied to the church running them would vio- 
late the constitutions of both the United States and Texas. 
The federal Court of Appeals affirmed the trial court's de- 
cision. 

However, the state Supreme Court rejected the church's 

contention that licensing would interfere with religious free- 
dom. The Chief Justice did not object to the quality of the 
care provided by the Roloff homes; his concern was the sim- 
ple fact that they would not submit to licensing. He noted 
that the homes have "a good record of high quality service," 
and that they could "easily satisfy licensing requirements, but 
had chosen not to do so." 

So the state wanted certain restrictions on the care provi- 
ded children in Pastor Roloffs homes. Several of those restric- 
tions were so incredible that they show that the major reason 


247 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


the state went after the child care facilities was simply that 
they were too successful. 

The first of these restrictions was (not a complete list): 

1. "You should not threaten a child with the 
displeasure of Deity." 

In other words, you couldn't tell a child that he was a 
sinner. Remember that these children had been placed in 
these homes because they had become disciplinary problems 
to their parents. The parents, who had seen their children 
become involved in prostitution, drugs and criminal activity, 
had turned to the Pastor for help in turning their child 
around. They turned to him because he was a Christian Pas- 
tor, and because he had demonstrated success in hundreds of 
similar cases before. These parents loved their children and 
wanted them to stop their criminal and anti-social behavior. 
They cared for them enough to voluntarily place them in a 
program that had proven successful. Only a very small per- 
centage of these children had been placed in these homes by 
the court system. 

One of the reasons the Pastor was successful was because 
he turned the children to religion. But the state told him he 
could not use that as a method of correcting the child. 

The second restriction was: 

2. "The institution shall see that each child is 
supplied with personal clothing suitable to 
the child's age and size. It shall be 
comparable to the clothing of other children 
in the community." 

The Pastor and his staff felt that much of the clothing the 
children were wearing was too suggestive and improper. So 
they attempted to provide the children with modest clothing 
less stimulating and provocative. They felt that this restric- 
tion would place the children back into the clothing that in 
many cases had caused them to have problems before their 
arrival at the Roloff homes. 

The third restriction was: 


248 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


3. "Children should be encouraged to form 

friendships with persons outside the insti- 
tution." 

It would be fair to observe that such friendships were fre- 
quently what brought the children to the homes in the first 
place. 

The fourth restriction was: 


4. "The opinions 

and recommendations 

of 

the 

children in care 

shall be 

considered 

in 

the 

development and 

evaluation 

of the 

program 

and activities. The 

documented." 

procedure 

for this 

shall 

be 

Letting the inmates 

run the prison 

sounds like 

an 

excel- 


lent idea until the prisoners suggest that the restraining bars 
should be removed. Many of these children had become disci- 

pline problems mainly because they had decided that they 
could best run their own lives. When this determination had 
failed, the parents placed them into Pastor Roloff s homes so 

that they would learn some discipline. But the state wanted 
them to learn how to run their own lives again. 

The purpose of all of this incredible pressure on the Roloff 
homes appeared to be the desire of the state to weaken the 
ability of the Roloff homes to be successful with these trou- 

bled children. A secondary purpose appeared to be the desire 
to weaken the family, and encourage the state to devise 

methods that would remove the control of the children from 
the parents and to give them over to the state. 

Perhaps the role model that the family destroyers want to 
emulate is the Soviet Union, where enormous pressures are 

intentionally placed upon the Russian family. 

Parade magazine carried an article about an American 
family which had returned to Russia in 1987 after having 
lived there in the late 1960's. The wife in the marriage has 

written a book about modern life in that nation, and these 

are some of her observations. 

"... the average young married woman in the So- 
viet Union ... is a prisoner of the Soviet custom and 

doctrine, which calls for a wife, without her husband's 
help, to perform the tough, rough, rugged household 


249 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


chores — the laundry, the cleaning, the cooking, the 
moving, the shopping, the child-caring — all of these in 

addition to holding down her own job outside the 

home eight hours a day." 591 

In Russia, work is a duty of its citizens. That obligation 
has been written into their Constitution. 

Article 12 reads as follows: 

"Work in the U.S.S.R. is a duty and a matter of 
honour for every able-bodied citizen, in accordance 

with the principle: 'He who does not work, neither 

shall he eat.' 

The principle applied in the U.S.S.R. is that of 

socialism: 'From each according to his ability, to each 

according to his work.’" 

It would appear from a cursory examination of these sen- 
tences that work in Russia is for men only. The first para- 
graph refers to work being a male occupation: "HE who does 
not work ...," and the second says: "... according to HIS 
ability." However, the first paragraph says that "Work is a 
duty ... for every able-bodied citizen." Women are "able bodied 
citizens" just like men. Therefore, the Constitution makes it 
clear that this work requirement is for both sexes. Women 
must toil for the Russian economy as well as men. 

This means that married women are obligated to work as 
well as single women. The fact that the married woman must 
work for the state obviously leaves the children free to be 

raised by the government. And that is the desired result of 
that provision in the Constitution. 

And the fact that the married woman must work for the 
society means that she has less time to spend with her fam- 
ily. 

The article continued with some of the obstacles that the 
Russian economy puts on the wife during the typical day: 

"... the Soviet woman ... rises early, not much 

past 6, prepares breakfast for the family, gets the 

children off to school, goes to her own work. During 
lunch, it’s hurry up and wait. Instead of enjoying her 

breather, she bolts down her food and races to the 
nearest store, where she waits and waits and waits to 


250 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


buy whatever approximates the needs of her family. 
Almost always there's a shortage of meat, fruit, 

vegetables, soap and quality products of anything." 

The Soviet economic system, called Communism, has been 
proven to be a failure by 6000 years of experience. The Com- 
munist system destroys the incentive to produce and the 
population suffers from the lack of consumption goods. No 
Communist would be bold enough to admit that it is the sys- 
tem that has failed. So contrived explanations are offered to 
explain the shortages. 

There is no food because a "drought" reduced farm yields. 
"Military equipment spending priorities" have replaced pro- 

duction quotas for consumption goods. 

It is certainly conceivable that those in charge want the 
married family to suffer these pressures, so that few in the 
married population will be happy. The entire system is inten- 
tionally designed to be a failure, and no one would dare cor- 
rect it. 

It is clear that pressure on the family is the desired 
product of Communism. 

The article confirmed this with this comment: 

"No wonder so many Soviet men drink, sulk and 
accuse their wives of frigidity and indifference. No 

wonder the Soviet Union is so rife with divorce." 

The married woman in Russia is obviously too tired to 

care for her husband, and the result becomes predictable: a 
rising divorce rate. 

And no one blames those who have intentionally created 
an economic system that was certain to put those pressures 
on the family. The planners have experienced their desired 

result: marriage has become the least desired relationship in 

Russia. 

Perhaps the entire scenario was placed into perspective on 

the side of the government "experts" by B. F. Skinner, the 
chairman of the Harvard Department of Psychology, who 
wrote this about his book entitled BEYOND FREEDOM AND 
DIGNITY: 


251 



CHAPTER 29 THE ATTACK ON THE FAMILY 


"My book is an effort to demonstrate how things 

go bad when you make a fetish out of individual 

freedom and dignity. 

If you insist that individual rights are the 

'summum bonum,' [meaning the highest good,] then 

the whole structure of society falls down." 392 

So, those who want to destroy the family want the world 
to turn the society over to them. 

And those running the society continue to destroy it. 

The strategy is not new. In fact, it has been the strategy 
of this conspiracy for centuries. 

They cause the problem. 

Then they solve the problem with more government. 

And the people are convinced that their solution is desir- 
able, generally because that is the only solution offered. 

And the end result is less freedom for the people. 

And it works nearly every time. 


252 



Chapter 30 

The Right of 
Association 


One of the cornerstones of freedom is the right to nego- 
tiate a contract with another individual or a group of indi- 

viduals. The free man or woman has the right to decide who 
they will enter into a contract with. It follows, therefore, that 
no one has the right to force another into a contract that the 

individual does not freely want to enter into. 

Forcing one individual into a contract that that individual 

did not freely enter into is called slavery or involuntary ser- 
vitude. 

Allowing the government to choose an individual's asso- 
ciates and forcing them to join together is also wrong and is 
another form of involuntary servitude or slavery. 

All men and women have the right to protect themselves 
from the coercive force of other individuals or groups. Men 


253 



CHAPTER 30 THE RIGHT OF ASSOCIATION 


and women join together to form governments to protect their 
rights from the aggressive and coercive activities of others. 

One of the functions of government is to protect people 
from contracts that were not freely entered into. These con- 
tracts are to be declared null and void, and are to have no 
legal force or effect. 

One of the basic purposes of The New World Order is to 
restrict the right of the individual to be free from the coercive 
force of another. 

These definitions of slavery and involuntary servitude are 
currently being challenged by those who wish to enslave man- 
kind. Examples of how slavery is becoming fashionable are 
appearing in every segment of society, and courts are making 
slavery the law of the land. 

A legal contract is defined as one in which two or more 
parties agree to certain terms in order to reach mutually ac- 
ceptable goals. If one party is forced into any contract against 
his or her will, the contract is declared to be null and void 
and therefore unenforceable. 

As was discussed, one of the functions of the courts of the 
United States is to enforce valid contracts between two con- 
senting individuals. Once an individual enters into a contract, 
the other party has the right to have the terms of the con- 
tract met, even if the first party decides later not to perform 
as required. But, todays courts are enforcing contracts where 
one party was forced into the terms of the contract. Or, in 
other cases, where one party did not agree to the terms. In 
those cases, the courts have chosen to force that party to 
abide by the terms of a contract that they were unwilling to 
make. 

This is simply called slavery. 

A good case in point was a Supreme Court ruling in 1987 
where they forced the Rotary Clubs, a group of men volun- 
tarily joined together for friendship and acts of charity, to 
accept women as members. The article that reported on this 
ruling said: 

"The Supreme Court, toppling another sex barrier, 
declared yesterday that state civil rights laws may 
force Rotary International and similar all-male private 
clubs within the state to admit women as members. 

By a vote of 7-0, the justices concluded that a 

California anti -discrimination statute requiring women 


254 



CHAPTER 30 THE RIGHT OF ASSOCIATION 


to be admitted to Rotary clubs within the state does 

not violate the right of members to choose their own 

associates." 593 

A review of the comments of the Supreme Court reveal 

exactly how words have lost their meaning, and are to mean 
exactly what the Court says they mean. 

First of all, the Court agreed that these clubs were "pri- 
vate." That meant that the members were not publicly invit- 

ing others into their organization. They were exercising their 
right to associate with whomever they chose to associate 
with. These men, acting as free individuals, were choosing to 

associate in a voluntary manner with only those people they 

wished to associate with. 

This is a right of free men. 

The Court was forcing them into a contract with people 
that they freely chose not to associate with. After the court 
decision, one can only wonder what would have happened if 
the Rotary Clubs decided to disband because they wished to 
associate only with men. Would the Court have forced them 
to continue their meetings? And, then what would have hap- 

pened if no one chose to attend? Would the court have jailed 
the missing members? How would they have known whether 
a person's failure to attend was the result of a legitimate 
illness or because he chose not to attend? Would the court 
have forced him to provide a doctor's excuse to explain his 

absence? 

The Court said that this use of court ordered force did not 
violate the "right of members to choose their own associates." 
The Court admitted that the men had this right, and then 
ruled that they didn't have this right. This is double-talk of 
the highest order. 

Freedom does not mean that certain people are free to 
force other people into associations that the first have deemed 
advisable. 

Simply stated: 


Free men discriminate. 

Slaves do not. 

Free men have the right to "choose their own associates." 
Slaves do not. 

255 



CHAPTER 30 THE RIGHT OF ASSOCIATION 


Therefore, when the Court ruled that the Rotary Clubs 
had not chosen correctly, and forced them to associate with 
individuals that they had freely chosen not to associate with, 

the men in the Clubs were no longer free to "choose their 
own associates." 

The Court has decided that slavery was preferable to 
freedom. 

In another flagrant violation of a free man's right of 

association, the U.S. Justice Department filed suit against a 
Christian conference center, claiming that it violated federal 
civil rights laws when it prohibited the Mormons from using 
the facilities to espouse their own teachings. 

If one individual has the right to associate with whomever 
that individual chooses to associate with, a group of indi- 

viduals also have that right. 

In this case, the discrimination charges were levied by a 
Mormon group that was denied permission to rent the facili- 

ties to hold their own conference and teach Mormon religious 
beliefs. The director of the center stated that he had turned 
them down because the Mormon view of Christianity differed 
markedly from the beliefs of the owners of the center. Should 
a court determine that the Inn is a "public accommodation" 
on the basis of offering meals and overnight lodging, the de- 
cision could signal increased governmental control over other 
religious conference facilities, or, for that matter, any "public" 
facility. 

Should a hotel be allowed to refuse the rental of a room 
to a group advocating the violent overthrow of the govern- 
ment? 

Should a hotel be allowed to not rent to a group advo- 
cating violent animal sacrifice if they determine that when 
the group asks for facilities for the purpose of conducting 
their religious rites? 

Just where does the right of one group to practice their 
religion end, and where does the right of the hotel to rent to 

anyone they choose to begin? 

In another case, the Minnesota Court of Appeals also 
ruled against the right of free association. In 1986, they 

upheld a $300-a-day fine levied against a chain of health 

clubs for failing to bring a halt to employment practices in- 
volving religious discrimination. The owners of the health 

clubs argued that they could not comply with the order to 
cease discrimination against non-Christians because they felt 


256 



CHAPTER 30 THE RIGHT OF ASSOCIATION 


that they had the right to employ only those who agreed with 
their religious views. In other words, they believed that they 

had the right to employ only fellow Christians if they had 

freely chosen to do so. 59 
The court ruled that they were wrong. 

And even an organization as "all-American" as the Boy 

Scouts of America does not have the right to freely chose 
their associates. In 1983, the 2nd District Court of Appeals 
decided that the Boy Scouts did not have the right to refuse 

membership to those young people who were homosexual. 595 

It is not a stretch of this "logic" to imagine that the 

courts will soon decide that a church does not have the right 

to reject the application for church membership of an ad- 

mitted "atheist." This would be "religious discrimination." 

But, to further confound the problem, it appears that this 

nation's courts do not have a clear and definite policy about 

discrimination. 

In 1987, a state court of appeals ruled that boys could be 
barred from playing on girls' high school teams to prevent 
them from dominating the game and displacing the girls. 596 

So, the result of these and similar decisions is to clearly 
say to the world: 

you will discriminate when ordered to do so, but 

you may not freely choose to discriminate. 

The courts have now made it mandatory that you can 
"freely associate" only with whomever they decide that you 
can "freely associate with." 

And if you do not choose to "freely associate" with 
someone, they wish you to "freely associate" with, the courts 
will force you to "freely associate" with that person. 

That is simply called court ordered slavery. 

Obviously, "slavery" is no longer "slavery." 

And "freedom" is no longer "freedom." 

Furthermore, if the above cited examples were not 
enough, even certain Senators in the United States Senate 
have admitted that they no longer know what the two words 
mean. 

In April of 1989, Senator John McCain, a Republican from 
Arizona, introduced Senate Bill 781, a bill called the National 
Service Act of 1989. This bill calls for the Administration to 


257 



CHAPTER 30 THE RIGHT OF ASSOCIATION 


"develop a comprehensive, mandatory national service pro- 
gram." 

The Senator offered the curious public a brief explanation 

of his bill in a news release dated April 13, 1989. In it, he 

explained that: 

"This legislation will establish a program leading 

to a comprehensive, fair and mandatory system of 

community or military service to the nation." 597 

The bill stipulates: 

"... that both men and women between 16 and 26 

would be required to serve either in the community of in 

the military. They would serve 24 hours a month and 

two weeks during the year for two to four years." 398 

The Senator's news release stated that this bill would be 

"fair." Somehow, forcing someone to serve the nation is now 
deemed to be "fair." 

Slavery used to be defined as forcing one individual to 
serve another. 

Slavery used to be called "madness." 

Now it is being called "fair." 

But that is what the Senator says in his news release. 

The news release further explained why the Senator had 

chosen to introduce the bill: 

"This program will allow us to combine the re- 
sponsibilities of citizenship with a concerted effort that 
addresses vital community and national defense needs 
that, otherwise, will be unmet in the years ahead." 

So "mandatory service" to the government has now be- 
come a "responsibility of citizenship." 

Man was created to be free! 

Man was not created to be a slave of government! 

In fact, government was created by men to be the servant 
of mankind ! 

Man was not to be the servant of government ! 

America used to be called "the land of the free and the 
home of the brave." 


258 



CHAPTER 30 THE RIGHT OF ASSOCIATION 


Now, one will be mandatorily obligated to serve the na- 
tion. That is the new "requirement of citizenship." 

Freedom is not mandatory service! 

To show that there is bi-partisan support of this concept 
of "fairness," Arizona's other Senator, Dennis DeConcini, a 
Democrat, also publicly announced his support of the idea. 

Senator McCain had a somewhat revealing experience be- 
fore he ran for this office. He was a pilot in the so-called 
Vietnamese "war" and was taken captive by the North Viet- 
namese after his airplane was shot down. He spent several 
years in a Vietnamese prisoner of war camp, prior to being 

released after the end of the "war." 

The Senator was not "free" to leave the prisoner of war 
camp. He was a "slave" of the Vietnamese. He was there "in- 
voluntarily." He had to do as he was told. 

One can only presume that if anyone should understand 
the words "slavery," "involuntary" and "mandatory," it should 
be the Senator. But, for some reason, he does not. And, ap- 
parently, neither does Senator DeConcini. 

It is ironic that both of these men had taken the same 
oath when they became Senators. That oath reads: 

"I do hereby swear or affirm that I will support 
and defend the Constitution of the United States 
against all enemies, foreign and domestic; that I will 

bear true faith and allegiance to the same; that I will 

take this obligation freely without any mental reserva- 
tion or purpose of evasion; and that I will well and 

faithfully discharge the duties of the office on which I 
am about to enter, so help me God." 

These two Senators took an oath to defend the Constitu- 
tion of the United States when they became Senators. If 
either had taken the time to read the document in its en- 
tirety, they would have read the 13th Amendment which was 

passed after the Civil War of 1861-1865. There are some 
historians who claim that that war was fought to end slavery. 

That amendment reads: 

"Neither slavery not involuntary servitude, except 
as a punishment for crime whereof the party shall 
have been duly convicted, shall exist within the United 
States." 


259 



CHAPTER 30 THE RIGHT OF ASSOCIATION 


If Senator McCain's bill makes all of America's young peo- 
ple "slaves" of the government, or requires "involuntary servi- 
tude," and the only "slavery" or "involuntary servitude" that 
is legal is as a "punishment for a crime," it follows that 
citizenship in America must be termed a "crime," the punish- 
ment for which is "involuntary servitude." 

So "slavery" becomes "freedom," and "freedom" becomes 
"slavery," in the convoluted thinking of these two Senators. 
"Involuntary servitude" becomes "fair." "Mandatory service" 
becomes a "responsibility of citizenship." 

America's founding fathers had no such problem with un- 
derstanding the difference between the two words "freedom" 
and "slavery." They wrote this in the Declaration of Indepen- 
dence: 

"We hold these truths to be self-evident that all 
men are created equal, that they are endowed by their 
creator with certain inalienable rights, that among 
these are life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness." 

A "self-evident truth" is one that is not debatable. It is 
true simply because it is true. No one can say that a "self- 
evident truth" is false, because man's mind tells him that it 
is true. Man cannot debate whether these rights belong to 
mankind, because they are not debatable. 

These rights were deemed to be "inalienable" by those 
who wrote the Declaration. That word is defined as: 

"that which may not be taken away or trans- 
ferred." 

The Declaration went on to say that "liberty" was one of 
those inalienable, self-evident rights. 

The word "liberty" is defined in a dictionary as: 

"freedom or release from slavery, imprisonment, 
captivity, or any other form of arbitrary control." 

Liberty is freedom. Freedom from government. Freedom 
from "mandatory service." Freedom from the slavery of Sen- 
ators like McCain and DeConcini. 


260 



CHAPTER 30 THE RIGHT OF ASSOCIATION 


Man's inalienable right to "Liberty" is no longer a "self- 
evident" truth. Senators have now decided that "liberty" is 
"mandatory service." 

Slavery is now "fair." 

The New World Order is getting closer. 


261 



Chapter 3 1 

The Attack on 
Education 


On Thanksgiving Day in 1984, three brothers and their 
wives were all arrested in Idaho and jailed for 21 days. 

About the same time, two others, a husband and wife, 
were arrested and imprisoned for 132 days. 

These people all had one thing in common: they believed 
in religious freedom. They had all taken their children out of 
public school so that they could teach them at home. 

The Constitution of the United States, in the First 

Amendment, guarantees to every American their God-given, 
inalienable right to the free exercise of their religious views. 
The pertinent part of that Amendment reads as follows: 

"Congress shall make no law respecting an estab- 
lishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise 

thereof ...." 


262 



CHAPTER 3 1 THE ATTACK ON EDUCATION 


These parents were exercising their God-given rights to 
religious freedom, but were denied, and even imprisoned, for 
attempting to exercise those rights. 

The Masons/Communists/Humanists/Illuminists all want 
the government to train the children of the nation in govern- 
ment run schools. 

Adam Weishaupt, the founder of the Illuminati, wrote: 

"We must win the common people in every corner. 
This will be obtained chiefly by means of the schools." 599 

"We must acquire the direction of education — of 
church — management — of the professorial chair, and of 
the pulpit." 600 

And Professor John Robison wrote in his book about the 
Illuminati entitled PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY that: 


"They [the Illuminati] contrived to place their 

Members as tutors to the youth of distinction." 601 

Karl Marx, the Communist, wrote this plank in his COM- 
MUNIST MANIFESTO: 

"Free education for all children in public schools." 602 

Matt Cvetic, who for nine years was an undercover agent 
in the Communist Party USA for the FBI, attended a secret 
meeting of top-level Communists in 1948, at which a Soviet 
Agent played a speech from Joseph Stalin, the head of the 
Communist Party in Russia. The Russian dictator had given 
directions to the American Communists to put new emphasis 
on the recruitment of youth. This is part of that speech: 


"We Communists gained control of the Youth in 
Russia before we were able to wage a successful Com- 
munist Revolution in Russia, and Comrades, we must 
gain control of the Youth in the United States if we are 
to wage a successful Communist Revolution in that 
nation. 

For this purpose, we are ordering our Comrades to 


set up a new Communist Youth group in the United 
States." 603 


263 



CHAPTER 3 1 THE ATTACK ON EDUCATION 


Six years later, Pravda printed a Declaration of the 
Central Committee of the Communist Party. It was signed by 
Premier Nikita Khrushchev, the dictator of Russia. The decla- 
ration proclaimed: 

"... scientific and atheistic propaganda is an inte- 
gral part of the Communist education of the working 
people, and has as its aim the dissemination of scien- 
tific, materialist knowledge among the masses and 

liberation of believers from the influence of religious 
prejudices." 604 

But even more recently, Victor Mikronenko, the current 
head of the Young Communist League, called Komsomol, was 
interviewed by New York Times reporter Bill Keller in Feb- 
ruary, 1988. Mr. Keller reported that Mikronenko: 

"said he sees no reason to change the policy 
banning believers [in God] from Komsomol. Atheist 
education is one of the primary tasks of the youth 
organization."' 6(to 

The Communists see education as a vehicle to re-educate 
young children away from religion and a belief in God. 

Similar attempts have occurred and are occurring in America. 

The Masons have lent their support to public education. 
Henry C. Clausen, 33rd degree Mason, and the Sovereign 
Grand Commander for the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry until 
a short time ago, wrote a little pamphlet entitled DEVILISH 
DANGER. In this he makes the case for Masonic support of 
public education. He wrote: 

"So, we [presumably he spoke for all Masonry] 

say again: Hands off our public schools! Keep church/ 

state forever separated! Stay American!" 606 

The Supreme Commander of the Masons said he was 

concerned that the Supreme Court in 1983 had granted per- 
mission for the state of Minnesota to allow a tax deduction 
for undercollegiate private/church school tuition. He felt 
concern, apparently, that the private school parents were 

getting a religious exemption over those who were not reli- 


264 



CHAPTER 3 1 THE ATTACK ON EDUCATION 


gious. As far as could be seen in his pamphlet, he expressed 
no concern about why Christian parents, who wished to pay 
for a private education for their children in a private school, 
should be forced to pay for two educations, one of which the 
parents never utilized. 

The issue involved the reasoning behind the requirement 
that parents who provide an alternative education for their 
children have to pay for two educations: the one they use, 
and the one they don't use. The issue is not about religion: it 
is about freedom! 

But Mr. Clausen did not see it that way. 

He apparently wants all children taught what the gov- 
ernment wants taught in government schools. 

And secondly, Mr. Clausen apparently did not recognize 
the fact that "non-religious" people have the same God-given 
right to take their children out of government schools and 
teach them at home as do "religious" people. 

The Mason also did not answer the question posed by 
Sam Blumenfeld, an author of great merit who writes on the 
subject of education. He posed this question in his book en- 
titled NEA: TROJAN HORSE IN AMERICA: 

"If the [states] can forbid the slightest hint of 
religion in its public schools on the grounds that it 

violates the separation of church and state, how can 
it then justify its massive intrusion into the life of a 
church school?" 607 

This is a legitimate question and one that the Human- 

ists/Illuminati/Communists/New Agers appear to be unwilling 
to answer. 

And Mr. Blumenfield makes this observation as well: 

"... the government does not have the right to 
compose a prayer for use in its own schools, but in 

Nebraska and elsewhere it claims the right to regu- 
late the curriculum of a church school that doesn't 

even want government support and would be denied 
it even if it wanted it on the grounds that such 
support would violate the establishment clause 
[meaning the First Amendment prohibiting the "es- 

tablishment of a religion."] 608 


265 



CHAPTER 3 1 THE ATTACK ON EDUCATION 


The Humanists added their support for public education 

with this, the 11th Principle in the HUMANIST MANIFESTO 

II: 

"We believe in the right to universal education." 609 

Some have told the world why they want the state to 

educate the children. Ashley Montague wrote this: 

"Every child in America comes to school 'insane' at 

the age of six because of the American family struc- 

ture." 6fo 

Others who saw the problem of children being brought up 
with what they consider to be the poisonous attitudes of re- 

ligious parents was the National Training Laboratories, a pro- 
gram run by the National Education Association, the national 
teacher's union. They wrote: 

"Although they [the children of religious parents] 
appear to behave appropriately and seem normal by 

most cultural standards, they may actually be in need 

of mental health care, in order to help them change, 

adapt, and conform to the planned society in which 

there will be no conflict of attitudes or beliefs." 611 

The humanists apparently see it as a problem when the 
parents control what their children are taught. The parents 
have complete control of their children for at least the first 

five or six years of their lives. Then the state begins the 

educational process when the child is placed into either kin- 

dergarten or the first grade. 

One of the major concerns of the humanists is that the 

parents might instill some religious values in their child 

before the public school begins their formal training program. 

One who voiced that opinion was Paul Blanchard who said 
this in 1976: 


"I 

think that 

the 

most 

important 

factor 

moving us 

toward 

a secular 

[meaning 

worldly] 

society 

has 

been 

the educational factor. 







Our 

schools 

may 

not 

teach Johnny to 

read 

prop- 


erly, but the fact that Johnny is in school until he is 


266 



CHAPTER 3 1 THE ATTACK ON EDUCATION 


sixteen tends to lead toward the elimination of reli- 
gious superstition. 

The average American child now acquires a high 
school education, and this militates against Adam 
and Eve and all other myths of alleged history." 612 

Another who foresaw that the public schools were the 
solution to the problem of children being taught religious 
beliefs by their parents was John Dunphy, who wrote an es- 
say entitled A RELIGION FOR THE NEW AGE for the Hu- 
manist magazine. This is part of what he wrote: 

"I am convinced that the battle for humankind's 
future must be waged and won in the public school 

classrooms by teachers who correctly perceive their 
role as the new proselytizers of a new faith: a re- 
ligion of humanity that recognizes and respects the 

spark of what theologians call divinity in every hu- 
man being. [There is that thought again that man is 

god.] 

These teachers must embody the same selfless 

dedication as the most rabid fundamentalist preach- 

ers. 

The classroom must and will become an arena of 

conflict between the old and the new — the rotting 

corpse of Christianity, together with all its adjacent 

evils and misery, and the new faith ... resplendent in 

its promise ...." 613 

One of the most celebrated educators of the past was 
Professor George S. Counts of Columbia University. He wrote 
that he saw the need to change the purpose of education in a 
1932 monograph entitled DARE THE SCHOOLS BUILD A 
NEW SOCIAL ORDER? He made his views very clear as to 
what he thought the purpose of education was with these 
comments: 

"Ignorance must be replaced by knowledge, com- 
petition by cooperation, trust in Providence [meaning 
a belief in God] by careful planning, and private cap- 
italism by some form of socialized economy ...." 614 


267 



CHAPTER 3 1 THE ATTACK ON EDUCATION 


With all of this discussion about what education should 

or should not be, one would think that all of the dialogue has 

caused education to become a science of precise definition. By 
now, the purposes of education should have been carefully 
thought out, so that there should be no further debate as to 
what it is. However, such is not the case. 

In 1979, a newsletter called EDUCATION USA reported 
that at least one judge stated that no one knew what 
education was. That rather revealing conclusion was offered 
by a judge in a court case involving a mother who sued the 
San Francisco Unified School District in 1976 because her 

son, who was a high school graduate, could not read or write. 
She sought damages for remedial education and the wages 
her son would be unable to earn because of his lack of 
educational skills. The judge disagreed, according to the 

newsletter, saying: 

"Schools have no legal duty to educate. If there 
is no legal duty to educate, there can be no malprac- 

tice where education fails." 615 

The judge in the district court that heard the case 
reported that "schools have no legal duty to educate," because 
the purpose of education was not known. Not even the edu- 
cators know what they are to do with the children forcibly 

brought to their schools. 

The judge in the appeals court explained: 

"The science of pedagogy [defined as the art or 

science of teaching] itself is fraught with different 

and conflicting theories ...." 

As a result, he said, there is no way to assess the 
school's negligence when they do not educate any child. 

So the courts do not know what the purpose of education 
is. 

But some of the educators know. It is to make certain 

that the child in the government schools no longer believes in 
what his parents have taught him. They certainly know that 
the purpose of education is to remove all religious values 
taught by parents. That is what they are clearly saying! 


268 



CHAPTER 3 1 THE ATTACK ON EDUCATION 


Some in America do know why they want the children in 
the government schools. The judge was wrong. Some know, 
and some want the parents to send them their children. 

But the child still does not learn the three essentials of a 
good education: what used to be called the "3 R's: reading, 'ri- 
ting and ’rithmetic." The pablum offered all of the children, 

and the holding back of the bright child to teach the slow 

child, has caused a nation of anxious, dull students. 

The sight of children in school unable to learn has 
caused medical doctors and psychologists to create a whole 
new field of childhood diseases called either Attention Deficit 
Disorder or Minimal Brain Disfunction. Children are now 

termed to have Learning Disorders. Children are now called 

Learning Disabled. 

The "bible" of the psychiatric industry, known as the 
Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, gives 

the symptoms of this new disease: (only a partial list): 


A. Inattention: At least three 

exhibiting activity like: often 


of the following: 
failing to finish 

doesn't seem to 
difficulty con- 
other tasks re- 


things he or she starts; often 
listen; easily distracted; has 
centrating on schoolwork or 
quiring sustained attention; etc. 

B. Impulsivity: At last three of 

exhibiting behavior like: often 

thinking; shifts excessively from 

to another; etc. 

C. Hyperactivity: At least two of the following: 

exhibiting behavior like: running about or 

climbing on things excessively; has difficulty 
staying still or fidgets excessively; etc. 


the following: 
acts before 
one activity 


And quite often after the child has been diagnosed as 
having this disorder, he or she will be given Ritalin, a drug 
that is supposed to cause normal behavior. The drug also has 
another name: people on the streets call the drug "speed." 

But the drug has negative reactions: it can cause 

nervousness, insomnia, skin rashes, dermatitis, nausea, dizzi- 
ness, headaches, drowsiness, blood pressure and pulse 

changes, fast heart beat, and weight loss. 

But the drug is still being prescribed. 


269 



CHAPTER 3 1 THE ATTACK ON EDUCATION 


Because of all of these concerns, parents all over the 
United States are withdrawing their children from the public 
schools and either teaching them at home or placing them in 
private or Christian schools that teach religious values. And 
all of this activity has not gone unnoticed by the Humanists/ 
New Agers/Communists. 

Two researchers wrote a report in the February, 1980 

PHI DELTA KAPPAN about this new challenge to the gov- 
ernment school system. They concluded that the trend of re- 
moval will continue, and perhaps accelerate: 

"as fundamentalists remain locked into rigid, 
theologically based positions on many issues while 

American society moves forward." 

They say that the fundamentalists have a right to: 


"march 

resolutely 

toward 

the 

values 

of 

their 

but 

one may 

question 

whether 

they 

should 

take 

growing 
, .» 616 

percentage 

of America's 

youth 

there 

with 


Obviously, declining public school attendance figures have 
caused some government school officials to become concerned, 
because the placing of children in a private school removes 
them from the indoctrination of the public school system. So, 
many states have taken steps to close many of these schools 
down. 

One glaring example of the misuse of the power of the 
state government occurred on January 14, 1986, when thirty 
state and local government officials, including nearly a dozen 
uniformed and plain-clothes officers surrounded the church 

and school of the Santa Monica Foursquare Chinch in South- 
ern California. 

What had provoked this show of force? Were the teachers 
beating the children? Were they forcing them to take drugs? 
Were they teaching the children that cannibalism was a mor- 
al option? 

No, the school was operating without a state issued li- 
cense. 

In another state, in this case North Dakota, a judge con- 
victed a Baptist minister and his wife on charges of violating 
that state's compulsory school attendance law by sending 

270 



CHAPTER 3 1 THE ATTACK ON EDUCATION 


their children to the fundamentalist school they operated. The 
pastor took the same position that other ministers in the na- 
tion have taken: 

"For us to submit ... is to admit that the state is 
lord over the church." 617 

Those who support public education must fear those 
parents who have opted to provide their children with a 
private education in America. They must be trembling be- 
cause of the growth of both private schools and home school- 
ing. Hundreds of thousands of children are not being taught 
what the Humanists/Masons/Communists/New Agers want 
taught in government schools. 

Some children are being taught religious values. 

And that is not acceptable to those who believe in The 
New World Order. 


271 



Chapter 32 
Russian Laws 


When George Washington, America's first president, left 
office in 1789, he delivered what has been called his Farewell 
Address. He spoke of many things, but part of that speech 
consisted of a warning directed to the people of America 
should they ever turn away from a basic religious view of 
mankind. He said: 


"Of 

all the 

dispositions 

and 

habits 

which 

lead 

to 

political 

prosperity. 

religion 

and 

morality 

are 

indispen- 

sable supports .... 







Let 

it simply 

be asked 

where is the security 

for 

prosperity. 

for reputation, for 

life 

if the 

sense 

of 

re- 


ligious obligation desert? 

And let us with caution indulge the supposition 
that morality can be maintained without religion." 618 

The President attempted to warn the people that moved 
away from a concept that God was the father of all mankind. 


272 



CHAPTER 32 RUSSIAN LAWS 


that He had endowed his creatures with rights, and that 
governments were created to protect those rights. 

There are nations in the world today that have moved 
away from the religious concept of a Creator and those na- 
tions live under a totalitarian form of government. One such 
nation is the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, the USSR. 
Article 124 of their constitution plainly states that move 
away from God: 

"In order to ensure to citizens freedom, of con- 
science, the church in the U.S.S.R. is separated from 

the state, and the school from the church." 

That provision in the Russian constitution is an exact ex- 
pression of the philosophy of the New Agers/Communists/ 
Masons/Humanists, who are working for the same goals as 
the Russians Communists. In addition, Russian law adds 

some interesting restrictions on the religious rights of its 
citizens: 

"Religious associations must be registered with 
Government authorities ...." 

This is the reason that private school administrators and 
fundamentalist preachers in America have objected to licens- 
ing their private schools. 

Communist nations register their churches. 

Communist nations control their churches through regis- 
tration. 

Free nations do not. 

America is trying to register its churches. 

The result will be the same. 

Other Russian laws say: 

"Religious associations may not ... give material 

help to their members; organize for children, young 

people and women special prayer or other meetings, 

circles, groups, departments, for Biblical or literary 

study, sewing, working or the teaching of religion .... 

Surveillance over the activities of religious 
associations ... shall be exercised by the registration 

agencies." 


273 



CHAPTER 32 RUSSIAN LAWS 


It is almost as if the New Agers/Humanists/Commu- 
nists/Masons had written the Russian Constitution and its 
supporting laws. 

Th net result of the Russian Constitution and similar 
laws is that there is no religious freedom. The Gulags, the 
Russian concentration camps, house about 6 million prisoners. 

It has been estimated that one half of those prisoners, over-3 
million people, are there simply because they dared to wor- 
ship a God in a nation that says it is illegal to worship. 

So religion in America must be destroyed, just as it has 
been in Russia. The Russians have put their concerns in their 

writings, just as others in America have done so. 

The Program of the Communist International, adopted at 
the Sixth World Congress in 1928, states: 

"One of the most important tasks of the cultural 
revolution affecting the wide masses is the task of 

systematically and unswervingly combatting religion — 
the opium of the people. 

The proletarian government must withdraw all 
state support from the church, which is the agency of 

the former ruling class; it must prevent all church 

interference in state-organized educational affairs and 
ruthlessly suppress the counter-revolutionary activity 
of the ecclesiastical organizations. 

Lunarcharsky, the Russian Commissioner of Education, 

phrased it as clearly as possible when he said: 

"We hate Christians and Christianity. Even the 
best of them must be considered our worst enemies. 

Christian love is an obstacle to the development of 
the revolution. 

Down with love of one's neighbor! What we want is 

HATE .... Only then can we conquer the universe. 

Karl Marx repeated the same thought. Religion had to be 
destroyed: 

"Religion is the sign of the oppressed creature, the 

sentiment of a heartless world, as it is the spirit of 
spiritless conditions. It is the opium of the people." 621 


274 



CHAPTER 32 RUSSIAN LAWS 


And the Communists have attempted to do exactly that in 
Russia. Alexander Solzhenitsyn, the Russian dissident now 
living in America, wrote this as a warning to the American 
people: 

"In my country the communist powers took 
military steps against the Christian faith. 

Millions of peasants were slaughtered in order to 
eradicate faith from the very roots of the people. 

Millions of hours of propaganda time were used in 

order to burn the faith from the hearts of the children. 

Despite this, communism has not destroyed the 

Christian faith. Christianity went through a period of 

decline, but it is now growing. 

The political atheist literature maintains that 
Marxism continues what Christianity began, that it 
makes possible what Christianity failed to achieve. 

But this [is a] sleight of hand. 

Socialism [meaning Communism in Russia] is, in 

fact, absolutely opposed to Christianity." 622 

One of the major tenets of basic Christianity is that each 
man has but one life, and that upon his death his spirit does 

not return to earth in the body of another individual. The 

New Agers believe in reincarnation. This view holds the oppo- 
site position: that the spirit of an individual comes back to 
earth in another body after death. Therefore, if it is deemed 

necessary that a Christian must die because Communism 
must succeed, those who share the belief in reincarnation 

have no problem with making certain that the Christian dies. 

And the reason for that is because it is their belief that his, 

or her, spirit will return and inhabit the body of another in- 
dividual. This is why the Communists can slaughter millions 

of innocent people and show absolutely no remorse. 

Constance Cumbey, a researcher into the New Age reli- 

gion, has explained their views on reincarnation with these 
words: 

"The movement teaches the Law of Rebirth or re- 
incarnation. This is basically a teaching that man does 

not really die, but that he instead is endlessly reborn 

into new life cycles until such time as he perfects 


275 



CHAPTER 32 RUSSIAN LAWS 


himself 

vana.)" 


sufficiently 


to 


qualify for endless rest 


(Nir- 


Another departure from the traditional Christian teaching 
in America is the theory of Evolution. This non- scientific 
"science" holds that man is nothing more than a higher form 
of animal, that he has evolved from a simple one celled or- 
ganism. 

The New Agers have carried the theory of evolution one 
step further. They believe that certain men have "evolved" to 
a higher form of mankind. This evolutionary super-species is 
one step above the rest of mankind. 

"... the New Agers claim they are a 
They have 'evolved' into 'Homo Noeticus' 
der of the human species are Homo Sapiens.] 

They have 'evolved' by employing 

techniques such as meditation and the 


So, those who have utilized "mind expansion techniques" 
are better off than the rest of mankind. "Smarter" means 

"better." 

One who has written about the differences between Chris- 
tianity and this new thought is the Masonic writer Manly P. 
Hall. He wrote an explanation of the differences between 
these opposing religious views: 

"The Christian theory of redemption is unique in 

that it emphasizes salvation as attainable in spite of 

vice rather than because of virtue; in fact, the prime 

saving virtue for the Christian is acceptance of the di- 

vinity of Jesus Christ. 

That a viewpoint so philosophically unsound could 

have gained so firm a foothood in the number and 
power of its adherents is more than passing strange. 

Like all external things, it will finally pass away 

and be remembered only for that which it contributed 

to the inner realization of its devotees." 625 


'new species.' 
[the remain- 

mind-expansion 
'other tech- 


The Humanists have also stated that they believe that re- 
ligion as an institution will pass away. The preface to the 
HUMANIST MANIFESTO II states that position: 


276 



CHAPTER 32 RUSSIAN LAWS 


"As in 1933, humanists still believe that tradi- 
tional theism, especially faith in the prayer-hearing 

God, assumed to love and care for persons and under- 
stand their prayers, and to be able to do something 

about them, is an unproved and outmoded faith." 626 

And this is the reason they believe that: 

"We find insufficient evidence for belief in the ex- 
istence of a supernatural 627 

Since there is no God, man does not have to believe in re- 
ligion anymore. In fact, 

"We are convinced that the time has passed for 
theism...." 628 

And to show that those who wish religion to perish are in 
control of the situation, one has only to look at some of the 
events occurring in contemporary America. The attack on re- 
ligion in the United States has already started. 

In fact, ministers are being attacked just as they were in 
early America. 

For instance, one of the earliest attacks on religion in 
America occurred in 1771. Three Baptist ministers, all from 
the same church in Ruther Glen, Virginia, were arrested and 
imprisoned for preaching without a government license. 
Through the able defense of Patrick Henry, the ministers 
were acquitted, establishing for other ministers their right to 
preach and conduct church ministries free of governmental 
interference. 

Yet, almost 200 years later, this same church was fined 
$250 a day for once again refusing to obtain a license from 
the state, this time for failure to obtain a license to operate 
its educational ministries. 

An organization formed to fight such cases for the cause 
of religious freedom is the Coalition for Religious Freedom, 
located in Washington D.C. They reported in 1987 that: 

"the last 15 years have seen more religious 
freedom cases than any time since the American Revo- 


277 



CHAPTER 32 RUSSIAN LAWS 


The battle lines are being drawn. 

The Humanists/Masons/Communists/New Agers 
ging war against the Christian 

The New World Order is getting closer. 


are wa- 
religion. 


278 



Chapter 33 

The Attack on 
Property 


The right to private property is one of the cornerstones of 
freedom. Man must be free to acquire and then be allowed to 
possess property, the sustenance necessary to maintain his 

right to life. 

Benjamin Disraeli, the Prime Minister of England be- 

tween 1874 and 1880, reported that the secret societies 
wanted to destroy the right to own private property in the 
form of land. He wrote: 

"They do not want constitutional government 
they want to change the tenure of the land, to drive 
out the present owners of the soil and to put an end 

to ecclesiastical [meaning religious] establishments." 630 

Mr. Disraeli implied, quite correctly, that it was the re- 
ligious establishments that taught that man had the right to 


279 



CHAPTER 33 THE ATTACK ON PROPERTY 


private property. It is the church that teaches support for 
this human right by teaching that one individual has no right 
to steal from another individual. 

This teaching is found in both the Old and New Testa- 
ments of the Holy Bible. 

The Commandment "Thou shalt not steal" is found in 
Exodus 20:15 in the Old Testament, and in Matthew 19:18 in 
the New. In fact, in the New Testament, it is a direct com- 
mandment of lesus himself. 

That means that no man has the right to take the prop- 
erty of another. The secret societies that the Prime Minister 
was referring to want to "change the tenure," meaning the 
ownership, "of the soil." This means that they want to abolish 
private property. 

So it is the church that stands in the way of those who 
wish to abolish the right to private property. 

And it is the church that must be destroyed to eliminate 
mankind's right to private property. 

The Illuminati also saw the connection between the 

churches and the Biblical teaching. Adam Weishaupt wrote: 

"The baneful [meaning one causing of distress] 
influence of accumulated property was declared an in- 
surmountable obstacle to the happiness of any nation 
whose chief laws were framed for its protection and 
increase." 631 

Karl Marx, the Communist, echoed the concept that cer- 

tain individuals did not possess the right to own private prop- 
erty. He wrote: 

"The emancipation of labor demands ... an equi- 
table distribution of the proceeds of labor." 632 

Marx envisioned a government large enough to divide the 

property accumulated after labor. He wrote this: 

"From each according to his abilities, to each 

according to his needs." 633 

Those who have the ability to produce must have their 
property taken away and given to those who have the need 
for that property. 


280 



CHAPTER 33 THE ATTACK ON PROPERTY 


He then continued: 


"... 

the 

theory 

of 

the 

Communists may be 

summed 

up in 

the 

single 

sentence: 

Abolition of private 

prop- 

erty." 634 




And 

the 

Humanists 

want 

to participate in the 

debate 


about the right to own private property. They also do not be- 
lieve that man has the right to own and possess property. 
They have verbalized it in the Fourteenth Principle in the 
HUMANIST MANIFESTO II 

"The humanists are firmly convinced that existing 

acquisitive and profit motivated society has shown it- 
self to be inadequate and that a radical change in 
methods, controls and motives must be instituted. 

A socialized and cooperative order must be estab- 
lished to the end that the equitable distribution of the 

means of life be possible." 633 

A "socialized and cooperative order" would be one where 
the government takes from those who have the ability and 
gives it to those who have the need. That is precisely what 
Karl Marx advocated. 

So those who wish to abolish private property have in- 
cluded it in their religion. 

In America, the attack on private property is very subtle: 
those who wish to destroy man's right to possess property do 
not directly identify that as their goal. They conceal their 

purposes behind other issues, but the end result is the same. 
The right to private property is slowly being eroded. 

Perhaps the main weapon utilized in the battle is the 
government's power to tax. As taxes increase, the public has 
less and less ability to purchase property. 

Another method that the attackers use to destroy private 
property is inflation. This tool takes an ever increasing per- 
centage of the earnings of the working class. Inflation, as has 
already been discussed in this study, is defined as an in- 
crease in the money supply, resulting in a rise in the price 

level. A deflation is caused by a decrease in the money sup- 
ply, causing prices to drop. Therefore, the business cycle is 

caused by those who control the money supply. And the pur- 
pose of the business cycle is to take property from some and 


281 



CHAPTER 33 THE ATTACK ON PROPERTY 


to give it to others. Those who know what course the money 
supply is going to take are certainly able to take advantage 
of their prior knowledge and can make exorbitant profits. 

So inflation is a method of depriving some people of their 
private property without their knowledge. 

That means that those who cause inflation can also pre- 
vent it. The controller of the money supply in the United 
States is the privately owned Federal Reserve, [called by this 
author the Private Reserve] and their purpose is to use their 
ability to cause business cycles through inflation and deflation 
to destroy the right of the people to own private property. 
But, few in America understand that that is their purpose. 

So the plunder continues. 

And the God-given, inalienable, "self-evident" right to priv- 
ate property continues to be slowly eroded. 

Just like Karl Marx and the Humanists want. 


282 



Chapter 34 

The Attack on 
Nationalism 


One of the things that Lucifer did when he fell, according 
to the Bible, was to "weaken the nations." 

The concept of national boundaries is one created by the 
creator God. The Bible says this in Acts 17:24, 26: 

"God that made the world and all things therein 
[and] hath determined ... the bounds of their habita- 
tion." 

So, if the designer of national boundaries was God him- 
self, it would follow that those who are out to dethrone the 
Creator would be anxious to abolish the nations of the world. 
And this is precisely what they are doing. 

Professor John Robison, the exposer of the Illuminati, 
wrote that inside that secret society: 


283 



CHAPTER 34 THE ATTACK ON NATIONALISM 


"... patriotism and loyalty were called narrow- 
minded prejudices ...." 636 

And the reason that they were so considered was because 
the founder, Adam Weishaupt, himself believed in the de- 
struction of the nation. He wrote: 

"With the origins of nations and peoples the worlds 

ceased to be a great family, a single kingdom .... 

Nationalism took the place of human love ...." 637 

And he proposed a solution: 

"Diminish patriotism, then men will learn to 

know each other again as such ... [and] the bond of 
union will widen out. 

Nations shall vanish from the earth." 638 

About seventy years later, the Communists were quick to 
join those who desired the destruction of national boundaries. 
Karl Marx wrote in THE COMMUNIST MANIFESTO: 

"The Communists are further reproached with de- 

siring to abolish countries and nationalities." 3 

And the Humanists have also joined the chorus. They, 

too, have added their voice in the move to destroy nation- 
alism. The Twelfth Principle of the HUMANIST MANIFESTO 
II reads as follows: 

"We deplore the division of humankind on nation- 

alistic grounds. 

the best option is to transcend the limits of 
national sovereignty and to move toward the building 

of a world community in which all sectors of the hu- 
man family can participate. 

Thus we look to the development of a system of 

world law and a world order based upon transnational 
federal government." 640 

Manly P. Hall, wrote that he shared the concerns of Marx 
and Weishaupt, and expressed the hope that someday soon 

national borders would be abolished. He wrote: 


284 



CHAPTER 34 THE ATTACK ON NATIONALISM 


"... the existence of contiguous states or nations 

has been the excuse for their exploitation." 641 

"Patriotism is merely an accentuated egotism 

which embraces the members of the tribe or nation to 
which the egotist himself belongs. 

Long regarded as a virtue, patriotism will yet 

demonstrate itself to be a most pernicious attitude." 642 

Someone more contemporary has also written about the 
need to eliminate national borders. Zbigniew Brzezinski, Pres- 
ident Jimmy Carter's National Security Advisor, wrote this in 
his book entitled BETWEEN TWO AGES in a chapter enti- 
tled "International Prospects:" 

"... the fiction of [national] sovereignty ... is clear- 
ly no longer compatible with reality." 643 

And Mr. Hall tells his readers that the future of the 
nation-state is bleak. The day is coming when they will be an 
obsolete remnant of the past. He wrote: 

"... we are approaching a nobler era when nations 
shall be no more; when the whole earth shall be under 
one order, one government, one administrative body." 644 

So, the ultimate purpose of all of this attack on national- 
ism is to tear down national borders so that they can be re- 
placed with a borderless world, a one world government. 

The New Agers/Humanists/Communists/Masons want a 
one world government. They are confident that their goal will 
be achieved soon because they are creating the conditions 
that will persuade the people that they should adopt the 
world government when it is offered. 

The family unit; the right to own private property; the na- 
tional borders; the right to believe in a creator God; these be- 
liefs will all be destroyed because the world must receive a 
world government supported by the planners inside the secret 
societies and the new religious groups. 

The enemy has been identified. It is not the churches, the 
family, nationalism or patriotism, or the right to worship a 
God. 

It is simply the belief in Lucifer
285 



CHAPTER 34 THE ATTACK ON NATIONALISM 


Lucifer, the god of the New World Order, the New Age, 
some of the Communists and some of the Masons, wants to 
bring the world a one world religion, based upon a belief in 
man, and the unbridled power of man's mind and reason. 

It is now possible for the people to know just what the 
new world government and its supporting religion will offer 
the people of the world: 

The abolition of the family. Children will be 

raised by the society through the government. 

The abolition of the right to private property. All 

land and property will be owned by the government. 

The right to worship will no longer exist. 

Religious people will be subject to rigorous depro- 
gramming. Those who will not alter their belief system 

will be forced into concentration camps, or simply 

killed, because the act of worshipping a God will be- 
come a crime. 

National borders will no longer exist. There will 

be a one world government instead of city, county, 

state, and national governments. 

All of the individual's private decisions will be 
made by others. The individual will no longer decide 

whom he or she will associate with, either in employ- 

ment, voluntary associations, or in social organizations. 

The New World Order is coming. 

And the inception date has been revealed. 
It will begin in the year 2000. 

All that is remains to be done is to sort out those who 
will not accept it. Only believers will be around to live in it. 
Unless men of good will everywhere act to prevent it. 


286 



Chapter 35 

Answering the 
Skeptic 


What if the reader does not believe all of this evidence of 
the scheduled inception of the New World Order? What if the 
unbeliever says that all of the writings offered in this study 
were just the thoughts of individual authors and that they 
are not connected to the writings of any other individual? 
What if it is claimed that it is simply not correct to draw 
that single conclusion from the material presented? Quite pos- 
sibly there are many who will believe that it is not possible 
to reach that conclusion unless it was done in error. 

In other words, what if the skeptic says that the author's 
interpretations of all of the evidence have lead to the wrong 
conclusion. 

That is a reasonable position and one that the author is 
willing to discuss. But not for the obvious reason. 

The reader is reminded of the admonition contained in 
the first chapters of this book. 


287 



CHAPTER 35 ANSWERING THE SKEPTIC 


The reader was warned that the conclusions drawn by the 
author would be too difficult to believe, and it was anti- 

cipated that the average reader would not believe them. 

However, there is one piece of evidence that has not been 
placed into the puzzle, and the skeptics should hold their 

final opinion until it has been considered. 

That evidence is contained in the following chapter. 


288 



Chapter 36 
Reagan and Bush 

The New Age Magazine is, as has been mentioned before, 
the official publication of the Supreme Council, 33rd degree. 
Ancient & Accepted Scottish Rite of Freemasonry of the 
Southern Jurisdiction. This Council claims to be the Mother 
Council of the World, or the Mother Jurisdiction of the World. 

It appears from these self-applied titles that this Council 
is claiming to be the leading organization inside the world- 
wide Masonic organization. 

The cover of the April, 1988 issue of that magazine has a 
rather interesting picture on it. It shows the then President 
Ronald Reagan along with three other Masons. The President 
is holding a framed certificate that had been presented to 
him by the three Masons in the picture: C. Fred Kleinknecht, 
Sovereign Grand Commander of the Southern Jurisdiction; 
Francis G. Paul, the Sovereign Grand Commander of the 
Northern Jurisdiction; and.Voris King, the Imperial Potentate 
of the Ancient Arabic Order of Nobles of the Mystic Shrine of 
North America [the Shriners.]. 


289 




CHAPTER 36 REAGAN AND BUSH 


The certificate that the President is holding is too small 

in the photograph to read, but what it says on it is described 
in a column written by Mr. Kleinknecht inside the New Age 
magazine. He wrote that the framed certificate that was giv- 

en to President Reagan was a Certificate of Honor thanking 
him for "working for the common good." He then stated that 
he and Grand Commander Paul presented the President with 
another certificate, this one being a Certificate that conferred 

the title of Honorary Scottish Rite Mason. Then Imperial Po- 
tentate King gave the President a third Certificate, this one 
making him a Honorary Member of the Imperial Council. 

President Ronald Reagan has become a honorary member 
of the Southern Jurisdiction of the Scottish Rite of Freema- 
sonry. 

The magazine then reproduced a letter that the President 

had written to "Illustrious Brother Kleinknecht." It reads, in 
part: 


"Please accept 

my sincere gratitude 

for 

the 

framed certificate of 

membership 

and the 

other 

tokens 

of friendship which 

you and 

Illustrious Brother 

Paul 

presented to me. 





I am honored 

to join the 

ranks of 

the 

sixteen 

former Presidents 

in their 

association 

with 

Free- 


11 645 

masonry. 


The President's letter appears to indicate that he consid- 

ered himself to be a full member of the Scottish Rite, rather 
than a "honorary member." Notice that he used the phrase 

"certificate of membership," and that he said he had joined 
"the ranks of the sixteen former Presidents" in their associa- 
tion with the Freemasons. 

Also, he addressed both Mr. Kleinknecht and Mr. Paul as 
a "Brother." It is presumed that one can only call another 
Mason a "brother" if one is truly a member. 

So, the question of the degree of the President's involve- 
ment is open to debate. Some could fairly say that the Presi- 
dent had actually joined the Masonic Lodge, just as any other 
member would do in a formal lodge in their home town. But, 

the Masons claim that his membership is Honorary. 

But, in any event, and no matter how involved the Presi- 

dent is or will be, the degree of his membership is not the 
important thing to consider. The main concern is that this 


290 



CHAPTER 36 REAGAN AND BUSH 


man who claims to be a Christian had joined an organization 
that many Christians have said should not be joined by any 

believer. In other words, other Christians have warned the 
President about not joining it in any capacity. But the Presi- 
dent was not listening. 

Later that year, in August of 1988, the President said 

some rather cryptic things in his address to the Republican 

Convention that met in New Orleans to select their Presi- 
dential and Vice Presidential candidates. On Monday night, 

the President gave the keynote speech, the opening speech of 

the convention. 

A transcript of that speech has been printed in the New 

York Times and a perusal of those words is very revealing. 

The President spoke about George Bush, his Vice President, 
and the individual who was seeking the Presidential nomina- 
tion of the Republican Party. The President said: 

"With George Bush, I'll know, as we approach the 

new millennium ...." 646 

The President did not explain what he meant by the 
phrase "the new millennium," (a millennium is a thousand 

year period) but one can get a clue by reviewing his use of 
two other phrases in that speech. He ended that paragraph 
with these words: 

"With George Bush ... we'll have a ... nation confi- 
dently willing to take its leadership into the uncharted 

reaches of a new age." 647 

Here he actually used the phrase "a new age." 

But perhaps the President actually explained what he 
meant by these phrases when he ended his speech with these 
words: 

"That's a new day - our sunlit new day — 648 

The President chose to refer to the "new day" as being a 
"sunlit" new day. As has been illustrated, the Masons know 
that the sun has been a symbol of Lucifer for 6000 years. Did 
the President know that when he referred to the new day as 
being "sunlit?" 


291 



CHAPTER 36 REAGAN AND BUSH 


One can only wonder what he meant by the use of these 
words, since he did not explain them. But it is certain that 

he used them. It should be expected that he knew what he 
was saying when he gave that speech. And it is improbable 
that some clever speech writer had him say these words with- 

out his knowledge or approval. It is also improbable that he 
read them without a realization of what he was saying. The 
only conclusion that is fair is that he had to know. 

Three nights later, on Thursday night. Vice President 

George Bush accepted the Republican nomination for the 

Presidency of the United States. He also spoke to the conven- 
tion and the American people on national television. His 

speech has also been recorded in the New York Times, and a 
perusal of that speech reveals that he too used some rather 
cryptic language. 

During that speech, the Vice-President spoke about the 

thousands and tens of thousands of volunteer organizations in 
America. He said that they constituted the true meaning of a 
"community." He contrasted that understanding with that of 
the "liberals," whom he said had a rather narrow definition. 

His exact words were: 

"And there is another tradition. And that is the 

idea of community - a beautiful word with a big 

meaning, though liberal Democrats have an odd view 
of it. They see 'community' as a limited cluster of 

interest groups, locked in odd conformity. In this view. 


the 

country 

waits 

passive 

while Washington sets the 

rules. 

But 

that 

is 

not what 

community means, not to 

me. 

For 

we 

are 

a nation 

of communities, of thousands 

and 

tens 

of 

thousands of 

ethnic, religious, social, bus- 

iness. 

labor 

union, neighborhood, regional organiza- 


tions, all of them varied, voluntary and unique. 

This is America [and then the Vice President 
named a group of volunteer organizations, like the 

Disabled American Veterans.]" 

And then he ended that paragraph with this statement: 

"... a brilliant diversity spread like stars, like a thou- 
sand points of light, in a broad and peaceful sky." 649 


292 



CHAPTER 36 REAGAN AND BUSH 


The President was referring to a large number of volun- 
teer organizations (he referred to them by the unspecified 
numbers "thousands and tens of thousands." That meant that 
he didn't know how many there were.) He later referred to 
these organizations, so numerous that he admitted that he 
didn't know the exact number of them, by the precise number 
of. "a thousand," The only explanation that makes sense is 
that he was referring to something else when he used the 
phrase "a thousand points of light." 

Notice that he also referred to these organizations as if 
they were "light" in a broad and peaceful sky. 

As has been illustrated, "light" has been regarded as the 
"truth" from the sun-god Lucifer for six thousand years. The 

number "[a] thousand" is the precise number of years that 

the millennium is predicted to last under the leadership of 
Lord Maitreya. 

Was George Bush referring to the thousand years of the 

millennium led by Lord Maitreya? 

One can only wonder. George Bush continues to explain 

that he was referring to "thousands and tens of thousands" of 
volunteer organizations. 

And it is extremely unlikely that he will confirm these 

interpretations, if he is referring to the thousand year reign 

of Lord Maitreya, because he obviously would not want the 
American people to know. 

However, he referred to that phrase again at the end of 

his speech. He said: 

"I will keep America moving forward, always for- 

ward — for a better America, for an endless, enduring 
dream and a thousand points of light. 

That is my mission. And I will complete it." 650 

George Bush used that phrase repeatedly during his 
debates with the Democrat nominee Michael Dukakis. He re- 

ferred to it again during his campaign across the United 
States. And he used it again in his inaugural address after 

he was sworn in as President of the United States in 1989. 

But there are other clues. 

On March 16, 1989, a radio station played a part of a 

speech the President delivered somewhere in the United 

States. The President said: 


293 



CHAPTER 36 REAGAN AND BUSH 


"What are we doing to prepare ourselves for the 

new world coming just 1 1 short years from now?" 

Here the President linked the "new world" coming in the 
year 2000, just "eleven short years from now" to his previous 
comments. He was saying that he was aware that the New 
World Order was on its way, and would be here in eleven 
years. 

1989 plus eleven is the year 2000. 

But the final piece of the puzzle was an article that ap- 
peared in the Arizona Daily Star on January 3, 1989. The 
headline written by the Associated Press read: 

"Millennium group expects Bush at '99 Egypt 

bash" 

The article reported that: 

"President-elect Bush is spending this New Year's 

holiday at Camp David, Maryland, but in 10 years he 
may be in Egypt. 

Organizers of the Millennium Society say he’s 

already committed to ushering in the next century at 
the Great Pyramids of Cheops in Giza." 

The article then reported that Mr. Bush had sent the 

society a telegram that they quoted: 

’"Barbara [Mr. Bush's wife] and I wish you the 

best of luck in the next year, and we're looking forward 
to your celebration in Egypt in 1999,' Bush said." 651 

The organization that Mr. Bush sent the telegram to was 

called the Millennium Society. As was pointed out elsewhere, 
a millennium is a period of 1000 years. So the Society is 
going to the Great Pyramid to bring in, not the next century 
as the article reported, but the next millennium, the next 
1000 years. And lastly, the location of the big party is the 

Great Pyramid of Cheops, the site of the ancient initiation 
ceremony into Lucifer worship. 

This party was mentioned in an article that appeared in 
the June 27, 1988 Wall Street Journal. That article's headline 
read: 


294 



CHAPTER 36 REAGAN AND BUSH 


"To Mark Year 2000, Some Events Will Be Out of 
This World" 

The article was about the "imminent arrival of the new 
millennium," and some of the plans that were being made by 

a variety of people and organizations. It went on to report: 

"One group has booked the Great Pyramid of 

Cheops in Egypt for a monumental bash on the eve of 

the new millenium. " 

The article identified the group that had arranged the 
party as the "Millennium Society." 

George Bush is going to the Great Pyramid in the year 

1999 to bring in the millennium reign of Lucifer, a period 

called the New Age, or the New World Order. 

Is that conclusion a misreading of the evidence? Can one 
say that this interpretation of all of this evidence is incorrect? 
Is there another possible interpretation? 

The only way to know the answer to those questions for 

sure is to wait until the year 1999. 

However, if one does not like what the signs are saying, 

one can attempt to prevent the inauguration of the New 
World Order. 

One thousand years of this world's future is in the hands 

of the reader. 

Let us pray that those who read this study will correctly 

read the signs. 

And choose to inform others. 

And assist the world in preventing the reign of Lord 
Maitreya and the New World Order. 


295 
Chapter 37 
"Eleven Short Years" 


"A lie well believed is just as good as the truth." 

That anonymous statement of truth is an excellent remin- 

der of the fact that a lie repeated often enough will become 
the truth. 

The evidence is abundant that this nation is turning away 

from the God of creation. Others have warned America what 
the future will hold if that trend continues. 

One of those voices is that of Alexander Solzhenitsyn, the 
ex-Russian who is now living in America. His words of warn- 

ing are: 

"Over a half century ago, while I was still a child, 
I recall hearing a number of old people offer the fol- 

lowing explanation for the great disasters [meaning 
the disasters of the Communist Revolution that killed 

up to 42,000,000 Russians] that had befallen Russia: 


296 



CHAPTER 37 "ELEVEN SHORT YEARS 


'Men have forgotten God; that’s why all this has 

happened.’ 

Since then I have spent well-nigh 50 years work- 

ing on the history of our revolution. 

But if I were asked today to formulate as concise- 
ly as possible the main cause of the ruinous revolution 

that swallowed up some 60 million of our people, I 

could not put it more accurately than to repeat: 

'Men have forgotten God; that’s why all this has 

happened.’" 652 

In 1832, a Frenchman named Alexis de Tocqueville was 

sent to America by his government to discover why America 
as a nation had constructed only a few prisons to house its 
criminals while his native France could not build them fast 

enough to house their growing prison population. Fie wrote 
back to his nation that he had discovered the answer. There 

was a reason that America did not need prisons. 

America was basically good. 

He wrote: 

"I sought for the greatness and genius of America 

in her commodious harbors and her ample rivers, and 

it was not there. I sought for the greatness and genius 

of America in her fertile fields and boundless forests, 

and it was not there. 

I sought for the genius and greatness of America 

in her rich mines and her vast world commerce, and it 

was not there. I sought for the greatness and genius 

of America in her public school system and her insti- 
tutions of learning, and it was not there. 

I sought for the greatness and genius of America 

in her democratic congress and her matchless constitu- 

tion, and it was not there. 

Not until I went into the churches of America 

and heard her pulpits flame with righteousness did I 

understand the secret of her genius and power. 

America is great because America is good, and if 

America ever ceases to be good, America will cease to 

be great." 


297 



CHAPTER 37 "ELEVEN SHORT YEARS 


America is no longer great because it is no longer good. 
America's churches and synagogues are no longer aflame with 
righteousness. 

America's people are not heeding the warnings nor under- 
standing the signs that are telling them that there are dan- 
gers ahead. 

Pope Felix III wrote his warning to the world back in the 

early 6th century: 

"Not to oppose error is to approve it, and indeed 

to neglect to confound evil men, when we can do it, is 

no less a sin than to encourage them." 

It is time to oppose error. 

America's people must become aflame with righteousness. 

America's churches and synagogues must preach against 
the coming "New World Order." 

If they don't, it will surely come to the shores of America. 

The year 2000 lies just "eleven short years" ahead. 


298 



Chapter 38 
The Summation 


Perhaps the one statement that best summarizes just 
what the New World Order is, is this one offered by Pierre 
Joseph Proudhon, the French writer and socialist: 

"Our principle is: 
atheism in religion, 
anarchy in politics, 

no property in the economic sphere." 653 
He had figured it out. 

But the tragic thought is that he believed in it. 

Just like all of the other Socialists, Humanists, Illuminati 
members, Communists, Masons and New Agers who believe 
in the New World Order. 

But it might have been George Orwell in his book 1984 
that best summarized what the "New World Order" had in 
store for the world when he wrote: 


299 



CHAPTER 38 THE SUMMATION 

"If you want a picture of the future, 
boot stamping on a human face - forever." 654 


imagine a 


300 



Chapter 39 
The Solution 


The Bible teaches that "a prophet hath no honor in his 
own country." The reason for this is obvious: no one wants to 
hear bad news. 

I do not claim to be prophet, but it would be fair to pre- 
sume that the majority of those who have just completed a 
reading of this book would conclude that the information 
imparted would be considered to be "bad news." 

The solution is clear: all thoughtful people must act to- 
gether to prevent the imposition of the "New World Order." 

This will not be the place to offer the concerned reader 
any courses of action. There are abundant sources of material 
on the necessary solutions to this problem. 

I will just offer this great thought in closing for those who 
are seeking a solution. This promise is found in II Chronicles 
7 : 14 . 


"If my people, which are called by my name, shall 
humble themselves, and pray, and seek my face, and 


301 



CHAPTER 39 THE SOLUTION 


turn from their wicked ways; then will I hear 
heaven, and will forgive their sin, and will heal 
land." 

God has promised to heal sick nations. 

America is sick, and the sickness is getting worse. 

It is time to do some seeking. 

He will do the healing when we find Him. 


from 

their 


302 



Questions Answered 


The question that I am most frequently asked as I make 
public appearances or speeches in connection with my book 

entitled THE UNSEEN HAND, is why I am still alive after 

publishing my revelations about this Conspiracy. I continue to 
answer that question with basically the same answer I gave 

in 1985 at the end of that book. That answer was: 

"I am frequently asked by students or friends who 
agree with me that this Conspiracy exists, why I be- 
lieve I am allowed to continue teaching and writing 

about its existence. They cite the deaths of [President] 

Abraham Lincoln, [Secretary of Defense] James For- 

restal, [Senator] Joseph McCarthy and [Congressman] 

Louis McFadden, [who all died under mysterious cir- 

cumstances or were killed by this Conspiracy because 
it appeared that they had discovered its existence] 

among others, as evidence that those who expose the 

Conspiracy do so at their own risk. 

I have no answer to that question. 

I can only say that I am absolutely convinced 

that the Conspiracy exists and that they have a great 


303 



QUESTIONS ANSWERED 


deal to gain by the death of anyone who has figured it 

out. 

I live in Arizona where a few years ago an in- 
vestigative reporter [named Don Bolles] had his car 

blow-up as he started it because he was reporting on 

corruption in that state. 

Why his enemies picked on him, and why mine 

have chosen not to pick on me, I do not know. 

I will emphatically say this: if you hear about my 

car exploding because I rigged it so that it would ex- 
plode, or that I suddenly 'attempted to fly' from the 

top of a sixteen story building [like they claim James 

Forrestal did,] please accept my pre-death statement: I 

did not do it! 

If either of these circumstances occur or any other 

mysterious thing happens to me, all I can do is ask 

that you double your efforts in exposing this 
conspiracy in my memory." 

I continue to stand by that statement. 

The author 


304 



INTRODUCTION TO 
FOOTNOTES 


The author is once again taking an unprecedented step 
in an attempt to assist the reader. 

The following listing of the documentation utilized in this 
book is different from the majority of listings used by authors 
in the past. 

First of all, I have not used the traditional words "op 
cit," and "ibid," to show references to a previously cited book. 

I have also altered somewhat the lengthy reference infor- 
mation traditionally used by authors in the past. What I have 
done is to list the major works cited in this book first, with 
all of the information normally placed there. In addition, I 
have provided a brief introduction to the contents of the book, 
in an attempt to induce the reader to read the book them- 
selves. 

Then I have simply listed the book by title, and the page 
where the reference in my book may be found. I have only 
used this method where the book is cited more than once, or 


305 



Footnotes 


where the book cited is important enough for the reader to 
know about it and its contents. 

This list of books will also serve as a bibliography. 

It is hoped that these changes will meet with the ap- 
proval of those who read this book. 

BOOKS UTILIZED 

A BRIDGE TO LIGHT by Rex R. Hutchens 

The Masons believe that "the publication of this work 
could truly be the dawning of a new day in our [meaning 
the Southern Jurisdiction]" of Freemasonry. An important 
"esoteric" book, written by a 32nd degree Mason. 

Published by the Supreme Council in 1988. 

A GIFT OF PROPHECY, THE PHENOMENAL JEANNE 
DDXON by Ruth Montgomery 

The back cover of the book reports that "Jeanne 

Dixon has demonstrated the uncanny ability to see into 
the future of people, of nations, to forecast great in- 

ternational events." One of those "events" she "saw" was 
the arrival of a "all-knowing" child "full of wisdom," in 
1962. 

Published by Bantam Books, New York in 1965. 

AMERICA’S SECRET ESTABLISHMENT by Antony C. 
Sutton 

The author explains that this volume will explain 

"why the West built the Soviets and Hitler, why we go to 
war and lose, why Wall Street loves Marxists and Nazis, 

why the kids can't read, [and] why politicians lie ...." 

AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY by Albert G. 

Mackey, 

This two volume encyclopaedia is described by the 
publisher as "a work which would furnish every Free- 

mason ... the means of acquiring a knowledge of all mat- 
ters connected with the science, the philosophy, and the 

history of his Order." 

Published by The Masonic History Company, New 
York, 1873. 


306 



Footnotes 


A PLANNED DECEPTION by Constance Cumbey 

This book "builds on and amplifies" Mrs. Cumbey's 

earlier book, THE HIDDEN DANGERS OF THE RAIN- 
BOW. 

Published by Pointe Publishers, Inc., East Detroit, 
Michigan, in 1985. 

AQUARIAN CONSPIRACY, THE, by Marilyn Ferguson 

The Foreword of the book describes Marilyn Ferguson 
as "the best reporter today" on the subject of the New 
Age Movement. It says that "she has proven to be a 
whirlwind of information, thought, activity, a whole 

expiatory 'network' in herself." 

Published by J.P. Tarcher, Los Angeles, in 1980. 

BEHIND THE LODGE DOOR by Paul A. Fisher 

This book "traces the secret machinations of Ameri- 

can Freemasonry from its early days in this country, con- 
centrating on its unrelenting warfare against Chris- 
tianity." 

Published by Shield Publishing, Inc., Washington 
D.C., in 1988. 

BETWEEN TWO AGES by Zbigniew Brzezinski 

This book claims to be "one of the most original 
books on political and social thought." Mr. Brzezinski 
glorifies Marxist Communism, the greatest fraud ever 
conceived by man! 

Published by Penguin Books, New York, in 1970. 

BRAVE NEW WORLD and BRAVE NEW WORLD 
REVISITED, by Aldous Huxley 

Two books about the "future" of the world, where 
controllers use "brain-washing" to control the minds and 
behavior of entire populations. 

BRAVE NEW WORLD was published by Harper & 
Row, Inc., New York, in 1932. 

BRAVE NEW WORLD, REVISITED, was published 

by Bantam Books, New York, in 1958 


307 



Footnotes 


CLAUSEN'S COMMENTARIES ON MORALS AND DOGMA 
by Henry C. Clausen 

"For years each new member of the Scottish Rite of 
the Southern Jurissdiction was presented with a copy of 
MORALS AND DOGMA, by Albert Pike. The supply of 
the volumes being exhausted, and recognizing that today 
few members would tackle the reading of so formidable a 
volume, Henry C. Clausen, grand commander of the Scot- 
tish Rite, Southern Jurisdiction, wrote a fine book en- 
titled COMMENTARIES ON MORALS AND DOGMA." 

COMMUNIST MANIFESTO, THE by Karl Marx 

A complete reprinting of the original Manifesto, is- 
sued in 1848, by the Communist League, also called the 
League of The Just Men. The book also includes an intro- 
duction by William P. Fall. 

Published by American Opinion, now in Appleton, 
Wisconsin, in 1974. 

CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, by Rev. Clarence 
Kelly 

This book presents vital information about the nature 
of the enemy that confronts America today. Included are 
discussions on the Illuminati, Freemasonry, and the 

French Revolution. 

Published by Western Islands, now in Appleton, 

Wisconsin, in 1974. 

COSMIC CONSPIRACY, THE, by Stan Deyo 

This author discusses, amongst other things, the 
"4000 year glimpse into the history of the Illuminati, and 
the secret codes hidden in the Great Seal of the United 
States by the Illuminati." 

Published by the West Australian Texas Trading, 

Kalamunda, Western Australia, in 1978. 

DANCING IN THE LIGHT, by Shirley MacLaine 
Miss MacLaine claims to be a "seeker of spiritual 
destiny," and she ends her foreword with this comment: 

"Love and Light." 

Published by Bantam Books, Inc., New York, 1985. 
308 



Footnotes 


DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE by Texe Marrs 
This book exposes the "Plan" for establishing a "New 
Age Messiah to lead a One-World Religion and a global 
government." 

Published by Crossway Books, Westchester, Illinois in 
1987. 

DEADLY DECEPTION, THE, by Jim Shaw 

This book was written by a 33rd degree Mason, and 
are his thoughts about how he saw that they were "vic- 
timizing multitudes of sincere men." 

Published by Huntington House, Lafayette, Louisiana 
in 1988. 


EXTERN ALISATION OF 
A. Bailey 

THE 

HIERARCHY, 

THE, by 

Alice 

An important 
Age Movement. 

book 

written by one 

inside the 

New 

Published by 
York. 

the 

Luc is 

Publishing 

Company, 

New 

FIRE IN THE 

MINDS 

OF 

MEN, ORIGINS OF 

THE 


REVOLUTIONARY FAITH, by James H. Billington 

The book has been described as "a widely acclaimed 
history of the modern revolutionary spirit from the 
French Revolution of 1789 to the Bolshevik [Communist] 
Revolution of 1917." 

It was written by James Billington, who received his 
doctorate as a Rhodes Scholar at Oxford, and who has 
previously taught history for seventeen years at Harvard 
and Princeton Universities. 

Published by Basic Books Inc., of New York, in 1980. 

5/5/2000 by Richard W. Noone 

This author presents his theory that a giant catastro- 
phe will occur to the world on May 5, 2000. This is not 
the place to debate the merits of this author's con- 
tentions, but he does present some excellent information 
on the Great Pyramid of Giza, which is pertinent to the 
subject of THE NEW WORLD ORDER. 

Published by Harmony Books, New York, in 1982. 


309 



Footnotes 


FREEMASONRY EXPOSED by Capt. William Morgan 

This book was published in 1826 and was an 
apparent attempt by a Mason who had been a member 
for 30 years to reveal some of the secrets of the Masonic 
Lodge. It has been variously reported that he was mur- 
dered, or not murdered, by the Masons soon after its 

publication date. In any event, whether or not he was 
murdered because he published the book, one thing that 
resulted from the story was the creation of America's first 

"third party" in 1832 in an attempt to expose some of the 
dealings of the Order. 

The copy circulating today shows no publisher's name 
but it shows that it was published in Batavia, New York, 
in 1826. 

HIDDEN DANGERS OF THE RAINBOW, THE, by Constance 
Cumbey 

This excellent book was one of the first written about 

the New Age Movement from someone not in favor of it. 
The author has "read hundreds of books on the subject," 
and her extensive research shows that to be true. 

Published by Huntington House, Inc., Shreveport, 

Louisiana in 1983. 

HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, edited by Paul Kurtz 

This book is a reprinting of both of the two manifesto 

issued by those who believe in this religion. They were 
called the Humanist Manifesto I, issued in 1933, and the 
Humanist Manifesto II, issued in 1973. Mr. Kurtz, the 
editor of the Humanist Magazine, also provides a brief 
introduction to the reprinting. 

Published by Prometheus Books, Buffalo, New York, 
in 1973. 

INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY by Carl H. Claudy 
This is a series of three books given by the Grand 
Lodge of Massachusetts to "all candidates as an impor- 
tant part of their initiation into the Masonic Fraternity." 
Published by the Temple Publishers, Washington 
D.C., in 1931. 



Footnotes 


LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, by Manly P. Hall 
This book is a "commentary and expansion" of Mr. 

Hall’s book entitled THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL 
AGES. 

Published by The Philosophical Research Society, 

Inc., of Los Angeles, in 1984. 

LOST KEYS OF FREEMASONRY, THE, by Manly P. Hall 

The foreword to this book reports that "the leading 
Masonic scholars have agreed that the symbols of the 
Fraternity are susceptible of the most profound inter- 
pretation and thus reveal to the truly initiated certain 

secrets concerning the spiritual realities of life." One of 

those "secrets" is revealed to the reader on page 48: "The 
seething energies of Lucifer are in his hands ...." 

Published by the Macoy Publishing and Masonic 

Supply Company, Inc., Richmond, Virginia, in 1976. 

MAGIC OF OBELISKS, THE, by Peter Tompkins 

The author "explores their magical and physical 

properties." 

Published by Harper & Row, New York, in 1981.4 

MARX AND SATAN by Richard Wurmbrand 

This book examines the evidence that Karl Marx was 
"led to a deep personal rebellion against God and all 
Christian values." That anger led him to a Satanic cult. 

Published by Crossway Books, Westchester, Illinois, 
in 1986. 

MASTER'S CARPET, THE, by Edmond Ronayne 

This book reviews the similarity between Masonry, 
Romanism and 'the Mysteries,' and comparing the whole 
with the Bible." It was written by a "Past Master of 
Keystone Lodge, Chicago." 

It appears that the book has been re -published since 
its original publication date. There is no publication in- 
formation in the volume owned by the present author. 

MEANING OF MASONRY, THE, by W.L. Wilmshurst 

This book claims to disclose "the real purpose of 
modern Freemasonry and clearly states the true body of 


311 



Footnotes 


teaching and practice concerning the esoteric meanings of 
Masonic ritual." 

Published by Bell Publishing Company, New York, in 
1927. 

MORALS AND DOGMA by Albert Pike 

This "esoteric" book [it has secret meanings] is 
"specially intended to be read and studied by the 
Brethern" of the of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry. It 
was written by the Sovereign Grand Commander of the 
Scottish Rite from 1859 to 1891. 

Published by The Supreme Council of the Southern 
Jurisdiction of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry in 
Washington D.C. in 1871. 

MYSTERIES OF THE GREAT PYRAMIDS, THE by Andre 
Pochan 

This book suggests that the "Great Pyramid was a 
solar astronomical instrument." 

Published in Avon Books, New York, in 1971. 

MYSTERY MARK OF THE NEW AGE, by Texe Marrs 
This book details plans by New Age enthusiasts to 
initiate people into Lucifer worship. 

Published by Crossway Books, Westchester, Illinois, 
in 1988. 

NEA: [the National Education Association] TROJAN HORSE 

IN AMERICAN EDUCATION by Samuel Blumenfeld 

The author discusses the evidence that the NEA is 

"on the march toward total political power with the aim 

of converting America into a socialist society." 

1984 by George Orwell 

This book is described as a "great modern classic of 

'Negative Utopia,' not a drama of what life might be ... 

but nightmares of what it is becoming." 

Published by The New American Library, Inc., New 
York, 1961. 


312 



Footnotes 


OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, THE, by Jean-Michel 
Angebert 

This book reveals how strange and mystical cults, 
including the Thule Society, influenced the thinking of 
Adolf Hitler. As he once said, "he who has seen in 
National Socialism only a political movement has seen 

nothing." 

That which the reader is to see is that the Thule So- 
ciety worshipped Lucifer, also known as Satan, or the 

devil. 

Published by McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 
in 1971. 

OCCULT THEOCRASY by Edith Starr Miller 

The author claims that her book exposes "some of the 
means and methods used by a secret world ... to 

penetrate, dominate and destroy ...." 

The book was apprently self-published for "private 

circulation only" in 1933. 

OUT ON A LIMB by Shirley MacLaine 

Miss MacLaine says "This book is about ... the 

connection between mind, body, and spirit." 

Published by Bantam Books, Inc., New York, in 1983. 

PARADE TO GLORY by Fred Van Deventer 

"The story of the Shriners and their caravan to des- 
tiny." 

Published by Pyramid Books, New York, in 1959. 

PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY by John Robison 

This is possibly the finest book ever written on the 
secret society known as the Illuminati, by a professor 

who was asked to join the organization. This book was 
read by President George Washington in 1798. 

Originally published in 1798, but it was re -published 
in 1967 by Western Islands, now in Appleton, Wisconsin. 

PYRAMID POWER by Max Toth 

"The prophecies of the ancient masters are locked 

into the pyramid form ...." 

Published by Warner Destiny Books, New York, in 
1979. 


313 



Footnotes 


ROYAL MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA, THE, by Kenneth 

Mackenzie 

This encyclopaedia has been "highly esteemed by 

occultists." 

Published by The Aquarian Press, Wellingborough, 

Northamptonshire, England in 1987. 

SAY NO TO THE NEW WORLD ORDER, by Gary Allen 

One of the first books to explore the subject of the 

New World Order. However, Mr. Allen sees it only as an 

"attack on U.S. sovereignty," because it is to be "created 
by a merger of the United States and the Soviet Union 
into a one- world government. 

Published by Concord Press, Seal Beach, California in 

1987. 

SECRET SOCIETIES AND SUBVERSIVE MOVEMENTS by 
Nesta Webster 

Perhaps one of the finest works ever written on the 

history of Socialism, Communism and the Illluminati that 

have plagued mankind since their introduction centuries 

ago. Originally published in 1923, it has been re- 

published by the Christian Book Club of America. 

SECRET SYMBOLISM IN OCCULT ART by Fred Gettings 

This is a "tour of occult art and its symbolism from 
prehistoric times ... up to the present." 

Published by Harmony Books, New York, in 1987. 

SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, THE, by Manly P. 

Hall 

The book is described as "an Encyclopedic Outline of 
Masonic, Hermetic, Qabbalistic and Rosicrucian Symboli- 
cal Philosophy," and "an Interpretation of the Secret 

Teachings concealed within the Rituals, Allegories and 

Mysteries of all Ages." 

Published by The Philosophical Research Society, 
Inc., Los Angeles, in 1977. 

SERPENT IN THE SKY by John Anthony West 

This book discusses the thesis that "the builders of 
ancient Egypt had far more sophisticated understand- 


314 



Footnotes 


ing[s] of metaphysics ... than most Egyptologists have 

been unwilling to admit." 

Published by The Julian Press, Inc., New York, in 
1987. 

SOCIALIST NETWORK, THE, by Nesta Webster 
The object of this book is to "provide a history of the 
Socialist organizations of modern times." 

Published in London in 1926. 

SPEAR OF DESTINY, THE, by Trevor Ravenscroft 

"In this book, you may find the ultimate explanation 
of the evil genius and ascent to power: The Occult Power 
behind the amazing Spear which pierced the side of 

Christ." 

Published by G.P. Putnam's Sons, New York, in 1973. 

TWISTED CROSS, THE, by Joseph J. Carr 

This book is about "the occultic religion of [Adolf] 
Hitler and the New Age Nazism of the Third Reich." The 

author shows that "Nazism was an occultic religion in 

which Adolf Hitler was the messiah ...." "Nazism and the 
New Age Movement are one in the same: they are merely 

different manifestations of the same evil root." 

Published by Huntington House Inc., Shreveport, 

Louisiana in 1985. 

TWO BABYLONS, THE, by Rev. Alexander Hislop 

This book discusses, amongst other things, the Coin 
of Tyre which appears to illustrate the premise of THE 

NEW WORLD ORDER: that Lucifer is attempting to es- 

tablish his reign on this earth. 

Published by Loizeaux Brothers, Neptune, New Jer- 
sey, in 1916. 

WAS KARL MARX A SATANIST? by Richard Wurmbrand 

The earliest book of the two written by Reverend 

Wurmbrand. It first exposed the evidence that Karl Marx 
had joined a Satanic cult. 


315 



Footnotes 


WHAT THE ANCIENT WISDOM EXPECTS OF ITS 

DISCIPLES by Manly P. Hall 

This book is a "study concerning the mystery 

schools," "a road leading to the understanding of life's 

purpose." 

Published by The Philosophical Research Society, 
Inc., Los Angeles, 1982. 

WORLD REVOLUTION by Nesta Webster 

This book discusses the notion that "the revolution 

through which we are now passing is not local but 

universal, it is not political but social, and its causes 

must be sought not in popular discontent, but in a deep- 

laid conspiracy that uses the people to their oWn 

undoing." 

Published by Constable and Company, Inc., London, 
England, in 1921. 


FOOTNOTES 

INTRODUCTION 

1. Associated Press, July 26, 1968 

2. Review of the News, (March 3, 1976), p. 38 

3. Seattle Post-Intelligence (April 18, 1975), p. A-2 

4. Arizona Daily Star, (May 12, 1989) 

5. American Opinion, (January, 1976), p. 91 

6. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 155 

7. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 120 

8. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 192 

9. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 174 

10. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 22 

11. Richard N. Gardner, Foreign Affairs, (April, 1974), as 
quoted in Review of the News, (January 16, 1974), p. 52 

12. Angela Davis, People's Daily World, (March 9, 1989), p. 
21 -A 

13. Alexei Kovylov, quoted by Kathleen Hayes and Samantha 
Smith, Grave New World, (Golden, Colorado: self- 
published), p. 7 

14. THE COMMUNIST MANIFESTO, p. 36 

15. SECRET SOCIETIES AND SUBVERSIVE 
MOVEMENTS, p. 337 


316 



Footnotes 


INTRODUCTION continued 

16. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 215 

17. Pope Pius IX, Encyclical: The Dangers and Evils of the 
Times, as quoted in CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD, p. 

210 

18. Dr. Jose Arguelles, (from a pamphlet published by the 
International Sacred Rites Festival, Haiku, Maui, Ha- 
waii), p. 4-5 

19. THE AQUARIAN CONSPIRACY, p„ 412 

20. FIRE IN THE MINDS OF MEN, p. 3 

21. SAY NO TO THE NEW WORLD ORDER, p. 6 

22. Alvin Toffler, quoted by the New American, (October 
12,1987), p. 6 

23. Gary North, Conspiracy, a Biblical View, (Ft. Worth: 
Dominion Press, 1986), p. 47 

24. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 463 

25. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 464 

26. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 383 

27. BRAVE NEW WORLD REVISITED, p. 1 15 

28. Tucson Citizen, (November 3, 1988), p. C-l 

29. BRAVE NEW WORLD REVISITED, p. 25 

30. BRAVE NEW WORLD REVISITED, p. 1 16 

3 1 . BETWEEN TWO AGES, P. 258 

CHAPTER ONE: TOMORROW’S RULERS 

32. MYSTERY MARK OF THE NEW AGE, p. 233 

33. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 200 

34. BEHIND THE LODGE DOOR, p. 240 

35. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 105 

36. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 817 

37. Albert Pike, Legenda XLX-XXX, p. 160, as quoted in A 
BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 291 

38. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 817 

39. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 325 

40. DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, p. viii 

41 . THE HIDDEN DANGERS OF THE RAINBOW, p. 40 

42. THE EXTERN ALIS ATION OF THE HIERARCHY, p. 5 1 1 

43. quoted by Kathleen Hayes in her article on Masonry 

44. DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, p. 195 

45. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 454 

46. quoted by Kathleen Hayes in her article on Masonry 


317 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER ONE: TOMORROW'S RULERS continued 

47. Don Bell Reports, (November 12, 1965), p. 1 

48. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 715 

49. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 455 

50. THE EXTERN ALISATION OF THE HIERARCHY, p. 5 10 

51. Ruth Montgomery, Herald of the New Age, p. 265, 
quoted in MYSTERY MARK OF THE NEW AGE, p. 197 

52. THE HIDDEN DANGERS OF THE NEW AGE, p. 20 

53. Time magazine, (December 7, 1987), p. 62 

54. The New American, (October 12, 1982), p. 6 

55. THE HIDDEN DANGERS OF THE RAINBOW, p. 17 

CHAPTER TWO: THE NEW AGE MOVEMENT 

56. Friedrich Nietzsche, quoted in THE SPEAR OF 
DESTINY, p. 28 

57. DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, p. 153 

58. DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, p. 177 

59. THE SOCIALIST NETWORK, p. 23 

60. DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, p. 63 

61. DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, p. 141 

62. THE HIDDEN DANGERS OF THE RAINBOW, p. 190 

63. Ruth Montgomery, as quoted in DARK SECRETS OF 
THE NEW AGE, p. 136 

64. Ruth Montgomery, as quoted in DARK SECRETS OF 
THE NEW AGE, p. 142 

65. MYSTERY MARK OF THE NEW AGE, p. 153 

66. MYSTERY MARK OF THE NEW AGE, p. 153 

67. MYSTERY MARK OF THE NEW AGE, p. 153 

68. full page advertisement that appeared on April 25, 1982, 
in various newspapers all over the world 

69. MYSTERY MARK OF THE NEW AGE, p. 234 

70. MYSTERY MARK OF THE NEW AGE, p. 32 

7 1 . THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 225 

72. George Bernard Shaw, The Intelligent Woman's Guide to 
Socialism, p. 470 

73. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 833 

74. WORLD REVOLUTION, p. 13 

75. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 78 

76. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 200-201 

77. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 85 

78. 1984, p. 142 


318 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER THREE: LORD MAITREYA 

79. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 101 

80. MYSTERY MARK OF THE NEW AGE, p. 13 

81. A GIFT OF PROPHECY, p. 185-187 

82. A GIFT OF PROPHECY, p. 185-187 

83. A GIFT OF PROPHECY, p. 178-181 

84. A GIFT OF PROPHECY, p. 181 

85. A GIFT OF PROPHECY, p. 181 

86. New York Times, (February 4, 1962), p. A-l 

87. New York Times, (February 4, 1962), p. A-l 

CHAPTER FOUR: THE ANCIENT MYSTERIES 

88. THE EXTERN ALISATION OF THE HIERARCHY, p. 5 14 

89. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 497 

90. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, first page 
opposite the portrait of Albert Mackey 

91. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 44 

92. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 44 

93. WHAT THE ANCIENT WISDOM EXPECTS OF ITS 
DISCIPLES, p. 23 

94. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. CLXIX 

95. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XX 

96. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XX 

97. WHAT THE ANCIENT WISDOM EXPECTS OF ITS 
DISCIPLES, p. 56 

98. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. CXCVII 

99. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XVII 

100. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 373 

101. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 428 

102. WHAT THE ANCIENT WISDOM EXPECTS OF ITS 
DISCIPLES, p. 1 

103. THE ROYAL MASONIC ENCYCLOPAEDIA, p. 124 

104. FREEMASONRY EXPOSED, p. 80-85 

105. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 274 

106. WHAT THE ANCIENT WISDOM EXPECTS OF ITS 
DISCIPLES, p. 58 

107. George Steinmetz, Freemasonry, Its Hidden Meaning, p. 

123 

108. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XXI 

109. THE ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 497 

110. THE MASTERS CARPET, p. 7 


319 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER FOUR: THE ANCIENT MYSTERIES 
continued 

111. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 363 
CHAPTER FIVE: SECRET SOCIETIES 

112. Arthur Edward Waite, Real History of the Rosicrucians, 
(Blauvelt, N.Y.: Steinerbooks, 1977), p. A 

113. AMERICA’S SECRET ESTABLISHMENT, p. 117 

1 14. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 817 

1 15. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 1 12 

1 16. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 91 

1 17. ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 574 

CHAPTER SIX: CONCEALED MYSTERIES 

118. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 246 

119. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 331 

120. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 129 

121. MYSTERY MARK OF THE NEW AGE, p. 1 19 

122. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 849 

123. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 21 

124. Max Toth, Pyramid Prophecies, (New York: Warner 
Press, 1979), p. 239 

125. Alice Bailey, The Reappearance of the Christ, pp. 121- 
123, as quoted in MYSTERY MARK OF THE NEW AGE, 

p. 241 

126. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 9 

127. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 100 

128. SECRET SOCIETIES AND SUBVERSIVE 
MOVEMENTS, p. iv 

129. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 172 

130. MARX AND SATAN, p. 59 

CHAPTER SEVEN: SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 

131. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. 
LXXXVIII 

132. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES. P. 
LXXXVIII 

133. WHAT THE ANCIENT WISDOM EXPECTS OF ITS 
DISCIPLES, p.29 


320 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER SEVEN: SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 
continued 


134. WHAT THE ANCIENT WISDOM EXPECTS OF ITS 
DISCIPLES, p, 26 

135. 5/5/2000, p. Ill 

136. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. 
LXXXVIII 

137. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. LV 

138. SERPENT IN THE SKY, p. 71 

139. THE ROYAL MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA, p. 67-68 

140. THE TWO BABYLONS, p. 227 

141. "Satan's Master Plan," The Good News magazine, (Sep- 
tember, 1986), p. 10-12 

142. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 93 

143. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 107 

144. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 106 

145. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 95 

146. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 593 

147. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 77 

148. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 591 

149. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 13 

150. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 776 

151. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 736-737 

152. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 97 

153. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 205 

154. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 548, 550 

155. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 540 

156. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 27 

157. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 3 1 

158. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 31 

159. FREEMASONRY EXPOSED, p. 46 

160. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 518 

161. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 592 

162. THE ROYAL MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA, p. 171 

163. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 288 

164. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 107 

165. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 145 

166. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 227 

167. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 251 

168. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 152 

169. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 153 


321 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER SEVEN: SERPENTS, STARS AND SUNS 
continued 


170. Jack Harris, Freemasonry: The Invisible Cult in Our 
Midst, (Chattanooga, Tennessee: Global Publishers, 1983), 
p. 34 

171. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 655 

172. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 153 

173. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 80 

174. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 58 

175. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 64 

176. THE MASTERS CARPET, p. 306 

177. DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, p. 197-198 

178. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 4 
CHAPTER EIGHT: THE AUTHOR'S CLARIFICATION 


No footnotes 


CHAPTER NINE: LUCIFER WORSHIP 

179. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 859 

180. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 102 

181. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 697 

182. OCCULT THEOCRASY, p. 220-221 

183. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XXI 

184. THE LOST KEYS OF FREEMASONRY, p. 48 

185. MARX AND SATAN, p. 26-27 

1 86. DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, p. 76 

187. DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, p. 74 

188. THE MEANING OF MASONRY, p. 47 

189. THE MEANING OF MASONRY, p. 94 

190. THE MEANING OF MASONRY, p. 140-141 

191. SERPENT IN THE SKY, p. 145 

192. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 194 

193. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 194 

194. John Denver, quoted by Samantha Smith and Kathleen 
Hayes, Grave New World, (self-published paper, 1986), p. 

4 

195. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 64 

196. DANCING IN THE LIGHT, p. 104 

197. DANCING IN THE LIGHT, p. 1 12 

198. DANCING IN THE LIGHT, p. 42 


322 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER NINE: LUCIFER WORSHIP continued 

199. DANCING IN THE LIGHT, p. 1 17 

200. OUT ON A LIMB, p. 14 

201. Parade Magazine, (December 18, 1988), p. 23 

202. OUT ON A LIMB, p. 16 

203. OUT ON A LIMB, p. 23 

204. Newsweek magazine, (July 27, 1987) 

205. Newsweek magazine, (July 27, 1987) 

206. Newsweek magazine, (July 27, 1987) 

207. Newsweek magazine, (July 27, 1987) 

208. Time magazine, (December 7, 1987), p. 64 

209. SECRET^ SOCIETIES AND SUBVERSIVE 
MOVEMENTS, p. 30 

CHAPTER TEN: BECOMING A GOD 

210. SECRET SYMBOLISM IN OCCULT ART, p. 1 17 

211. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 63 

212. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. CXCVII 

213. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. CCIII 

214. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 413 

215. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 405 

216. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 17 

217. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 64 

218. WORLD REVOLUTION, p. 9 

219. Harold Bolen, New Age magazine, as quoted by Everett 
C. de Velde, Jr., Christianity and Civilization, p. 280 

220. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 437 

221. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 17 

222. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 737 

223. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 718 

224. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 810 

CHAPTER ELEVEN: SONS OF LIGHT 

225. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 447 

226. DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, p. 121 

227. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 78 

228. A PLANNED DECEPTION, p. 246 

229. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 252 

230. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 248 

23 1 . MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 32 


323 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER ELEVEN: SONS OF LIGHT continued 

232. THE ROYAL MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA, p. 682 

233. Henry Rugg, editor. The Freemasons' Repository, Volume 
XII, 1882-1883, (Providence, Rhode Island: E.L.Freeman 

& Co., undated), pps. 102-103 

234. as above, p. 100, 102 

235. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 446 

236. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 275 

237. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 321 

238. THE LOST KEYS OF FREEMASONRY, p. 48 

239. THE LOST KEYS OF FREEMASONRY, p. 55 

240. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 287 

CHAPTER TWELVE: EAST AND WEST 

241. FREEMASONRY EXPOSED, p. 15 

242. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 366 

243. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 227 

CHAPTER THIRTEEN: THE PYRAMID OF GIZA 

244. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 540 

245. New Age magazine, (October, 1953), as quoted by Don 
Bell Reports, (March 5, 1965), p. 2 

246. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XII 

247. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XLIV 

248. 5/5/2000, p. 126-127 

249. Pyramid Prophecies, p. xii 

250. 5/5/2000, p. 231 

25 1 . THE TWISTED CROSS, p. 1 1 

252. 5/5/2000, p. 109 

253. 5/5/2000, p. 188 

254. THE MYSTERIES OF THE GREAT PYRAMID, p. 28 

255. 5/5/2000, p. Ill 

256. 5/5/2000, p. 153 

257. 5/5/2000, p. 149 

258. 5/5/2000, p. 149 

259. 5/5/2000, p. 150 

260. 5/5/2000, p. 150 

261. 5/5/2000, p. 165 

262. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 60-61 

263. 5/5/2000, p. 231 


324 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER THIRTEEN: THE PYRAMID OF GIZA 
continued 


264. THE AQUARIAN CONSPIRACY, p. 19 

265. THE HIDDEN DANGERS OF THE RAINBOW, p. 227 
CHAPTER FOURTEEN: OBELISKS 


266. The Freemasons' Repository, p. 220 

267. THE MAGIC OF OBELISKS, p. 1 

268. THE COSMIC CONSPIRACY, p. 73 

269. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 82 

270. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 78 

271. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 82 

272. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 82 

273. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 460 

274. THE ROYAL MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA, p. 52 1 

275. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 525 

276. Time magazine, (February 2, 1981), p. 9 

277. Time magazine, (January 21, 1985) 

CHAPTER FIFTEEN: THE ILLUMINATI 

278. Winston Churchill, Illustrated Sunday Herald, (February 
8, 1920), quoted by Review of the News, (January 26, 

1972), p. 57 

279. Adam Weishaupt, quoted by Gary North, Conspiracy, A 
Biblical View, (Ft. Worth: Dominion Press, 1986), p. 57

280. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 64 

281. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 4 

282. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 125 

283. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 367 

284. FIRE IN THE MINDS OF MEN, p. 97 

285. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 1 18 

286. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 3 

287. SECRET SOCIETIES AND SUBVERSIVE 
MOVEMENTS, p. 219 

288. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p.91-92 

289. SECRET SOCIETIES AND SUBVERSIVE 
MOVEMENTS, p. 215, 216 

290. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 123 

291. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 6-7 

292. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 74 


325 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER FIFTEEN: THE ILLUMINATI continued 

293. WORLD REVOLUTION, p. 9 

294. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 106 

295. WORLD REVOLUTION, p. 13 

296. Diedre Manifold, Karl Marx, True of False Prophet?, 
(Galway, Ireland: Firinne Publications, 1985), p. 77 

297. WORLD REVOLUTION, p. 22 

298. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 84 

299. THE MAGIC OF OBELISKS, p. 314-315 

300. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 7 

301. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 8 

302. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 8 

303. THE ROYAL MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA, p. 133 

304. PARADE TO GLORY, p. 51 

305. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 843 

306. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 628 

307. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 63 

308. THE ROYAL MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA , p. 608 

309. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 176 

310. "Thomas Jefferson," Freemen Digest, (Salt Lake City: The 
Freemen Institute, 1981), p. 83 

311. as above, p. 83 

312. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 347 

313. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 842 

3 14. THE ROYAL MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA, p. 329-330 

315. WORLD REVOLUTION, p. 78 

316. WORLD REVOLUTION, p. 78 

317. THE UNSEEN HAND, p. 133 

318. Captain Michael Shaack, Anarchy and Anarchists, (pub 
lisher not mentioned, 1889) 

319. Review of the News, (December 21, 1977), p. 39 

320. Review of the News, (December 21, 1977), p. 39 

CHAPTER SIXTEEN: KARL MARX, S ATANIST 

321. MARX AND SATAN, p. 11 

322. MARX AND SATAN, p. 22 

323. WAS KARL MARX A SATANIST?, p. 19 

324. WAS KARL MARX A SATANIST?, p. 4 

325. WAS KARL MARX A SATANIST?, p. 7 

326. MARX AND SATAN, p. 59 

327. THE COMMUNIST MANIFESTO, p. 22 


326 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER SIXTEEN: KARL MARX, SATINIST 
continued 


328. MARX AND SATAN, p. 32 

329. J. Edgar Hoover, Masters of Deceit, (New York: Pocket 
Books, Inc., 1958), p. 15 

330. WAS KARL MARX A SATANIST?, p. 20-21 

331. WAS KARL MARX A SATANIST?, p. 20-21 

332. MARX AND SATAN, p. 29 

333. MARX AND SATAN, p. 59 

334. quoted by G. Edward Griffin, This Is the John Birch 
Society, (Thousand Oaks, California: American Media, 

1972), p. 46 

335. Two Worlds, (Bensenville, Illinois: Flick-Reedy Education 
Enterprises, 1966), p. 107 

.336. quoted by J. Edgar Hoover, Masters of Deceit, (New 
York: Pocket Books, 1958), p. 300 

337. as above, p. 299 

338. Dr. Fred Schwarz, You Can Trust the Communists, (Eng- 
lewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1960), p. 

155 

339. Masters of Deceit, p. 299 

340. Zbigniew Brzezinski, Between Two Ages, (New York: 
Penguin Books, 1970), p. 72, 73, 74, 83, 123 

341. "From A China Traveller," David Rockefeller, New York 
Times, (August 10, 1973), p. L 31 

342. WORLD REVOLUTION, p. 13 

343. Whittaker Chambers, Witness, (New York: Random 
House, 1952), p. 16 


CHAPTER SEVENTEEN: ADOLF HITLER, SATANIST 

344. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 9 1 

345. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 164 

346. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 164 

347. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 167 

348. THE SPEAR OF DESTINY, p. 102 

349. THE SPEAR OF DESTINY, p. 159 

350. THE TWISTED CROSS, p. 108 

351. THE SPEAR OF DESTINY, p. 23 

352. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 156 

353. THE SPEAR OF DESTINY, p. 153 

354. THE SPEAR OF DESTINY, p. xxi 


327 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER SEVENTEEN: ADOLF HITLER, SATANIST 
continued 


355. THE SPEAR OF DESTINY, p. 91 

356. THE TWISTED CROSS, p. 1 16 

357. THE SPEAR OF DESTINY, p. 91 

358. THE SPEAR OF DESTINY, p. 92 

359. THE TWISTED CROSS, p. 102-103 

360. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 168 

361. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 37 

362. THE OCCULT AND THE THIRD REICH, p. 169 

CHAPTER EIGHTEEN: THE GREAT SEAL 

363. THE SECRET DESTINY OF AMERICA, p. 9 

364. THE SECRET DESTINY OF AMERICA, p. 1 1 

365. THE SECRET DESTINY OF AMERICA, p. 130 

366. THE SECRET DESTINY OF AMERICA, p. 134 

367. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XCI 

368. THE SECRET DESTINY OF AMERICA, p. 177-178 

369. Pyramid Prophecies, P. 24 

370. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XC 

371. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XCI 

372. THE SECRET DESTINY OF AMERICA, p. 181 

373. THE SECRET TEACHINHGS OF ALL AGES, p. XC 

374. FIRE IN THE MINDS OF MEN, p. 6 

375. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. CXL 

376. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 150, 142 

377. THE ROYAL MASONIC ENCYCLOPAEDIA, p. 168 

378. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 426, 291 

379. Robert Hieronimus, The Two Great Seals of America 
Baltimore: Savitriaum, 1976), p. 19 

380. E. Raymond Capt, Our Great Seal, (Thousand Oaks, 
California: Artisan Sales, 1979), p. 42 

381. Stan Deyo, The Cosmic Conspiracy, (Kalamunda, Western 
Australia: West Australian Texas Trading, 1978), p. 73 

382. H.L. Haywood, Freemasonry and the Bible, (Great Brit- 
ain: William Collins Sons and Co., Ltd.), p. 16 

383. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 47-48 

384. THE ROYAL MASONIC ENCYCLOPAEDIA, p. 3 1 

385. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 148 

386. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 48 

387. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 375 


328 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER EIGHTEEN: THE GREAT SEAL 
continued 

386. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XLV 

387. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 375 

388. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XLV 

389. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 247 

890. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 506 

891. Robert Keith Spencer, The Cult of the All-Seeing Eye, 

(city not shown: Monte Carlo Press, 1964), p. 24 

392. Our Great Seal p. 59 

393. THE LOST KEYS OF F REEM ASONRY, p. 62 

394. THE MASTER'S CARPET, p. 153 

395. The New Age magazine, (The Supreme Council, Wash- 
ington D.C.), April, 1960 

396. The Cosmic Conspiracy, p. 73 

397. The Cult of the All-Seeing Eye, p. 23 

398. Our Great Seal, p. 39 

399. "Thoughts About America," pamphlet published by the 
Supreme Council of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry, 

33rd Degree, (January, 1986). 

400. Henry C. Clausen, Masons Who Have Shaped Our 
Nation, (Washington D.C.: The Supreme Council, 1976), 
p. 84 

401. Masons Who Have Shaped Our Nation, p. 12 

402. Manly P. Hall, Freemasonry of the Ancient Egyptians, 

(Los Angeles: The Philosophical Research Society, 1982), 

p. 70 

403. C. William Smith, God's Plan In America, an article in 
the New Age magazine, (September, 1950), p. 551 

CHAPTER NINETEEN: THE FREEMASONS 

404. "What About Today?," article in the New Age magazine, 
(November, 1946), p. 667 

405. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 451 

406. THE EXTERN ALISATION OF THE HIERARCHY, p. 5 1 1 

407. Henry C. Clausen, pamphlet entitled "What is the 
Scottish Rite?," published by the Scottish Rite Supreme 
Council, 33rd Degree, Washington D.C. 

408. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 17 


329 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER NINETEEN: THE FREEMASONS continued 

409. Arthur M. Schlesinger, Jr., History of U.S. Political 
Parties, Vol. 1, 1789-1960, (New York: Chelsea House 
Publishers, 1973), p. 634 

410. William Preston Campbell-Everden, Freemasonry and Its 
Etiguette, (New York: Weathervane Books, 1978), p. 10 

411. George Steinmetz, Freemasonry, Its Hidden Meaning, p. 5 

412. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 819 

413. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 104-105 

414. THE ROYAL MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA, p. 18 

415. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 433 

416. THE LOST KEYS OF FREEMASONRY, p. 14 

417. THE ROYAL MASONIC CYCLOPAEDIA, p. 206 

418. MORALS AND DOGMA, p.218-219 

419. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 7 

420. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 526 

42 1 . LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 434 

422. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 2 1 3 

423. Bill Mankin, quoted in "The Masonic Lodge," a pamphlet 
produced by the John Ankerberg Show, Chattanooga, 
Tennessee, (1986), p. 34-35 

424. Quoted on page 6 of the pamphlet entitled "The Masonic 
Lodge," produced by the John Ankerberg Show, Chat- 
tanooga, Tennessee, (1986). 

425. pamphlet, "The Masonic Lodge," p. 6 

426. pamphlet, "The Masonic Lodge," p. 26 

427. pamphlet, "The Masonic Lodge," p. 7 

428. CLAUSEN'S COMMENTARIES ON MORALS AND 
DOGMA, p. 75 

429. pamphlet, "The Masonic Lodge," p. 13 

430. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 41 1, 548 

43 1 . MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 407 

432. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 781 

433. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. iv 

434. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 324 

435. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 324 

436. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 618-619 

437. THE MASTER'S CARPET, p. 50 

438. THE MYSTERIES OF THE GREAT PYRAMID, p. 206 

439. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 624 

440. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 22 


330 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER NINETEEN: THE FREEMASONS continued 

441 . THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XXII 

442. SERPENT IN THE SKY, p. 123 

443. Henry C. Clausen, pamphlet on Freemasonry, published 
by the Supreme Council, 33rd Degree, Scottish Rite of 
Freemasonry 

CHAPTER TWENTY: THOSE WHO OBJECT 

444. The Freemason's Repository, p. 17 

445. FREEMASONRY EXPOSED, p. iii 

446. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 492 

447. William Preston Vaughn, The Antimasonic Party in the 
United States, (Kentucky: The University Press of 
Kentucky, 1983), p. 13 

448. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 57-58 

449. Jack Harris, Freemasonry: The Invisible Cult In Our 
Midst, (Global Publishers: Chattanooga, Tennessee, 1983), 

p. 128 

450. Pamphlet, Presidents United States, (Chicago National 
Christian Association, 1953), p. 6 

451. as above, pamphlet, p. 7 

452. as above, pamphlet, p. 8 

453. Everett C. De Velde, Jr., A Reformed View of Free- 
masonry, in Christianity and Civilization, p. 278 

454. William Preston Vaughn, The Anti -Masonic Party in the 
United States, (Kentucky: University Press of Kentucky, 

1983), p. 29 

455. Charles G. Finney, Why I Left Freemasonry, (National 
Christian Association, 1868) 

456. Pope Leo XIII, The Church Speaks fo the Modern World, 
(Garden City, N.Y.: Image Books, 1954), p. 122 

457. as above, p. 123 

458. as above, p. 127 

459. as above, p. 128-129 

460. Time magazine, (June 18, 1984), p. 52 

461. Bernard Fay, Revolution and Freemasonry, 1680-1800, 
(Boston: Little, Brown, and Company, 1935), p. Ill 

462. Arthur Edward Waite, The Encyclopaedia of Freemason- 
ry, (New York: Weathervane Books, 1920), p. 32 

463. Christ or The Lodge, (Philadelphia: Great Commission 
Publications, undated), p. 22-23 


331 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER TWENTY: THOSE WHO OBJECT continued 

464. Arizona Daily Star, (July 14, 1987), p. 8-a 

465. THE MASTER’S CARPET, p. 25 

CHAPTER TWENTY-ONE: ALBERT PIKE 

466. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 95-96 

467. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. CXCVII 

468. Dr. Robert B. Watts, pamphlet published by the Masonic 
Order, the Supreme Council, 1978, p. 3 

469. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 2 

470. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 2 

471. CLAUSEN'S COMMENTARIES ON MORALS AND 
DOGMA, p. xvii 

472. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 564 

473. BEHIND THE LODGE DOOR, p. 210 

474. FREEMASONRY EXPOSED, p. 75 

CHAPTER TWENTY-TWO: HIRAM ABIF 

475. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 329-330 

476. THE MASTER’S CARPET, p. 339 

477. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 10 

478. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 66 

479. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 73 

CHAPTER TWENTY-THREE: THE HIERARCHY 

480. THE EXTERN ALISATION OF THE HIERARCHY, p. 
521-522 

481. THE EXTERN ALISATION OF THE HIERARCHY, p. 
521-522 

482. THE EXTERN ALISATION OF THE HIERARCHY, p. 522 

483. THE EXTERN ALISATION OF THE HIERARCHY, p. 5 19 

484. THE EXTERN ALISATION OF THE HIERARCHY, p. 5 15 

485. SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. CLXIV 

486. THE LOST KEYS OF FREEMASONRY, p. 100 

487. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 817 

488. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. CCIV 

489. SAY NO TO THE NEW WORLD ORDER, p. 7 


332 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER TWENTY-FOUR: MASONIC OBLIGATIONS 

490. Malcolm C. Duncan, Duncan's Masonic Ritual and Moni- 
tor, (New York: David McKay and Company, Inc., not 

dated), p. 95 

491. Pastor Earl Jones, Christian Crusade For Truth Intel- 
ligence Newsletter, (May-June, 1989), (Deming, New 
Mexico: Pastor Earl Jones, 1989), p. Seven 

492. FREEMASONRY EXPOSED, p. 75 

493. INTRODUCTION TO FREEMASONRY, p. 138-139 

494. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF FREEMASONRY, p. 525 

CHAPTER TWENTY-FrVE: THE THIRTY-THIRD DEGREE 

495. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. CCI 

496. THE DEADLY DECEPTION, p. 156 

497. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. 14 

498. THE SECRET TEACHINGS OF ALL AGES, p. XC 

499. SECRET SYMNBOLISM IN OCCULT ART, p. 150 

500. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 188 

501. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 144 

502. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 289 

503. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 287 

504. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 283 

505. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 321 

506. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 292 

507. THE ROY AY MASONIC ENCYCLOPAEDIA, p. 7 

508. BEHIND THE LODGE DOOR, p. 29 

509. THE DEADLY DECEPTION, p. 102-103 

510. THE DEADLY DECEPTION, p. 104 

511. E.M. Storms, Should a Christian Be A Mason?, (Fletcher, 
North Carolina: New Puritan Library, 1980), foreward 

page 

5 12. OCCULT THEOCRAS Y, p. 363-364 

513. A BRIDGE TO LIGHT, p. 319 

CHAPTER TWENTY-SIX: THE HUMANISTS 

514. Homer Duncan, Secular Humanism, (distributed by 
Christian Focus on Government, Inc.: Lubbock, Texas, 

1979), p. 13 

515. Secular Humanism, p. 13 

516. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 7, 8 


333 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER TWENTY-SIX: THE HUMANISTS continued 

517. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 10 

518. THE COMMUNIKST MANIFESTO, p. 20 

519. Saturday Review magazine, (August 10, 1974), p. 84 

520. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 13 

521. THE COMMUNIST MANIFESTO, p. 47 

522. THE UNSEEN HAND, p. 225-226 

523. Review of the News, (July 16, 1975), p. 57 

524. Arizona Daily Star, (September 2, 1977) 

525. The Houston Chronicle, (November 16, 1977) 

526. The Review of the News, (June 27, 1979), p. 1 1 

527. The Tucson Citizen, (Aigist 13, 1987), p. 8A 

528. William J. Murray, letter in possession of author 

529. Karl Marx, Economic Politique et Philosophie, Vol. I, p. 
38-40 

530. Review of the News, (October 24, 1973), p. 49 

531. 367 U.S. Reports, p., 495, as cited by Barbara Morris, 
Change Agents in the Schools, (Upland, California: The 
Barbara M. Morris Report, 1979), p. 19 

532. United States v. Seeger, 1965, as cited by Claire 
Chambers, The SIECUS Circle, (Appleton, Wisconsin: 
Western Islands, 1977), p. 93 

533. quoting Lloyd Morain, as cited by Claire Chamber, The 
SIECUS Circle, p. 92 

534. Dr. Henry Morris, "The Gospel of Creation and the Anti- 
Gospel of Evolution," Institute of Creation Research 
Impact No. 25, p. iii 

535. Arizona Daily Star, (March 5, 1987), p. A-l 
CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVEN: SITUATION ETHICS 

536. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 17 

537. Time magazine, (December 7, 1987), p. 72 

538. The SIECUS Circle, p. 37 

539. John Stormer, Death of a Nation, (Florissant, Missouri, 
Liberty Bell Press, 1968), p. 97 

540. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 78 

541. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 61 

542. DANCING IN THE LIGHT, p. 203 

543. H.L. Haywood, quoted by pamphlet entitled "Christ or 
the Lodge?," (Philadelphia: Great Commission Publica- 
tions, 1942), p. 14 


334 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVEN: SITUATION ETHICS 
continued 

544. W.L. Wilmshurst, The Meaning of Masonry, (New York: 
Bell Publishing Company, 1927), p. 96 

545. MORALS AND DOGMA, p. 37 

546. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 407 

547. THE SPEAR OF DESTINY, p. 28 

548. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 203 

549. Diedre Manifold, Karl Marx, True of False Prophet,(G- 
alway, Ireland: Firinne Publications, 1985) 9, p. 66 

550. Two Worlds, p. 107 

551. quoted by G. Edward Griffin, This Is the John Birch 
Society, (Thousand Oaks, California: American Media, 

1972), p. 38 

552. Nikolai Lenin, Collected Works, Volume XVII, p. 321-323 

553. MARX AND SATAN, p. 58-59 

554. MARX AND SATAN, p. 108 

555. MARX AND SATAN, p. 96 

556. MARX AND SATAN, p. 97 

557. Aldous Huxley, Brave New World Revisited, (New York: 
Harper & Brothers, 1958), p. 23 

CHAPTER TWENTY-EIGHT: THE ATTACK ON RELIGION 

558. Dr. Everett Sileven, America's First Padlocked Church, 
(Louisville, Nebraska: Fundamentalist Publications, 

1983), p. 39 

559. America's First Padlocked Church, p. 25 

CHAPTER TWENTY-NINE: THE ATTACK ON 
THE FAMILY 

560. THE AQUARIAN CONSPIRACY, p. 397 

561. THE AQUARIAN CONSPIRACY, p. 397-398 

562. Tucson Citizen, (July 6, 1989), p. 6A 

563. THE COMMUNIST MANIFESTO, p. 47-48 

564. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 121 

565. The New American, (June 20, 1988), p. 22-23 

566. The New American, (June 20, 1988), p. 22 

567. Death of a Nation, p. 132 

568. Review of the News, (February 12, 1970) 

569. Fusion magazine, (July, 1981), p. 52 


335 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER TWENTY-NINE: THE ATTACK ON 
THE FAMILY continued 

570. quoted in the John Birch Society Bulletin, (March, 1989) 

571. Fusion magazine, (July, 1981), p. 52 

572. Review of the News, (May 22, 1985), p. 37 

573. Parage magazine, (December 11, 1988), p. 19 

574. Review of the News, (March 21, 1979), p. 25 

575. William E. Simon, Should We Bail Out Gorbachev?, 
Reader's Digest, (September, 1988), p. 67 

576. The Conservative Digest, (March/ April), p. 5 

577. American Opinion, (June, 1985), p. 39 

578. Tucson Citizen, (November 14, 1988), p. 9A 

579. Human Events, (October 18, 1986), p. 919 

580. A PLANNED DECEPTION, p. 165 

581. A PLANNED DECEPTION, p. 165 

582. A PLANNED DECEPTION, p. 165 

583. Karl Marx, True or False Prophet?, p. 118-1 19 

584. The New American, (November 9, 1987), p. 49 

585. The New American, (January 30, 1989), p. 7 

586. The New American, (January 30, 1989), p. 7 

587. The New American, (January 30, 1989), p. 7 

588. Arizona Daily Star, (July 13, 1987), p. 10-A 

589. Newsweek magazine, (January 12, 1981), p. 15 

590. Arizona Daily Republic, (June 7, 1980), p. 1 

591. Parage magazine, (February 26, 1989), p. 14 

592. The Review of the News, (July 14, 1984), p. 30 

CHAPTER THIRTY: THE RIGHT OF ASSOCIATION 

593. Arizona Daily Star, (May 5, 1987), p. 1-A 

594. Action Newsletter, (November, 1988), p. 5 

595. The Review of the News, (November 16, 1983), p. 57 

596. Tucson Citizen, (September 24, 1987) 

597. Senator John McCain's press release of April 13, 1989 

598. The Arizona Daily Star, (April 14, 1989), p. A-6 

CHAPTER THIRTY-ONE: THE ATTACK ON EDUCATION 

599. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 1 1 1 

600. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 109 

601. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 75 

602. THE COMMUNIST MANIFESTO, p. 56 


336 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER THIRTY-ONE: THE ATTACK ON EDUCATION 
continued 

603. The New American, (March 13, 1989), p. 12 

604. The New American, (March 13, 1989), p. 1 1 
The New American, (March 13, 1989), p. 11 

606. Henry C. Clausen, "Devilish Danger," pamphlet published 
by the Supreme Council of the Scottish Rite of Free- 
masonry 

607. NEA: TROJAN HORSE IN AMERICAN EDUCATION, p. 

254 

608. NEA: TROJAN HORSE IN AMERICAN EDUCATION, p. 

257 

609. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 1 19 

610. Mel and Norma Gabler, What Are They Teaching Our 
Children?, (Wheaton, Illinois: Victor Books, 1985), p. 119 

611. What Are They Teaching Our Children?, p. 121-122 

612. Secular Humanism, p. 18 

613. DARK SECRETS OF THE NEW AGE, p. 233-234 

614. James C. Hefley, Are Textbooks Ruining Your Children?, 
(Milford, Michigan: Mott Media, 1976), p. 31 

615. Education USA, (September 24, 1979), p. 29 

616. Education USA, (February 11, 1980), p. 179 

617. Arizona Daily Star, (May 31, 1984), p. A-2 

CHAPTER THIRTY-TWO: RUSSIAN LAWS 

618. BEHIND THE LODGE DOOR, p. 130 

619. BEHIND THE LODGE DOOR, p. 284 

620. U.S. Congressional Record, Vol. 77, p. 1539-1540, as 
quoted in the Naked Communist, p. 308 

621. Selected Essays of Karl Marx, p. 16, as quoted in The 
Naked Communist, p. 50 

622. Alexander Solshenitsyn, as quoted by David Balsiger, 
Liberation Theology, p. 15 

623. THE HIDDEN DANGERS OF THE RAINBOW, p. 65 

624. THE HIDDEN DANGERS OF THE RAINBOW, p. 64 

625. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 150 

626. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 13 

627. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 16 

628. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 8 


337 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER THIRTY-TWO: RUSSIAN LAWS continued 

629. The Crisis in Religions Freedom newsletter, published by 
the Coalition For Religious Freedom, (Washington D.C., 

1987), p. 1 

CHAPTER THIRTY-THREE: THE ATTACK ON PROPERTY 

630. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 10 

631. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 61 

632. Karl Marx, Capital and Other Writings, (New York: The 
Modern Library, 1932), p. 2 

633. Capital and Other Writings, p. xi 

634. THE COMMUNBIST MANIFESTO, p. 19 

635. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 10 

CHAPTER THIRTY-FOUR: THE ATTACK ON 
NATIONALISM 

636. PROOFS OF A CONSPIRACY, p. 61 

637. SECRET SOCIETIES AND SUBVERSIVE 
MOVEMENTS, p. 214 

638. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 198 

639. THE COMMUNIST MANIFESTO, p. 23 

640. HUMANIST MANIFESTOS I AND II, p. 21 

641 . LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 466 

642. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY, p. 109 

643. Between Two Ages, p. 274 

644. LECTURES ON ANCIENT PHILOSPHY, p. 463 

CHAPTER THIRTY-FIVE: ANSWERING THE SKEPTIC 


No footnotes 


CHAPTER THIRTY-SIX: REAGAN AND BUSH 

645. New Age magazine, (April, 1988) 

646. New York Times, (August 16, 1988), p. 12 

647. New York Times, (August 16, 1988), p. 12 

648. New York Times, (August 16, 1988), p. 12 

649. New York Times, (August 19, 1988), p. 8-Y 

650. New York Times, (August 19, 1988), p. 8-Y 


338 



Footnotes 


CHAPTER THIRTY-SIX: REAGAN AND BUSH 
continued 

651. The Arizona Daily Star, (January 3, 1989), p. A- 5 
CHAPTER THIRTY-SEVEN: "ELEVEN SHORT YEARS" 

652. quoted by Dr. David Noebel, Summit Journal, (December, 
1987), p. 8 

CHAPTER THIRTY-EIGHT: THE SUMMATION 

653. CONSPIRACY AGAINST GOD AND MAN, p. 66 

654. George Orwell, 1984, (New York: Harcourt Brace 

Jovanovich, Inc., 1949), p. 220 

CHAPTER THIRTY-NINE: THE SOLUTION 

no footnotes 


339 



RALPH EPPERSON is an 
historian, lecturer, and 

writer who has been re- 
searching the Conspira- 

torial View of History for 
over 27 years. 

He is a graduate of the 
University of Arizona, but 
readily admits that the 
overwhelming majority of the 

material he was taught in college simply was not true. 
He claims that he has had to "re-educate" himself 
since college, and that is what he has done. 

His first book was entitled THE UNSEEN HAND, 
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE CONSPIRATORIAL 
VIEW OF HISTORY. This best-selling book of some 
488 pages, now in its ninth printing, is a documented 

expose of the conspiracy that has plagued America 

with a series of wars, depressions, and inflations for 
some 270 years. Many who have read it have praised 
the author's ability to make sense out of the often 
contradictory evidence of the past. 

This is his second book, and provides the reader with 
the motive for the conspiracy exposed in his first book 
that has actively pursued their goal of THE NEW 
WORLD ORDER for some 6000 years. 

It is his wish that those who read this book will be 
moved to reverse the trend of those who want to re- 
make the world.